M4 Coupe (2026) - Car BMW - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Sports Coupe
Brand	BMW
Model	M4 Coupe (2026)
Engine Type	3.0L M TwinPower Turbo Inline-6
Horsepower	473 hp (base) / 503 hp (Competition)
Transmission	8-speed M Steptronic automatic
Drive Type	Rear-wheel drive (RWD)
Length	4794 mm
Width	1887 mm
Height	1395 mm
Wheelbase	2857 mm
Curb Weight	1650 kg (approx.)
Fuel Type	Premium unleaded gasoline
Fuel Capacity	59 liters
Main Functions	Driving, performance, luxury, connectivity
Maintenance	Oil change every 10,000 km / 1 year; brake fluid every 2 years
Cleaning	Hand wash with mild soap; avoid abrasive cleaners
Safety Features	Airbags, ABS, stability control, lane departure warning, forward collision warning
Spare Parts	Available at authorized BMW dealers
Repairability	Moderate to complex; specialized tools recommended
General Information	Manual available in PDF (372 pages) on notice-facile.com

Frequently Asked Questions - M4 Coupe (2026) BMW

What type of fuel does the BMW M4 Coupe (2026) require?

The BMW M4 Coupe (2026) requires premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or higher.

How often should I change the oil on the M4 Coupe?

BMW recommends an oil change every 10,000 kilometers or 1 year, whichever comes first.

What is the recommended tire pressure for the M4 Coupe?

Tire pressure should be set according to the label on the driver's door jamb. Typically, it is around 2.2 bar (32 psi) front and 2.4 bar (35 psi) rear for normal driving.

Does the 2026 M4 Coupe have a spare tire?

No, the M4 Coupe is equipped with run-flat tires and a tire repair kit instead of a spare tire.

How can I pair my phone with the M4 Coupe's Bluetooth?

Go to iDrive > Communication > Bluetooth > Add device. Ensure your phone is discoverable and select the vehicle from your phone's list.

What is the towing capacity of the BMW M4 Coupe (2026)?

The BMW M4 Coupe (2026) is not rated for towing due to its performance-oriented design.

How do I reset the service indicator on the M4 Coupe?

Insert the key, hold the trip odometer reset button, turn ignition on, and continue holding until the service menu appears. Use the button to navigate and reset.

What is the warranty period for the 2026 M4 Coupe?

BMW offers a 4-year/80,000 km new vehicle limited warranty, plus a 12-year corrosion warranty.

Can I use E85 ethanol fuel in the M4 Coupe?

No, the M4 Coupe is designed for gasoline only. Using E85 or higher ethanol blends may damage the engine and void the warranty.

Where is the VIN number located on the M4 Coupe?

The VIN is visible through the windshield on the driver's side dashboard, and also on the door jamb label and vehicle registration documents.

USER MANUAL M4 Coupe (2026) BMW

WELCOME TO BMW.

Owner's Manual.

Thank you for choosing a BMW.

The more familiar you are with the vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest the following:

Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. It contains important notes on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and traffic safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW.

At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the most current resource. After a vehicle software update – such as a Remote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest information.

You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the onboard literature.

We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

After a vehicle software update – such as a Remote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest information.

! NOTES

Information 6

QUICK REFERENCE

Getting in 16

Set-up and use 20

On the road 23

CONTROLS

Dashboard 30

Sensors of the vehicle 35

Operating state of the vehicle 40

BMW IDrive 44

BMW Remote Software Upgrade 59

Personal settings 63

Opening and closing 69

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel 94

Transporting children safely 105

Driving 110

Displays 127

Light and view 149

Safety 160

Driving stability control systems 191

Driver assistance systems 204

Parking 220

Driving comfort 248

i DRIVING TIPS

BMW M4 technology 278

Things to remember when driving 280

Soving fuel 286

MOBILITY

Refueling 288

Wheels and tires 290

Engine compartment 319

Operating fluids 322

Maintenance 329

Replacing components 331

Breakdown Assistance 335

Vehicle care 342

REFERENCE

Technical data 340

Appendix 351

Everything from A to Z 352

NOTES

Information

Information

Using this Owner's Manual

Orientation

The fastest way to find information on a particular topic is by using the index.

For an overview of the vehicle, we recommend reading the Quick Reference Guide in the Owner's Manual.

Validity of the Owner's Manual

Production of the vehicle

At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the most current resource. Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.

After a software update in the vehicle

After a vehicle software update such as via Remote Software Upgrade the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest information.

Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication

The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication is available as a printed book from an authorized service center.

Media at a glance

General information

The contents of the Owner's Manual are available in various media formats. The following Owner's Manual media formats are available:

▷ Printed Owner's Manual.

▶ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

Printed Owner's Manual

The printed Owner's Manual shows all standard, country-specific, and optional equipment that is currently available, or may become available in the future, for specific models.

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle

Principle

The Integrated Owner's Manual shows all standard, country-specific, and optional equipment that is currently available, or may become available in the future, for specific models. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the control display.

Selecting the Owner's Manual

1. Apps menu

2. "All apps"

3. "Owner's Manual"

4. Select the desired method of accessing the contents.

Scrolling through the Owner's Manual

Information

NOTES

Context help

General Information

The Integrated Owner's Manual can be accessed from any menu. Depending on the selected function, either the associated description or the main menu of the Integrated Owner's Manual will be displayed.

Selecting context help from a menu

1. Press and hold the desired menu item.
2. "General help"

Selecting context help from a Check Control message

Directly from the Check Control message on the control display:

"Owner's Manual"

Supplementary documentation

The media Included with the Owner's Manual is supplemented by additional documents, e.g., Supplementary Owner's Manuals, brochures, or inserts. Supplementary Owner's Manuals or brochures contain, for example, Information on special models or information that must be communicated in printed form due to legal requirements. Inserts may include different information than that given in the media Included with the Owner's Manual. Follow all additional documents that may be enclosed with the onboard literature.

Additional sources of information

Authorized service center

Internet

Vehicle information and general information on BMW such as on technology are available on the Internet; www.bmwusa.com.

BMW Driver's Guide app

The BMW Driver's Guide app shows all standard, country-specific, and optional equipment that is currently available, or may become available in the future, for specific models. The app can be displayed on smartphones and tablets.

BMW Driver's Guide Web

The BMW Driver's Guide website shows all standard, country-specific, and optional equipment that is currently available, or may become available in the future, for specific models. The BMW Driver's Guide Web can be displayed in any current browser.

Icons and displays

Icons in the Owner's Manual

Icon Meaning

Precautions that must be followed in order to avoid the possibility of injury to yourself and to others as well as serious damage to the vehicle.

Measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.

Texts in vehicle used to select individual functions.

Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system.

NOTES

Information

Action steps

Action steps to be carried out are presented as a numbered list. These steps must be carried out in the order shown.

1. First action step.
2. Second action step.

Bulletpoint lists

Items or actions without strict order or alternative options are shown as a bulletpoint list.
▶ First possibility.
▷ Second possibility.

Icons on vehicle parts

This symbol on a vehicle component indicates that further information on the component is available in the Owner's Manual.

Vehicle features and options

This Owner's Manual shows all standard, country-specific, and optional equipment that is currently available, or may become available in the future, for specific models, i.e., model series. Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes and illustrates equipment, systems and functions that are not available in a vehicle, for example due to the following situations:

▶ Selected optional equipment.
▶ National-market version or national-market equipment.
▶ Options for later release and software update.
This also applies to safety functions and systems.
Before starting a journey, verify whether the

hicle, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
A claim for the availability of equipment, a system or a function in the vehicle cannot be derived based on the description in the Owner's Manual.
When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be observed.
For any equipment and models not described In this Owner's Manual, refer to any supplementary documentation included, e.g., Supplementary Owner's Manuals, Inserts.
An authorized service center is happy to answer any questions that you may have about the features and options applicable to the vehicle.

Status of the Owner's Manual

Basic information

The manufacturer of the vehicle pursues a policy of constant development to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the features described in this Owner's Manual may deviate from those in the vehicle.

Validity of the Owner's Manual

Production of the vehicle

At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the most current resource. Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owners' Manual in the vehicle.

Information

NOTES

After a software update in the vehicle

After a vehicle software update such as via Remote Software Upgrade the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest information.

For Your Own Safety

Intended use

Heed the following when using the vehicle:
Owner's Manual.
▶ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove stickers.
▶ Technical vehicle data.
The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the vehicle is driven.

Vehicle documents and statutory documents.

Warranty

The vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration requirements applicable in the country of first delivery, also known as homologation. If the vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be necessary to adopt the vehicle to potentially differing operating conditions and registration requirements. Noncompliance with homologation requirements in a certain country may affect warranty coverage. Please consult the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Booklet for further information on warranty matters.

Maintenance and repairs

Advanced technology, for instance the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and re-

shop is selected, BMW recommends selecting a workshop that performs corresponding work such as maintenance and repair according to BMW specifications with properly trained personnel. In the Owner's Manual, such workshops are referred to as "another qualified service center or repair shop".

If work is not carried out properly, for instance maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subsequent damages and related safety risks.

Improperly performed work on the vehicle paintwork can lead to a failure or fault of components, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby result in a safety hazard.

Parts and accessories

BMW recommends the use of parts and accessory products approved by BMW.

Approved parts and accessories, and advice on their use and installation are available from an authorized service center.

BMW parts and accessories have been tested by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW vehicles.

BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and accessories.

BMW does not evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety hazard, even if a country-specific official approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate whether these products are suitable for BMW vehicles under all usage conditions.

California Proposition 65 Warning

For vehicles sold in California, the law requires vehicle manufacturers to provide the following warning:

WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Batteries posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water. For more information go to www.P65Womings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

WARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

Service and warranty

We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. The vehicle is covered by the following warranties:

▶ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

▶ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.

▶ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty.

▶ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. ▶ California Emission Control System Limited Warranty.

Detailed Information about these warranties is listed in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Booklet.

The vehicle has been specifically adopted and designed to meet the particular operating conditions and homologation requirements. In your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate the vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adopt the vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information.

Maintenance

Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Specifications for maintenance measures:

▶ BMW maintenance system.

Maintenance, refer to page 329.

Maintenance Booklet, available online and accessible to a CP code in the New York

Information

NOTES

If the vehicle is not maintained or is improperly maintained, this could result in serious damage to the vehicle.

A failure to maintain the vehicle or Improper maintenance may affect your warranty coverage. Please consult the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Booklet for further information on warranty matters.

Refer to section on engine oil change regarding recommended service intervals for oil changes.

Data memory

General information

Electronic control devices are installed in the vehicle. Electronic control units process data they receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or exchange with each other. Some control units are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or provide assistance while driving, for instance driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control units facilitate comfort or In-fotainment functions.

Personal reference

Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the country, the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehicle identification number, license plate and corresponding authorities. In addition, there are other ways to associate data collected from the vehicle with the driver or vehicle owner, e.g., the ConnectedDrive account used.

Operating data in the vehicle

Control units process data to operate the vehi-

wheel speed, deceleration, lateral acceleration, engaged seat belt indicator.

▶ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain sensor signals.

The processed data is only processed in the vehicle itself while the vehicle is being operated. Data is not stored beyond the operating time.

Electronic components, e.g. control units and vehicle keys, contain components for storing technical information. Information about the vehicle condition, component usage, maintenance recommendations, events or faults can be stored temporarily or permanently.

This information generally documents the state of a component, a module, a system, or the surrounding area, for instance:

▶ Operating states of system components such as fill levels, tire pressure, battery status.

▶ Malfunctions and faults in important system components, for instance lights and brakes.

▶ Responses by the vehicle to special driving situations such as airbag deployment or engagement of the driving stability control systems.

▶ Information on vehicle-damaging events.

The data is required to perform the control unit functions. Furthermore, it also serves to detect and correct malfunctions, and helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions.

The majority of this data is stored temporarily and is only processed within the vehicle itself. In some circumstances the vehicle may store some data for an additional but limited period of time.

When servicing, for instance during repairs,

NOTES

Information

An authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop can read out the information. The diagnostic socket required by law in the vehicle is used to read out data.

The data is collected, processed, and used by the relevant organizations in the service network. The data documents technical conditions of the vehicle, which can be used to determine vehicle maintenance status, and facilitate quality improvement.

Vehicle fault and event memories can be reset by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop when performing repair or servicing work.

Data entry and data transfer into the vehicle

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort and individual settings can be stored in the vehicle and modified or reset at any time.

This includes, for example:

▶ Settings for the seat and steering wheel positions.

▶ Chassis and air conditioning settings.

If necessary, data can be transferred to the entertainment and communication system of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone.

This includes the following depending on the respective equipment:

Multimedia data such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system.

Address book data for use in conjunction with an integrated hands-free system or an Integrated navigation system.

to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at any time.

This data is only transmitted to third portions upon personal request as part of the use of online services. The transmission depends on the selected settings for the use of the services.

Incorporation of mobile devices

Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile devices connected to the vehicle, for instance smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle operating elements.

The sound and picture from the mobile devices can be played back and displayed through the multimodio system. Certain information is transferred to the mobile devices at the same time. Depending on the type of incorporation, this includes, for instance, position data and other general vehicle information. This optimizes the way in which selected apps, for instance navigation or music playback, work.

There is no further interaction between the mobile device and the vehicle such as active access to vehicle data.

How the data will be processed further is determined by the provider of the particular app being used. The extent of the possible settings depends on the respective app and the operating system of the mobile device.

Services

General information

If the vehicle has a wireless network connection, it will enable data to be exchanged between the vehicle and other systems. The wireless network connection is realized via or in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via

Information

NOTES

apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or by other providers.

Services from the vehicle manufacturer Where online services from the vehicle manufacturer are concerned, the corresponding functions are described in the appropriate place, for instance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's web page. The relevant legal information pertaining to data protection may also be found on the manufacturer's website. Personal data may be used to perform online services. Data is exchanged over a secure connection, for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose. Any collection, processing, and use of personal data above and beyond that needed to provide the services must always be based on a legal permission, contractual arrangement or consent. It is also possible to activate or deactivate the data connection as a whole. This excludes functions and services required by law such as Assist systems.

Services from other providers

When using online services from other providers, these services are the responsibility of the relevant provider and subject to their data privacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged during this process. Information on the way in which personal data is collected and used in relation to services from third parties, the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be obtained from the relevant service provider.

Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

data recorder is designed to record data on driving dynamics and safety systems for a short time of max. 30 seconds, typically less.

This vehicle's event data recorder is designed to record data on the following, for example:

▶ How the vehicle's various systems performed.

▶ Whether or not the driver and passenger seat belts were fastened.

▶ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.

▶ How fast the vehicle was travelling.

This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

Under normal driving conditions, no data is recorded by the event data recorder and no personal data is stored, e.g., name, gender, age, and accident location.

However, other portles, e.g., law enforcement agencies, may combine the recorded data with the personally identifiable data that is routinely collected during a crash investigation.

Special equipment and access to the vehicle or event data recorder are required to read out recorded data. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, e.g., law enforcement agencies, may have the special equipment necessary to read this information if these parties have access to the vehicle or event data recorder.

Vehicle identification number

General information

Depending on the national-market environment

NOTES

Information

Engine compartment

The engraved vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

Right nameplate

The vehicle Identification number can be found on the nameplate, on the right-hand side of the vehicle.

Left nameplate

Windshield

The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshields.

iDrive

It is also possible to display the vehicle identification number via iDrive.

1. eps menu
2. "All apps"
3. 'Mobile devices'
4. "Settings"
5. "Vehicle ID [VIN]:"

Reporting safety defects

For US customers

The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that the vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NIHTSA). In addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone [phone].

1. MILITTA: positive allele, complete,

Information

NOTES !

However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may coll the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect investigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline [phone]. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.co/roadsafety.

QUICK REFERENCE

Getting in

Getting in

Opening and closing

Vehicle key

Buttons on the vehicle key.

Icon Meaning

Unlock.

Lock.

Pre-conditioning.

Open the cargo area.

Panic mode.

Pathway lighting

Access to vehicle interior

Unlocking with the vehicle key

Press the button on the vehicle key.

If only the driver's door and fuel filter flan have

Locking with the vehicle key

1. Close the driver's door.

Press the button on the vehicle key.

All vehicle access points are locked.

Buttons for the central locking sys- tem

Overview

The central locking buttons are located on the front door.

Lock.

Unlock.

Locking the vehicle

Press the button with the front doors

closed.

The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

The following table

Getting in

QUICK REFERENCE

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds.

Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Access to the cargo area

Opening the cargo area

Unlock the vehicle and then press the button on the cargo area.

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second. Depending on the setting, the doors may be unlocked.

Closing the cargo area manually Depending on vehicle equipment: Pull down the cargo area lid using the recessed grips,

Closing the cargo area automatically

Depending on the equipment:

Press the button on the inside of the cargo area.

Displays, operating elements

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Light switch

2 Turn signal, high-beam headlights

3 Instrument cluster

4 Wipers

Indicator/warning lights

The indicator/waming lights can illuminate in a variety of combinations and colors.

QUICK REFERENCE

Getting in

Driver's door

1 Seats, comfort features
2 Central locking system
3 Cargo area
4 Exterior mirrors
5 Power window

Switch console

1 Selector lever
2 Controller
3 Parking brake, Automatic Hold
4 M MODE, M Setup, Sound Control
5 Start/Stop button
6 Assistance systems

BMW iDrive

Principia

Buttons on the Controller

Button Function

CALL up the main menu.

HOME

MEDIA

Call up the Medlo/Roclo menu.

TEL

Co to Phone menu.

MAP

Call up the navigation map.

NAV

Call up the destination Input menu for navigation.

BACK

Co to previous menu.

OPTION

Call up the Options menu.

BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant

Principle

The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a personal assistant that enables natural voice operation of various vehicle functions.

Activating the voice control system

1. Soy the command.

Canceling voice control

Getting in

QUICK REFERENCE

▶ Slide the Controller to the right or left.
▶ Press the Controller.

QUICK REFERENCE

Set-up and use

Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Electrically adjustable seats

1 Backrest width
2 Height/longitudinal direction/seat tilt
3 Head restraint/backrest tilt
4 Lumber support

Adjusting the head restraint

Adjusting the height

Press switch up or down.

For equipment specification with M Carbon

Adjusting the distance

The distance to the back of the head is adjusted via the backrest inclination.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Icon Meaning

Fold the exterior mirrors in and out.

Adjust the exterior mirrors.

Select exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor.

Adjusting the steering wheel position

Set-up and use

QUICK REFERENCE

red height and angle to suit your seat position.

1. Fold the lever back up.

Memory function

Principle

The following settings can be stored and, if necessary, retrieved using the memory function:

Seat position.
Exterior mirror adjustment.
Height of the Head-up display.

Overview

The memory buttons are located on the front doors.

Storing settings

1. Set the desired position.

1. Press the desired memory button as long as the LED is illuminated. A signal sounds.

Calling up settings

Does the desired memory button 1 or 2

Entering the rear

Electric longitudinal setting

Fold the seat backrest forward

1. Pull the lever.

1. Fold the seat backrest forward.

To make the entry to the rear easier, the seat will automatically move to the most forward position.

The process will be terminated when the switch for the forward/back direction adjustment is pressed or the backrest is reclined.

Push the seat backrest rearward

Push the seat backrest rearward and lock it.

The seat moves automatically to the last seat position that was stored.

Pulling the lever again stops the motion.

Infotainment

Navigation destination input

1. ④ Navigation menu
2. "Destination Input"

A search box and entered information such as the search history are displayed.

QUICK REFERENCE

Set-up and use

If necessary, select OK display more information, e.g., a map preview.

If necessary, accept the suggested search keywords.

1. Select the desired entry.
2. "Start guidance"

Entertainment

Depending on model variant, the center console or instrument panel provide the following operating elements:

Operating element

Function

Turn the volume button to adjust the volume. Press the volume button to turn off sound output. Pressing the button again restores the previous volume setting.

MEDIA

Change the entertainment source.

◀◀

Press once: changes the station/track. Press and hold: fast forward/rewind the track.

Using the mobile phone

General Information

After the mobile phone is connected once to the vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using iDrive and the steering wheel buttons.

Activate Bluetooth® on the mobile phone.

1. "Mobile devices"
2. "Connect new device" Mobile phones in range are displayed on the control display.
3. Select the desired mobile phone.
4. Compare the control number displayed on the control display with the control number in the display of the mobile phone, and confirm that they match.
5. If necessary, select the connection mode: "Use Bluetooth®"

The device is connected and displayed in the device list.

Accepting a call

Depending on the equipment, incoming calls can be answered in several ways.

▶ Via IDrive:

"Accept"

Press the telephone function button on the steering wheel.

Dialing a number

1. Bring up the Communication menu.
2. "More"
3. "Dial number"
4. Enter the desired digits.
5. Select the icon for calling. The connection is established via the mobile phone to which this function has been assigned.

On the road

QUICK REFERENCE

On the road

Driving

Drive-ready state

Turning on the drive-ready state

1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Manual transmission: step on the clutch pedal and shift to Neutral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Turning off drive-ready state

Manual transmission:

1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply the parking brake.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The engine is switched off. The vehicle switches into standby state.
3. Shift into first gear or reverse gear.
   M Steptronic Sport transmission:
4. While the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake and engage selector lever position P.
5. Set the parking brake.
6. Press the Start/Stop button. The READY indicator goes out and a signal tone sounds.

The drive-ready state is switched off automatically if the driver's seat belt is not buckled when the driver's door is opened.

Auto Start/Stop function

The Auto Start/Stop function helps to conserve fuel. The system switches off the engine during

Manual transmission:

By pressing the clutch pedal.
M Steptronic Sport transmission:
By releasing the brake pedal.
▶ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on the accelerator pedal.
By the driver assistance systems activated, depending on vehicle equipment and driving situation.

Manual transmission

Shifting

When shifting to a lower gear, excessive RPM can damage the engine. There is a risk of property damage. When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right.

Reverse gear

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

To overcome the resistance push the gearshift lever dynamically to the left and engage reverse gear with a forward shifting movement.

QUICK REFERENCE

On the road

M Steptronic Sport transmission

Engaging selector lever position D/S, N, R

▶ R reverse gear.
▷ N neutral.
▶ Center position, forward position.
▷ - Downshifting, manual.
▷ + Upshifting, manual.
▶ D/S Drive mode or sequential mode.

To prevent the vehicle from moving after engaging drive or reverse, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to drive off. Engage selector lever position R only when the vehicle is stationary.

Engaging selector lever position P Engage selector lever position P only when the vehicle is stationary.

Parking brake

Setting the parking brake

Pull the switch.

The LED on the switch and the indico-

tor light in the instrument cluster are

illuminated.

Releasing the parking brake

With drive-ready state switched on:

Manual transmission: press the switch

while the broke pedal is depressed.

M Steptronic Sport transmission: press the switch while pressing the brake or engaging selector lever position P.

The LED and the indicator light go out.

The parking brake is released.

Parking

Make sure the parking broke is engaged.

On the road

QUICK REFERENCE

Light and view

Turn signal, high-beam headlights, headlight flasher

Turn signal

• Flashing: press the lever post the resistance point.

  One-touch signaling: lightly tap the lever up or down.
  Brief flashing: press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flashing.

High-beam headlights, head-light flasher

Press the lever forward or pull it backward.

High-beam headlights on, arrow 1.

The high-hand headlights illuminate when

Lights and lighting

Buttons in the vehicle

Icon Function

OFF

Exterior lighting off. Daytime driving lights.

DO

Parking lights.

AUTO

Automatic headlight control. Adaptive lighting functions.

≡D

Low-beam headlights.

i

Instrument lighting.

P

Right roadside parking light.

P

Left roadside parking light

Window wiper system

Turning on window wiper system

QUICK REFERENCE

On the road

▶ Normal wiper speed, position 2.
▶ Fast wiper speed, position 3.

Turning off the window wiper system and flick wipe

Press the lever down.

▶ Turning off: press the lever down until it reaches the 0 position.
▶ Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0 position.

The lever automatically returns to its 0 position when released.

Activating/deactivating rain sensor

Enable: press lever up once from the 0 position, arrow 1.

Disable; press lever back into the 0 position.

Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity

Turn the knurled wheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

Climate control

Climate control functions

Functions in the Climate menu

Icon Function

Turn the air conditioning sys

term on/off.

AUTO

Automatic program.

On the road

QUICK REFERENCE

Icon Function

A/C	Air conditioning.
MAX A/C	Maximum cooling.
	Air recirculation mode.
	Automatic recirculated-air control.
	Fresh air.
	Air flow.
	Air distribution.
SYNC	SYNC program.
	Seat heating.
	Active seat ventilation.
	Steering wheel heating.

Buttons, air conditioning system

Icon Function

MAX	Defrost function.
REAR	Rear window defroster.

Buttons, rear air conditioning system

Icon Function

AUTO	Automatic program.
	Temperature.
	Air distribution.

QUICK REFERENCE

On the road

Intermediate stop

Refueling

Fuel filler cap

1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.

1. Open the fuel filler cap counterclockwise.

1. Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket on the fuel filler flap,

Wheels and tires

Tire pressure specifications

The tire inflation pressure specifications can be found in the tire inflation pressure table in the printed Owner's Manual.

After correcting the tire pressure

If equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor, the corrected tire pressures are applied automatically. Make sure that the correct tire settings have been made. With tires that cannot be found in the tire pressure values on the control display, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM). If equipped with a flat tire monitor, reinitialize the flat tire monitor.

Checking the tire pressure

Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and correct it as needed:

At least twice a month.

▶ Before embarking on an extended trip.

Electronic oil measurement

Functional requirements

A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of normal driving.

Displaying the engine oil level

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Vehicle status"

4. "Engine oil level"

Adding engine oil

On the road

QUICK REFERENCE

Adding engine oil

1. Opening the hood.
2. Open the lid counterclockwise.

1. Add engine oil.
2. Close the lld.

Providing assistance

Hazard warning system

Hazard warning system button

BMW Assistance

Contact BMW Assistance for information and support for all aspects of the vehicle.

1. Apps menu
2. 'All opps'

CONTROLS

Dashboard

Dashboard

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle. Additional information: Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Power windows, individual 88
2 Seating comfort features

Memory function 103

3 Exterior mirror adjustment button 10

4 Central locking system 83

Unlocking

Locking

5 Lights

Light switch 151

Dashboard

CONTROLS

EDGE

AUTO

Parking lights 152

Automatic headlight control 152

Adoptive lighting functions 154

High Beam Assistant 149

Low-beam headlights 152

3D

i

P

≥P

Instrument lighting 155

Right roadside parking light 152

Left roadside parking light 152

6 Tum signal lever

R L

Turn signal 1/9

D

High-beam headlights, head-

light flasher 149

High Beam Assistant 149

A

Trip data 142

G-Meter 144

7 Shift paddles 114

8 M1 191

M ¹

9 Steering wheel buttons, left

SLIM

Manual Speed Limiter 206

[NO TEXT]

Depending on the equipment:

Fruise Control on/off 208

10 Instrument cluster 127

11 Steering wheel buttons, right

Depending on the equipment:

Active Cruise Control on/off 211

With Steering Assistant 220:

Cruise Control, Distance Control

and lone keeping on/off

Cruise Control: store the speed

Speed Limit Assistant: accept

suggested speed 210

Interrupt or continue Cruise Control

Active Cruise Control: increase

distance

Active Cruise Control: reduce dis-

tance

Cruise Control rocker switch

Selecting menu contents in instru-

ment cluster 127

Changing the station/track, see

Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment, Communication 6

CONTROLS

Dashboard

Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Knurled wheel for selecting configuration menus for instrument cluster and Head-up display 127 Using Infotainment selection lists in the instrument cluster 138

13 Wiper lever

Wipers 157

Rain sensor 157

Cleaning the windshield 158

Horn, entire surface

15 Adjusting the steering wheel 103

16 Fold-out compartment 271

17 Unlocking the hood 320

Opening and closing cargo area

B1

In the vicinity of the center console

Dashboard

CONTROLS

3 Hazard warning system 335

Climate control 249

Defrost function 254

Rear window defroster 255

Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication 6

Adjusting the volume

Station/title forward

Station/title back

4 Glove compartment 270

5 Controller with buttons 49

6

Parking brake 121

AUTO H

Automatic Hold 123

7M MODE 193

8 START ENGINE STOP Turning the drive-ready state on/off 110

9 Auto Start/Stop function 110

10 Manual transmission: gearshift lever 113 M Steptronic Sport transmission: selector lever 114

CONTROLS

Dashboard

In the vicinity of the headliner

1 Emergency Call, SOS 335

Reading lights 156

Interior lights 155

Sensors of the vehicle

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information: Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Overview

Depending on the equipment, the following cameras and sensors are installed in the vehicle:

Front camera.
Comero behind the windshield.
Top view cameras.
Rear View Camera.
Front radar sensor.
Radar sensors, side, front.
Radar sensors, side, rear.
Ultrasonic sensors, side.

Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bumpers.

Cameras

Front camera

The front camera is located in the radiator grille.

Camera behind the windshield

The camera behind the windshield is located near the interior mirror.

CONTROLS

Sensors of the vehicle

Top view cameras

One exterior mirror camera is located at the bottom of each exterior mirror housing.

Rear View Camera

The Rear View Camera is located in the badge on the rear of the vehicle.

Functional requirement of the com-eros

The areas of the cameras are clean and clear. Additional Information:

▶ Washing the vehicle, refer to page 342.

▶ Vehicle core, refer to page 344.

System limits of the cameras

The comeras may not work properly, e.g., show something that is incorrect, in the follow-

- When the camera field of view is covered, for instance by a fogged up windshield or labels.

▶ If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.

With exterior mirrors folded in.

▷ With open doors or open cargo area.

▶ When driving toward bright lights or strong reflections, e.g., setting sun.

▷ When it is dark outside.

The camera has overheated due to excessive temperatures and temporarily turned off.

During calibration of the camera immediately after vehicle delivery.

If applicable, a Check Control message will be displayed when the system limits are reached.

Radar sensors

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle radar sensors, and thus the driver assistance systems, can be negatively affected by external influences, e.g., interference. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Front radar sensor

The front radar sensor is located in the front bumper.

Radar sensors, side, front

The radar sensors are located on the side of the front bumper.

Radar sensors, side, rear

The radar sensors are located on the side of

Functional requirement of the radar sensors

The areas of the radar sensors are clean and clear.

Additional Information:

Washing the vehicle, refer to page 342.

Vehicle care, refer to page 344.

System limits of the radar sensors

The function of the radar sensors may be restricted or not available, for instance in the following situations:

▶ In case of dirty sensors.

▷ In case of iced-up sensors.

▶ If sensors are covered such as by labels, films or a license-plate carrier.

▶ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for instance due to parking damage.

▶ If the radiation range of the sensors is covered, e.g., by protruding cargo.

When the field of view of the sensors is covered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow hills, vehicles or trollers.

After improper paint work on the vehicle in the area of the sensors.

On steep hilltops or in sharp clips in the road.

If applicable, a Check Control message will be displayed when the system limits are reached.

CONTROLS

Sensors of the vehicle

Ultrasonic sensors

Ultrasonic sensors, front

The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assistance systems are located in the front bumper.

Ultrasonic sensors, rear

The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assistance systems are located in the rear bumper.

Ultrasonic sensors, side

Functional requirement of the ultrasonic sensors

The areas of the ultrasonic sensors are clean and clear.

Additional Information:

Washing the vehicle, refer to page 342.

▶ Vehicle core, refer to page 344.

System limits of the ultrasonic sensors

The detection of objects with ultrasonic measurements can run into physical limits, e.g., in the following situations:

▶ If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by stickers.

▶ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for instance due to parking damage.

▶ After improper paint work on the vehicle in the area of the sensors.

For small children and animals.

For persons with certain clothing, for instance jacket.

- With obstacles and persons at the edge of the lane.

In case of external interference with the ultrasonics, for instance from passing vehicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic sources.

▶ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, extreme heat, or strong wind.

▶ With low bars and trailer hitches of other vehicles.

▶ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

▷ With moving objects.

With elevated, protruding objects such as

Sensors of the vehicle

CONTROLS

In the case of objects with fine surfaces or structures, e.g., wire mesh fences.

For objects with porous surfaces.
With small and low objects, for instance boxes.
Low objects already displayed, for instance curbs, can be outside of the detection ranges of the sensors.
With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in foam material.
With plants and bushes.
In automatic car washes.
▶ In the event of uneven floors, e.g. speed bumps.
If there are large amounts of exhaust gas.
Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of the vehicle is not taken into account by the ultrasonic sensors.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be displayed when the system limits are reached.

CONTROLS

Operating state of the vehicle

Operating state of the vehicle

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

General information

Depending on the situation, the vehicle will be in one of three operating states:

▶ Idle state, refer to page 40.
▶ Standby state, refer to page 41.
▶ Drive-ready state, refer to page 42.

Idle state

Principle

When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched off.

General information

The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening from the outside and after exiting and locking.

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

▷ Set the parking brake.
▶ Automatic transmission: Make sure that selector lever position P is engaged.

Manual transmission: Make sure that first gear is engaged on uphill gradients and reverse gear on downhill gradients.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for example, due to the following actions:

▶ Establishing standby.

Releasing the parking brake.
Opening and closing the doors or windows.
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Establishing the clean mode auto

After several minutes, if no operation takes place on the vehicle.
If the charge state of the vehicle battery is low.
Depending on the configuration via iDrive: one or both front doors will be opened after driving when exiting the vehicle.

In some situations, the idle state is not set automatically, for instance during a phone call or when the low-beam headlights are switched on.

Establishing idle state when opening the front doors

After a trip, the sleep mode can be established by opening the front doors. For this purpose, all passengers must exit the vehicle.

1.aps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. 'Turn off after opening door'

Establishing the sleep mode manually

To establish idle state in the vehicle after completion of trip:

Press and hold the volume button on the radio until all displays go out.

Deep sleep mode

Principle

Does clean mode is actuated to prevent the

General Information

When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, some special measures are necessary. For more information, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Activating/deactivating deep sleep mode

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Deep sleep mode"
5. Select the desired setting.
   Deep sleep mode deactivates automatically when drive-ready state is turned on.

Access to the vehicle

Press the button on the cargo area to access the vehicle while in deep sleep mode. Deep sleep mode remains on In this case.

Standby state

Principle

When standby state is switched on, most functions can be used while the vehicle is station-

CONTROLS

Operating state of the vehicle

Turning on standby state manually

General information

Standby can be switched back on after the vehicle is automatically set to idle state.

Via the volume button

Press the volume button on the radio. The control display and the instrument cluster illuminate.

Using the Start/Stop button

Press the Start/Stop button.

The control display and the instrument cluster illuminate.

Display in the instrument cluster

OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster. Drive-ready state is turned off and standby state turned on.

Drive-ready state

Principle

Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to starting the engine.

General information

Some vehicle functions can only be used with the drive-ready state switched on.

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are colorless and odorless. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling away.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

Set the parking brake.
Automatic transmission: Make sure that selector lever position P is engaged.
Manual transmission: Make sure that first gear is engaged on uphill gradients and reverse gear on downhill gradients.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

NOTICE

Repeatedly attempting to start the engine or repeatedly starting the vehicle in said bus

cle, particularly repeated starting in rapid succession.

Turning on the drive-ready state

1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Manual transmission: step on the clutch pedal and shift to Neutral.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Most of the indicator lights and warning lights on the instrument cluster illuminate far different lengths of time.

Drive-ready state is switched on.

The engine will start automatically for a brief time until the engine is started.

Gasoline engine

Depending on the motorization, the full drive power may not be available for approximately 30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case, the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.

Display in the instrument cluster

The activated drive-ready state is indicated in the instrument cluster, depending on the equipment, by the display of information required for driving or the READY display.

Turning off drive-ready state

Manual transmission;

1. While the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake and apply the parking brake.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.

The READY indicator goes out and a signal tone sounds.

The engine is shut off and the vehicle switches to standby.

1. While the vehicle is stationary, press the broke pedal and engage selector lever position P.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.

The READY indicator goes out and a signal tone sounds.

The engine is shut off and the vehicle switches to standby.

CONTROLS

BMW iDrive

BMW iDrive

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Display and operating concept

Principle

BMW iDrive is the vehicle's display and operating concept and includes a wide range of functions.

General information

Depending on vehicle equipment, the functions can be operated as follows:

▶ Via the control display.

▶ Via the Controller.

▶ Via the touchpad.

▶ Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.

- Via the operating elements on the steering wheel.

Additional information: Instrument cluster, refer to page 127.

Safety information

A

accident, injury, and property damage. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

Main menu

General information

The main menu is divided into different areas.

Overview

1 Widgets

2 Status information

3 Temperature setting

4 Menu bar

Menu bar

Apps menu

■ Access to apps and vehicle functions. A filter can be selected. If necessary, change the filter to see the desired apps.

"All apps": all apps and functions are displayed.

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

"Vehicle": only vehicle adjustment functions are displayed.
"Recently used": recently used apps are displayed.

Media menu

¶ Access to functions of the entertainment system, e.g., radio stations or connection with external devices.

Communication menu

Access to the telephone and message function as well as the connection and management of mobile devices such as smartphones.

Navigation menu

④ Access to the navigation system, destination input and traffic bulletins. Configurable map views and other functions such as points of Interest.

Climate menu

The Climate menu provides access to all climate control functions.

Apple CarPlay© menu

Depending on the national-market version with a connected function; access to Apple CarPlay. Apple CarPlay enables the secure use of certain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone via iDrive.

Android Auto© menu

▲ Depending on the national-market version with a connected function: access to Android Auto. Android Auto enables the secure use of certain functions of a compatible Android smartphone via iDrive.

smartphones. The widgets also serve as buttons and allow jumping to the relevant menu.

Status information

General information

The status field can be found in the upper area of the control display. Status information is displayed in the form of icons. Depending on the equipment and national-market version, different icons are available.

Telephone status information

Icon Meaning

Active coll.

Signal strength.

SIM card missing.

Entertainment status information

Icon Meaning

USB audio.

Bluetooth audio.

Smartphone audio.

Connected Music with Spotify,

Time shift.

Wi-Fi

Apple CorPlay.

Android Auto,

Satellite radio is switched on.

Status information messages

CONTROLS

BMW iDrive

Icon Meaning

% Suppress private information.

% Do not disturb.

% Message.

Additional Information:

Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication, refer to page 6.

Other status Information

Icon Meaning

Sound output active.

Sound output deactivated.

Activation word active.

BMW ID or driver profile.

Destination guidance active.

— Go to quick access.

Wireless charging active.

Park Distance Control: sound active.

Park Distance Control: sound deactivated.

Input and display

Letters and numbers

Letters and numbers can be entered using the controller, touchpad, control display, or voice control, depending on vehicle equipment.

Icon

Function

abc ABC

Change between capital and lower-case letters

Icon Function
OK Confirm entry.

←→	Shift the input area to the left or right.

Entry comparison

When entering data from a database such as contacts, the selection is gradually narrowed down for each character entered, with characters being added as necessary.

Activating/deactivating the functions Some menu items are preceded by an icon. Selecting the menu item enables or disables the function.

Icon

Meaning

Function is activated.

Function is deactivated.

Enabling/disabling audible feedback For some functions, audio confirmation is given, e.g., sounds are emitted when operating the control display.

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Sound settings"
5. Select the desired setting.

Quick access

The quick link provides access to shortcuts, certain settings, and app recommendations.

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Input Operation

Show quick link.	Swipe from tap to bottom on the control display.Slide the controller up.— Tap the iron on the status bar.
Hide quick link.	Swipe from the bottom up on the control display.Slide the controller down.

Activating/deactivating pop-ups

For some functions, pop-ups are displayed automatically on the control display. Some of these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Pop-ups"
5. Select the desired setting.

Shortcuts

General information

The iDrive functions can be stored on the shortcuts and called up directly, for instance radio stations, navigation destinations, phone numbers and menu entries.

Storing a function

1. Select the desired function.
2. Press and hold the desired function.
3. "Add to shortcuts"

Shortcuts can only be created with an active BMW ID or a driver profile.

The function will work immediately. This means for instance that the connection is established when a phone number is selected.

Deleting shortcuts

1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control display.
2. Press and hold the desired shortcut.
3. "Delete shortcut"

BMW Curved Display

Principle

The BMW Curved Display is a single-screen display in the instrument panel that is curved towards the driver. The BMW Curved Display comprises the instrument cluster on the driver's side and the control display.

General information

Follow instructions for cleaning the BMW Curved Display in the Care chapter.

Additional information:

Coring for special components, refer to page 345.

Overview

1 Instrument cluster 127

CONTROLS

BMW iDrive

Control display

Principle

The iDrive functions are displayed on the control display.

Safety information

Warning

When driving, loose items or devices connected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile phones, may be thrown around the vehicle, e.g., in the event of an accident or when braking or performing evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Secure loose objects or devices that are connected to the vehicle via a cable.

Warning

Objects in the area in front of a display can slip and damage the display. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Do not place objects in the area in front of a display.

Overview

Control display.

Switching the control display on/off automatically

The control display is turned on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the control display is needed for operation.

In certain situations, the control display is switched off automatically, for instance if no operation is performed on the vehicle for several minutes.

Switching the control display on/off manually

1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control display.

2. "Screen off"

Tap the control display to turn it on again.

Setting the brightness

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. 'Interior lighting'

4. "Cockpit brightness at night"

5. Make the desired setting.

Depending on the light conditions, the brightness control may not be clearly visible.

System limits

In the case of very high temperatures on the control display, for instance due to intense solar radiation, the brightness may be reduced down to complete deactivation. Once the temperature is reduced, for instance through shade or air conditioning system, the normal functions are restored.

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Controller

Principle

The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings. The buttons can be used to open the menus directly.

Overview

Controller.

Buttons on the Controller
Button Function

HOME	Call up the main menu.
MEDIA	Call up the Media/Radio menu.
TEL	Go to Phone menu.
MAP	Call up the navigation map.
NAV	Call up the destination input menu for navigation.
	Go to previous menu.

Operation

▷ Rotate the Controller to switch between menu options, for example.

Press the Controller to select a menu option, for example.

Slide the Controller in four directions to switch between menus, for example.

Operating via the Controller

CONTROLS

BMW iDrive

Selecting menu items

1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu item is highlighted.
2. Press the Controller.

Adjusting the main display

The main display can be adjusted in the main menu.

Press the button.

1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to select the main display.
2. Tilt the Controller to the right.
3. Select the desired main display.

Selecting a widget

1. Use the Controller to select widgets.
2. If necessary, turn the Controller until the desired widget is selected.
3. Press the Controller.

Switching between menus

A new display opens after a menu item is selected.
▶ Slide the Controller to the left.

The current menu closes and the previous menu is displayed.

Press the button.

The current menu closes and the previous menu is displayed.

Calling up the context menu

Depending on the menu item, a context menu with additional options can be displayed.

The menu consists of various ideas, for instance:

• "General help"; Go to the Integrated Owner's Manual.

  "Add to shortcuts": define menu item or shortcut.

Entering letters and numbers

Letters and numbers can only be entered when stationary.

Input

1. Turn the Controller; select letters or numbers.
2. OK : confirm entry.

Additional information:

Setting the system language, refer to page 55.

Deleting an entry

Icon Function

☒ Press controller: delete a letter or number.
☒ Press and hold controller: delete all letters or numbers.

Using alphabetical lists

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries, the letters for which an entry exists can be displayed in a text box.

1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry. The first entry of the selected letter is displayed in the list.

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Operation via touchpad

General information

Depending on vehicle equipment, some iDrive functions can be operated with the controller touchpad.

The touchpad is located on the Controller. Touch the touchpad with your fingers. Do not use any objects.

Selecting functions

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Touchpad"
5. Select the desired setting.

Entering letters and numbers

▶ Enter characters as they are displayed on the control display.

Always enter associated characters such as accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized.
The set language determines what input is possible. Where necessary, enter special characters via the Controller.

Additional Information:

Setting the system language, refer to page 55.

Entering special characters

Function Operation

Delete a character.

Swipe to the left on the touchpod.

Function Operation

Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the upper area of the touch-pad.

Enter an under- score. Swipe to the right in the lower area of the touch- pad.

Using the map

The map in the navigation system can be moved via the touchpad.

Tap the map on the control display and then continue operation using the touchpad.

Function Operation

Move map. Swipe in the appropriate direction.

Display menu. Tap once.

Using alphabetical lists

Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries permit a direct jump to letters for which an entry exists.
Enter the first letter on the touchpod.
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed in the list.

Operation via control display

General information

Depending on the equipment version, the control display is equipped with a touchscreen.

You can tap on menu items and widgets. Touch the control display with your fingers. Do not use any objects.

CONTROLS

BMW iDrive

Adjusting widgets

The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu. The adjustments can only be performed when the vehicle is stationary.

1. If necessary, tap the icon.
2. Press and hold the widget.
3. Make the desired adjustment:

Tap on the Icon.

A new widget can be selected.

Xap on the icon.

The widget is deleted.

▶ Press and hold the widget and drag it up or down.

The widget is moved to the desired position.

Sorting apps

To resort the app icons, press and hold the desired icon and move it to the desired location.

Switching between menus

A new display opens after a menu item is selected.

< Select the arrow symbol.

The current menu closes and the previous menu is displayed.

Calling up the context menu

Depending on the menu item, a context menu with additional options can be displayed. Press and hold the desired menu item.

The menu consists of various areas, for instance:

▶ "General help": Go to the Integrated Owner's Manual.

Entering letters and numbers

Input

1. If necessary, tap the 📋 icon or control display.

2. Enter desired letters and numbers.

Deleting an entry

Icon Function

✗ Top icon: delete a letter or a number.
☒ Press and hold the icon; delete all letters or numbers.

Using the map

The navigation map can be moved on the control display.

Function Operation

Move mop. Swipe in the appropri-

ate direction.

Enlarge/shrink map.

Drag in or out with the fingers.

Display menu. Top once.

Using alphabetical lists

For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries, the letters for which an entry exists can be displayed in a text box.

1. Top the letter in front of the list. A letter box is displayed.
2. Top the first letter of the desired entry. The first entry of the selected letter is displayed in the list.

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant

Principle

The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a personal assistant that enables natural voice operation of various vehicle functions. The Personal Assistant makes it easier to operate the vehicle by providing proactive suggestions and automating habits.

General information

BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is available depending on national-market version.
The system Includes special microphones on the driver side and the front passenger side.
▶ Say the commands and numbers fluently as well as with normal volume, emphasis, and speed.
...< identifies commands that can be spoken.

Functional requirements

A language that is supported by the Personal Assistant must be set via iDrive.
Setting the system language, refer to page 55.

Always say commands in the configured system language.

For the full range of functions, you must activate, configure, or purchase the following functions:

Online speech processing, refer to page 56.

▶ All settings under:

▶ Relevant ConnectedDrive services from the ConnectedDrive Store.
▷ Suggestions, refer to page 56.

Activating the voice control system

General information

There are various methods for activating the voice control feature:

Press the button on the steering
wheel briefly
The microphone on the driver's side is active.

▶ Speaking the activation word.

The microphones on the driver's or front passenger's side are active with the following voice control, depending on where the activation word was spoken.

Then say the command. The activation word and the command can be spoken without pause in one sentence.

Microphone button on steering wheel

1.

Press button briefly.

1. Say the command.

Activation word

General Information

Saying the activation word will start the Personal Assistant. The Personal Assistant listens.

Preset activation word

Hello BMWc The default activation word can

CONTROLS

BMW iDrive

1. "Voice control"
2. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
3. "Wake word"
4. "Hello BMW"

Personal activation word

In addition to the preset activation word, a personal activation word can be set up with an active BMW ID or a driver profile. The personal activation word can also be changed or deleted.

The activation word should consist of multiple syllables to ensure good recognition.

Hello: The additional phrase is not necessary for the activation word and does not need to be spoken.

1. eps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. 'System settings'
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Wake word"
7. "Personal wake word"
8. 'Set'
9. "Start recording"

Activation word from third-party providers

Depending on notional-market version, some third-party providers offer digital voice assistants, e.g., Amazon Alexa.

To use Siri, the smartphone must be connected via Apple CarPlay.

Supported voice assistants can be used with a connected smartphone in the vehicle.

The activation word from connected third-party providers can be used in addition to your

1. "Voice control"
2. 'Additional speech assistants'
3. Select the desired setting.

Canceling voice control

Press the button on the steering again.

Cancel
▶ Slide the Controller to the right or left.
▷ Press the Controller.

Possible commands

General information

Commands can be used to give instructions or ask questions, with the Personal Assistant providing assistance.

For example, you can call contacts, navigate to an address, apply settings, or ask questions about a vehicle function. Most vehicle functions can be operated via voice commands, e.g., the Automatic Parking Assistant.

Most content on the control display can be spoken as commands, e.g., menu items or list entries.

Help for voice control

Voice commands: have possible example commands suggested.
▷>General information on voice control; have Information on the operating principle of the voice control announced.
Help: have tips and example commands for voice control announced.
▶ Additional example commands for the current context are displayed in the width of

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Sample commands

Call John Smith

Drive me to JFK airport<
Play a classical music station
Is my tire pressure still OK?
Activate the climate control
Increase the ACC distance
Sport mode

Additional example commands can be displayed on the control display.

1. Apps menu

2. "All apps"

3. "Personal Assistant"
4. "Help"
5. "Example commands"

Sample commands for the current context are displayed in the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant widget.

Additional information:

Adjust widgets, refer to page 51.

Menu items

The Personal Assistant can bring up menu items directly. Say the menu items as they are displayed on the control display. You do not have to follow the order of the menu items when speaking them out loud.

1. Activate the voice control system.

2. Media

3. Presets

The stored stations are displayed on the control display.

Owner's Manual via voice operation

Van can ask simple questions about vehicles

is available depending on the national-market version. The speech recognition and quality of the feedback may vary.

Example command: >How can the passenger airbag be deactivated?

The Personal Assistant returns feedback. When stationary, the section of the integrated Owner's Manual is displayed on the control display.

Settings

Setting the system language

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Language"
5. Select the desired setting.

Setting the response length

You can set the Personal Assistant to use standard dialog or a short version. In case of the short version, the announcements by the Personal Assistant are played back in an abbreviated version.

1. 4ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Response length"
7. Select the desired setting.

Speaking during voice output

It is possible to answer during inquiries of the Personal Assistant. The function can be dis-

CONTROLS

BMW iDrive

tionally, for instance due to background noise or conversations in the vehicle.

1. ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Speaking during voice output"

Suggestions

General information

The Personal Assistant provides helpful, individual suggestions.

Activating/deactivating suggestions

1. ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Receive suggestions"

Adapting suggestions

Suggestions can be adapted, for example, by category or to output a signal tone.

1. ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. Select the desired setting.

Online speech processing

Online speech processing improves the quality

for online voice processing. ConnectedDrive is available depending on the national-market version. Online speech processing is not available in all languages.

1. 📄ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Online speech processing"

Configuring the visualization

How the Personal Assistant is visualized can be set.

1. -ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Visualization"

Voice control from third-party provid-

ers

Depending on vehicle equipment, third-party voice control can be enabled by pressing and holding the microphone button on the steering wheel.

1. 📄ps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. 'System settings'

4. "Voice control"

5. "Long press"

6. Select the desired setting.

Adjusting the volume

BMW iDrive

CONTROLS

Using the voice activation of the smartphone

Depending on the device, a smartphone connected to the vehicle can be used via voice control.

The device must be connected via Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

1. Press and hold the

button on the

steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds. The voice activation of the smartphone is activated.

if activation is successful, a confirmation appears on the control display.

1. Press and hold the

button on the

steering wheel to cancel voice control of the smartphone.

Automating routines

General Information

The Personal Assistant can automate routine actions such as automatically opening the windows when reaching a predefined location. Rules are created for this purpose, which can be activated and deactivated at any time.

Activating/deactivating routines

1. Apps menu

2. 'All apps'

3. "Automate habits"

4. Select the desired setting.

System limits

The Personal Assistant provides informa-

This also applies to safety functions and systems.

▶ Certain noises can be detected and may lead to problems. Keep the doors and windows closed.

Noises from the front passenger or occupants can impair the system. Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
- Major language dialects can cause problems with the speech recognition feature.
▶ A poor data connection affects the response time of the Personal Assistant and search function.

Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle

Principle

Mobile devices can be used in the vehicle for various functions. Pairing with the vehicle is beneficial when using mobile devices;

▶ Operating the mobile device via iDrive.
▶ Making calls via the hands-free system.

Better connection to the telephone network and internet using the vehicle's cell phone antennas.
Listen to music on the vehicle's sound system.
▶ Surf the Internet via personal hotspot on the vehicle's integrated SIM card.
Operating smartphone apps, e.g., Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

General information

Detailed information on the functions and connection modes is provided in the following me-

CONTROLS

BMW iDrive

The following information sources can also be used:

▶ Driver's Guide app.

Driver's Guide Web.

Safety information

Warning

Operating the Integrated Information systems and communication devices while driving can distract from surrounding traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident, Injury, and property damage. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic situation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is stationary.

BMW Remote Software Upgrade

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information: Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

BMW Remote Software Upgrade

Principle

Remote Software Upgrade can be used to update the entire software of the vehicle. This makes new functions, functional enhancements or quality improvements available.

General information

BMW recommends performing the Remote Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes available.

Safety information

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for example, due to the following actions:

▶ Establishing standby. ▶ Releasing the parking brake.

There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Functional requirements

Active ConnectedDrive contract.
The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has been activated.

Cellular network reception.
Consent to transmit the corresponding data was given in the Data Protection menu. Additional information: Data protection, refer to page 63.

Search for an upgrade

Functional requirement

Standby must be turned on to search for a Remote Software Upgrade.

Automatic search

The vehicle regularly searches for updates in the background.

Manual search

1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Search for upgrades"
   5 Follow the instructions on the control air

CONTROLS

BMW Remote Software Upgrade

Download of an upgrade

Automatic download

If available, the data for a Remote Software Upgrade is automatically downloaded to the vehicle. No download consent is required.

Via My BMW App

When an upgrade is available, the My BMW App will provide information on the new software version.

The data for the upgrade can then be downloaded to a mobile device, for instance via an existing WLAN connection.

Data can then be sent from the mobile device to the vehicle.

This transmission method accelerates the download of the data, for instance in areas with limited mobile network availability.

You do not need to be present in the vehicle to download the data to a mobile device.

1. Download the upgrade using the My BMW App on your smartphone.

2. Follow the instructions in the My BMW App.

3. Connect your smartphone to the vehicle via Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi.

Data for the upgrade is sent from the mobile device to the vehicle both while driving and when stopped. Depending on the size of the upgrade, it may be necessary to drive the vehicle to complete the data transfer.

1. Follow the instructions on the control display.

Additional information:

Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication.

Information about the version

General information

The information about the version contains a description of the updates included in the Remote Software Upgrade. During the download and after the installation has been successfully completed, the information about the version can be displayed on the control display.

This information is also available in the ConnectedDrive customer portal.

Displaying information

Display in the vehicle:

1. Apps menu

2. "All apps"

3. "System settings"

4. "Remote Software Upgrade"

5. ▷ Display currently installed version: "Installed version:"

▶ Display new available version: "Info on version"

1. Follow the instructions on the control display.

More information is provided on the corresponding BMW website.

Installing the upgrade

General Information

Installation of the Remote Software Upgrade may result in the deletion of software changes, e.g., performance increases not made by the manufacturer of the vehicle.

▶ Modifications to the electrical system of the vehicle, for instance to control units, that

BMW Remote Software Upgrade

CONTROLS

The installation may take around 20 minutes.
The installation cannot be terminated.
The vehicle cannot be used during the installation.
The vehicle can be exited during the installation.

Prerequisites for the installation

▶ Sufficiently charged battery.
The outside temperature is above 14°F/-10°C.
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
The hazard warning system is turned off.
The selector lever position P is engaged.
The engine is turned off and sufficiently cooled down.

If applicable, follow the notes for further pre-requisites on the control display.

Your vehicle can establish some prerequisites automatically. Follow the instructions on the control display.

If the prerequisites are not met such as a sufficiently charged battery, the upgrade will not be offered for installation.

Pay attention to an offer for installation, e.g., after longer trips.

Preparing the vehicle

• Park the vehicle safely away from the public road.

  Cellular network reception must be ensured so that a fault message can be sent to the vehicle manufacturer, for instance if the installation is terminated.
  ▷ Close the windows.

The vehicle key must be located in the vehicle for the consent for installation.
▷ Switch off the exterior lighting.
▶ Remove devices connected to the diagnostic socket.

Installing immediately

The upgrade can be installed immediately if all prerequisites have been met.

1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Start upgrade now"
6. Follow the instructions on the control display.

Installing with timer

When the trip is completed, a timer can be used to install the upgrade automatically at a configured time such as during the night. A later installation may make sense to meet functional requirements, e.g., a sufficiently cooled down engine.

1. 📄ps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. Select the desired settings.
   The installation starts automatically when:
   ▶ All prerequisites for the installation have been established correctly.
   ▶ All prerequisites continue to be met at the time of installation.

The timer is turned off when the drive-ready state is turned off.

CONTROLS

BMW Remote Software Upgrade

can also be started using the My BMW App when the vehicle is parked. The upgrade installation can be started remotely.

Follow Instructions in the My BMW App.

Functional limitations

During the upgrade, the majority of functions is temporarily unavailable, for instance:

▶ Hazard warning system.

▶ Central locking system and, if necessary, Comfort Access.

Parking lights.

▶ Horn.

▶ Alarm system.

Emergency coll.

▶ Power window.

▷ Glass sunroof.

▶ Checking the fuel filler flap lock.

▶ Operate the tailgate or trunk lid.

The driver's door can be locked and unlocked from the outside using the integrated key.

After successful upgrade

The vehicle can be used again immediately. Booked services such as Advanced Real Time Traffic Information or Remote Services are automatically reactivated during the next trip. After an extended stationary period, charge the vehicle battery with an extended drive.

Malfunction

In the event of a malfunction, follow the instructions on the control display or in the My BMW App.

If the malfunction cannot be corrected, contact an authorized service center or another quali-

Validity of the Owner's Manual

Production of the vehicle

At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the most current resource.

After a software update in the vehicle After a vehicle software update such as via Remote Software Upgrade the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest information.

Personal settings

CONTROLS

Personal settings

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Data protection

Data transfer

Principle

The vehicle offers different services, whose use requires a data transfer to BMW or a service provider.

General information

The data transfer can be deactivated for some services. When the data transfer is deactivated, the respective service cannot be used.

Settings

The data transfer can be configured in different stages or individually for separate services.

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

4. "Data privacy"

5. Select the desired setting.

Deleting personal data in the vehicle

This personal data can be permanently deleted using iDrive.

General information

Depending on the equipment, the following data is deleted:

▶ BMW IDs or driver profiles.

Stored radio stations.

▶ Stored shortcuts.

Navigation, for instance stored destinations.

▷ Phone book.

Online data, e.g., favorites, cookies.

Office data, for instance voice memos.

Login accounts.

Digital key.

Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 15 minutes. In addition, the vehicle is removed from the My BMW App and Connected-

Drive customer portal so that remote functions can no longer be used.

Functional requirements

Data can only be deleted while stationary.

The vehicle key must be in the vehicle,

Deleting data

The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted when the vehicle is reset to the factory settings.

Additional information:

Resetting vehicle data, refer to page 63.

CONTROLS

Personal settings

switched off. Data can only be deleted while the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.

1.ips menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Reset vehicle data"
5. "Reset vehicle data"

If setting synchronization has been activated for a BMW ID in the vehicle, personal settings are kept in the BMW Cloud.

BMW ID/driver profiles

Principle

In ConnectedDrive countries, the BMW ID is the personal login for all relevant offers for the BMW brand. The BMW ID can be used in the vehicle to store and activate personal vehicle settings.

In non-ConnectedDrive countries, the personal vehicle settings can be stored in driver profiles. If a vehicle is used by several people, each person can use their own BMW ID in the vehicle. If a BMW ID is activated, the settings stored for it are applied to the vehicle.

General information

The BMW ID must be registered once. Registration of a BMW ID can be completed on the My BMW App, in the ConnectedDrive portal, or at an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

A driver profile is created in the vehicle.

Many of the settings that are stored for a BMW ID In the vehicle can be synchronized with the

With driver recognition, a BMW ID or driver profile can be activated as soon as you unlock your vehicle. For this, a vehicle key or digital key must be linked with the BMW ID or driver profile. After unlocking, you can change the BMW ID or driver profile.

If no BMW ID or driver profile is activated when the vehicle is unlocked, the vehicle loads the guest profile.

Functional requirements

The vehicle must be stationary to create, change, delete, or edit a BMW ID.

Logging in the vehicle with a BMW ID and synchronization with the BMW Cloud are only possible when the vehicle has cellular network reception.

Welcome window

After unlocking the vehicle, a Welcome window is shown on the control display. The type of the welcome depends on the following prerequisites:

The vehicle does not have a stored BMW ID or driver profile:
The welcome is neutral. An option to add a BMW ID or create a driver profile is offered.

The vehicle key or the digital key has not been assigned to a BMW ID or a driver profile;

The welcome is neutral. The stored BMW IDs or the stored driver profiles are offered for selection. Additionally, it is possible to add a new BMW ID or create a new driver profile.

▶ A BMW ID or driver profile has been as-
signed to the vehicle key or digital key: The welcome is personalized, the stored

Adding the BMW ID

1. Top the BMW ID icon or personal picture on the status bar.
2. "Add BMW ID"
3. Scan the displayed QR code with your smartphone.
4. Observe the instructions on your smartphone.

▶ If you have installed the My BMW App on your smartphone and saved your BMW ID, the BMW ID is automatically transferred to the vehicle.

If there is currently no BMW ID, a new BMW ID can be registered.

1. Change additional settings as necessary, e.g., desired driver recognition.

To configure driver recognition, the corresponding vehicle key or digital key must be located in the vehicle.

Driver recognition can be set or changed in the settings at a later time.

1. Change any additional settings as necessary.

Alternatively, the BMW ID can be registered and added to the vehicle by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. The BMW ID must then be confirmed on the control display in the corresponding vehicle.

The vehicle is added to the user's My BMW App.

Confirming a BMW ID

If the BMW ID was created and added to the vehicle by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop,

the BMW ID must then be confirmed in the vehicle:

1. Select the BMW ID.
2. Scan the QR code shown.
3. Follow the instructions on your smartphone.
   It may be necessary to register the BMW ID again.
   This icon is displayed on the status bar and indicates when it is necessary to login again.
4. Select the BMW ID.
5. Scan the QR code shown.
   Another registration will be attempted. Once successfully logged In, all functions can be used again.

My BMW app

If a BMW ID has been added to a vehicle, the vehicle is automatically added to the My BMW app. The My BMW App provides numerous beneficial functions and settings, e.g., user management.

Alternatively, a vehicle can be added to the My BMW App by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. In this case, the BMW ID must then be confirmed on the control display in the corresponding vehicle.

In rare cases, the use of My BMW App functions for this vehicle may be restricted. More information is shown on the control display.

Creating a driver profile

In countries where BMW ConnectedDrive is not available, driver profiles can be created.

1. Top the iron or personal picture on the

CONTROLS

Personal settings

"Transfer settings"

If the vehicle is in the guest profile, the settings of the guest profile will be applied.

Primary user

The primary user is the person who first adds their BMW ID to the vehicle and first adds the vehicle to the My BMW app. Alternatively, the primary user can be specified by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

The primary user has access to the following settings, for example:

▶ Removing BMW IDs saved to the vehicle.

▶ Transferring the primary user role to another BMW ID.

▶ Changing vehicle-wide data protection settings.

▶ Creating the main digital key.

Additional information:

BMW Digital Key, refer to page 72.

Automatic driver recognition

If driver recognition has been established, automatic activation of the BMW ID or driver profile is triggered by the following actions:

▶ By unlocking the vehicle using the button on the assigned vehicle key.

By unlocking the vehicle with a door handle. The assigned vehicle key or the assigned digital key must be carried with you.

By automatic unlocking when approaching the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the assigned digital key must be carried with you. Depending on the country, it may not be possible to recognize the digital key.

If multiple vehicle keys or digital keys are lo-

The key that triggers the door locks to release also activates the associated BMW ID or driver profile.

The guest profile is activated when the vehicle is unlocked using a key that is not assigned to a BMW ID or driver profile.

If a vehicle key and a digital key are detected at the same time, the digital key triggers the activation of the assigned BMW ID or the assigned driver profile.

If another key is detected on the driver's door after activating the BMW ID or the driver profile, the BMW ID or the driver profile of the last key detected is activated. If no BMW ID and no driver profile are assigned to this key, the guest profile is activated.

Setting synchronization

If synchronization is enabled, settings from the following areas, for example, are continuously synchronized:

▶ BMW ID, e.g., profile picture.

▶ Navigation, e.g., recent destinations, home address, or map settings.

- iDrive, e.g., main menu configuration, language, or units.

▶ Personal Assistant, e.g., suggestions or activation word.

Exterior lighting, e.g., one-touch signaling and home lights.

Settings from the following areas are only synchronized when you log in for the first time:

▶ Seating and climate comfort, e.g., driver's seat position or temperature setting.

Data protection menu

Selecting the BMW ID/driver profile

The BMW ID or driver profile can be changed at any time via iDrive:

1. Top the icon or personal picture on the status bar.
2. ▷ "Change BMW ID" ▶ "Change driver profile"
3. Select the BMW ID or driver profile.
4. If necessary, enter the PIN.
   The BMW ID or the driver profile are activated, the stored settings are loaded.

Guest profile

The guest profile can be activated and changed by anyone.

In the following cases the guest profile is automatically active:

The BMW ID has not yet been added or a driver profile has not yet been created.
No BMW ID or driver profile has been assigned to the vehicle key or the digital key that was used to unlock the vehicle.
The following limitations apply to the guest profile:
▶ Certain functions are not available, e.g., individual navigation functions or saving favorites.
The guest profile cannot be renamed.
It is not possible to assign a PIN to the guest profile.

It is not possible to assign driver detection to the guest profile.
In ConnectedDrive countries, the synchronization with the BMW Cloud is not possible. The guest profile is selected on the Welcome screen or via iDrive:

1. 1. Top the iron or personal picture on the

Deleting the BMW ID/driver profile

1. Top the icon or personal picture on the status bar.
2. ▷ "Manage BMW IDs"

▶ "Change driver profile"

1. Top the icon for the desired BMW ID or driver profile.

Removing a BMW ID from the vehicle causes the vehicle to be removed from the My BMW App. If the BMW ID has been synchronized with the BMW Cloud, the data stored in the BMW Cloud is retained after the BMW ID is deleted. If the currently active BMW ID is removed, the guest profile is activated.

Removing a vehicle from the My BMW App removes the corresponding BMW ID from the vehicle. If the BMW ID was synchronized with the BMW Cloud, the BMW ID data stored in the BMW Cloud will be retained.

If the vehicle is removed from the primary user's My BMW App, it will also be removed from the My BMW App of the other users. The corresponding BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle.

If the vehicle is reset to factory settings, it is removed from each user's My BMW App, and all BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle.

Transfer of the vehicle key

A vehicle key that is assigned to a BMW ID or a driver profile can be used to view or change the stored personal settings.

Before giving a vehicle key to another person, remove the associated driver detection as necessary. Changes to the driver detection can be made in the settings of the BMW ID or the driver profile.

The BMW Digital Key provides the option to

CONTROLS

Personal settings

Settings

General information

Settings added when adding a BMW ID or creating a driver profile can be changed.

1. Top the icon or personal picture on the status bar.
2. "Settings"
   The following settings are available for the BMW ID:
   The type of driver detection.
   The profile picture.
   ▷ Synchronization with the BMW Cloud.
   The personal solutation.
   The following settings are available for the driver profile:
   The type of driver detection.
   The profile picture.
   The profile name.

Selecting a profile picture

The profile picture can be selected from the predefined profile pictures:

1. Top the icon or personal picture on the status bar.
2. "Settings"
3. "Manage profile picture"
4. "Select profile picture"

The profile picture from the My BMW App profile can be used for BMW IDs, Synchronization with the BMW Cloud must be enabled in the settings in order to use the profile picture from the My BMW App. The default pictures can only be selected after deleting the profile picture on the My BMW App or disabling synchronization.

System limits

A clear driver detection via the vehicle key or the digital key may not always be possible in the following cases, for example:
The driver changes, but the vehicle is not locked and unlocked.
▶ If multiple vehicle keys or multiple digital keys linked to a BMW ID or driver profile are located outside the vehicle on the driver's side.
▶ When the vehicle was unlocked via the My BMW App.
There are technical limitations to using the settings for a BMW ID in other vehicles. For example, settings may be stored for a system that is not available, or available in a non-compatible version, in other vehicles.

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Vehicle key

General information

The vehicle comes with two vehicle keys.

Vehicle keys contain a replaceable battery as well as an integrated key.

Depending on the equipment and national market version, various settings are possible for the button functions.

A BMW ID or a driver profile with personal settings can be assigned to a vehicle key.

To provide information on maintenance recommendations, the service data is stored in the vehicle key.

To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting the vehicle.

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle key has a button cell battery. Batteries or button cell batteries can be swallowed and land to various or fatal injuries.

suspicion that a battery or button cell battery has been swallowed or is located in any part of the body.

Overview

Buttons on the vehicle key.

Icon Meaning

Unlock.

Lock.

Pre-conditioning, refer to page 259.

Open the cargo area.

Panic made.

Pathway lighting, refer to page 154.

Additional vehicle keys

Additional vehicle keys are available from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

If the lost vehicle key has an assigned BMW ID or driver profile, the connection to this vehicle key must be deleted. A new vehicle key can then be assigned to the BMW ID or driver profile.

Replacing the battery

NOTICE

Improper batteries in a battery-operated device can damage the device. There is a risk of property damage. Always replace the discharged battery with a battery with the same voltage, the same size and the same specification.

1. Remove the Integrated key from the vehicle key.
2. Place the integrated key underneath the battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the lid with a lever movement of the integrated key, arrow 2.

1. Push battery in arrow direction using a pointed object and lift it out.

1. Insert a CR2032 3V battery with the positive side facing up.
2. Press the lid closed.
3. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key until the integrated key engages.

Have old batteries disposed of by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop, or take them to a collection point.

Batteries contain harmful chemicals. Disposing of batteries with household waste is prohibited by law.

Integrated key

General Information

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked manually using the integrated key.
Depending on the national-market version, the integrated key will fit in the glove compartment.

Safety information

Warning

For some national-market versions, unlocking from the inside is only possible with particular knowledge.

There is a risk of injury and danger to life if people or animals remain in the vehicle for a long period of time and are exposed to extreme temperatures. Do not lack the vehicle from the outside when there are people or animals in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals clone in the vehicle.

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Removing the Integrated key

Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the Integrated key, arrow 2.

Unlocking the vehicle manually

1. Pull and hold the driver's door handle outward with one hand.

1. Guide one finger of your other hand from the back under the cover cap and push the cover cap out. Use the thumb for counter support to prevent the cover cap from falling out of the door handle.

1. The position of the integrated key in the door lock depends on the vehicle. Unlock the door lock with the integrated key by turning it counterclockwise.

1. Open the driver's door.

2. Press the central locking button to unlock the other doors. With the vehicle de-energized: pull the door opener of the other doors from the inside.

Locking the vehicle manually

General information

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the vehicle.

Overview

Lock button for manual locking of the doors.

Locking the vehicle

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

1. Press the central locking button to unlock all doors.
   If vehicle is de-energized: press down the lock buttons on all doors except the front passenger door.
2. Exit the vehicle through the front passenger door.
3. Press down the lock button on the front passenger door and close the front passenger door.
4. Pull the door handles to make sure they are locked. If necessary, repeat the process.

Alarm system

If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated key via the door lock, the activated alarm system will be triggered when the door is opened. In this case, use the vehicle key emergency detection to switch off the alarm.

If the vehicle is locked with the integrated key via the door lock, the alarm system will not be activated.

Emergency detection of the vehicle key

It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready state if the vehicle key has not been detected. Proceed as follows in this case:

Turn on drive-ready state within 10 seconds.

▶ If the vehicle key is not detected: Slightly change the position of the vehicle key and repeat the procedure.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed where applicable.
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances:
The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.

Fault of the radio link from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.
▶ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal objects.
Do not transport the vehicle key together with metal objects.
▶ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the vehicle key.
Do not carry the vehicle key in close proximity to other electronic devices.
Wireless transmission interrupted by mobile device charging process, e.g., charging a mobile phone.
The vehicle key is located in direct proximity of the wireless charging tray.

Place the vehicle key in a different location.

In the case of interference, the vehicle can also be unlocked and locked from the outside with the integrated key. Use the Emergency detection of the vehicle key to turn on drive-ready state.

BMW Digital Key

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

BMW Digital Key can be used with a compatible smartphone or other compatible mobile devices.

To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible smartphone, this function must be offered by the smartphone manufacturer. The My BMW app can be used to check if the smartphone and vehicle are compatible and which functions are supported.

Each vehicle can be provided with a main digital key. Additional digital keys can be shared and then deleted.

General information

BMW Digital Key availability and functionality depend on vehicle equipment and national-market version.

The Key Cord is part of the BMW Digital Key. A BMW ID or a driver profile with Individual settings can be assigned to a digital key.

When using a smartphone as a digital key, always carry a vehicle key or the activated Key Cord with you. This ensures access to the vehicle, even in the event of a smartphone failure. It is also helpful to have the vehicle key or Key Cord with you if the vehicle needs to be handed over to another person. You can then hand over the vehicle key or the Key Cord instead of your smartphone.

Always take the vehicle key with you to a service appointment.

Additional Information:

BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 64.

▷ Key Card, refer to page 76.

The BMW website provides additional information under the keyword "Digital Key".

Functional requirements

The smartphone is compatible with BMW Digital Key.
The vehicle is linked with the Connected-Drive account of the vehicle owner.
The smartphone's rechargeable battery has sufficient charge. The necessary minimum charge of the rechargeable battery depends on the smartphone.
▶ Bluetooth must be activated on the smartphone for contactless unlocking and locking using the digital key.

Enabling the main digital key

Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a main digital key in the vehicle. The vehicle owner must prove his authorization for the vehicle for this purpose.

The authorization verification process can be started on the My BMW App or using the activation code in the corresponding smartphone function, e.g., the Wallet app.

Both vehicle keys must be located in the vehicle to be enabled.

To enable, follow the instructions on the smartphone and control display.

Sharing digital keys

General information

Digital Key allows the sharing of digital keys with other people. This is possible using the vehicle owner's smartphone or a smartphone with the corresponding authorization. This function must be supported by the smartphone.

Forwarding authorization

To share the digital key, select the correspond-

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

When the invitation is accepted, the digital key on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.

Authentication

Depending on the recipient's smartphone model, an authentication may be required for security and safety reasons.

A vehicle key, a digital key with corresponding authorization, or another method can be used for authentication. Follow the corresponding instructions on the smartphone or the control display.

Deleting digital keys

General information

Deleted digital keys will be removed from the list of enabled digital keys.

Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.

Deleting the main digital key

The main digital key can be deleted using a smartphone or via IDrive.

The main digital key is deleted immediately.

Deleting a shared key

Shared keys can be deleted using a smartphone with the corresponding authorization, using the smartphone with a shared key, or via IDrive.

A key can only be deleted via smartphone with corresponding authorization once the vehicle is used with a key other than the key to be deleted.

If the smartphone associated with a shared key or iDrive is used to delete a shared key, it will be deleted immediately.

Deletion via iDrive

To delete a digital key via iDrive, a vehicle key must be in the vehicle.

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. 'Keys'
4. Top "Digital Key" as necessary.
5. If necessary, select the digital key.
6. Delete the Digital Key.

Resetting the function

To reset the BMW Digital Key function, a vehicle key must be located in the vehicle.

When resetting the BMW Digital Key function, all digital keys including the main digital key will be deleted. The Key Cord's digital key is retained.

After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be unlocked, locked or started with a digital key.

The main digital key must be enabled again to be able to use BMW Digital Key again.

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. 'Keys'
4. Where applicable, "Digital Key".
5. "Reset function"

Unlocking and locking the vehicle

The vehicle can be unlocked and locked using the door handle.

Additional information:

Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 77.

Turning on drive-ready state with the BMW Digital Key

Using the smartphone tray

1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
2. Place the smartphone in the middle of the smartphone tray.
   Ensure that the display is facing up.
3. Close the cover of the smartphone troy.
4. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on drive-ready state.

Sale of the smartphone

Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior to selling the smartphone. This ensures that the smartphone can no longer be used for the vehicle.

Changing smartphones

To use a new smartphone as a master Digital Key, activate the new smartphone according to the Instructions for the master Digital Key. The previous main key can be deleted when the new smartphone is activated.

Sale of the vehicle

Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital Key function or remove the vehicle from the ConnectedDrive account of the current vehicle

hicle will be deleted. The Key Card's digital key is retained and deactivated.

System limits

The Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the alarm system cannot be switched off with a digital key.

Additional information:

Alarm system, refer to page 86.

Malfunction

Digital key recognition by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances:

The smartphone is shielded from the sensors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover that is not suitable.

Objects such as a chip cord or the Key Cord are located between the smartphone and the smartphone cover.
▶ Fault of the connection from transmission towers or other equipment with high transmitting power.
Shielding of the smartphone due to buildings or metal objects.
Some smartphones offer the option to protect the digital key with additional authentication. If using the digital key, the user must authenticate themselves, e.g., via PIN, fingerprint, or facial recognition.

If the recognition system is defective, the digital key can no longer be used. If neither the vehicle key nor the Key Cord is available, the vehicle can be locked/unlocked using Remote Services In the My BMW App on another smartphone. Alternatively, the vehicle can be unlocked by the BMW ConnectedDrive cell center upon request.

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Key Card

Principle

The Key Cord allows the vehicle to be unlocked and locked, as well as started.

General information

Key Card availability depends on vehicle equipment and national-market version.

Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key Card or take the Key Card with you because the active Key Card can be used to start the vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to a service appointment.

Safety information

NOTICE

If the Key Cord and a mobile device are in the wireless charging tray at the same time, the Key Cord could become damaged. There is a risk of property damage. Do not place the Key Cord in the Wireless Charging tray at the same time as a mobile device.

Activating/deactivating the Key Cord in the vehicle

Functional requirement

A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to activate and deactivate the Key Card.

Activating the Key Card

1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
2. Place the Key Card in the middle of the smartphone tray.
3. Follow the instructions on the control display.

Deactivating the Key Card

1. eps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. 'Keys'
4. Where applicable, "Digital Key".

5. Select the Key Card option.

6. Select the "Deactivate Key Card" option.

A deactivated Key Cord remains in the list of paired digital keys.

If using a digital key or vehicle key while an activated Key Cord is detected, the control display will show an additional message to deactivate the Key Cord.

Unlocking and locking the vehicle

The vehicle can be unlocked and locked with the activated Key Cord.

Additional information:

Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 77.

Turning on drive-ready state with the Key Card

1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
2. Place the activated Key Card in the middle of the smartphone tray.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
   After drive-ready state is switched on, the Key Card can be removed from the tray.

Malfunction

The vehicle may not be able to detect the Key Cord if there are objects between the smartphone tray and the Key Cord, e.g., a wallet or smartphone case.

Access to vehicle interior

Safety information

Warning

People or animals in the vehicle can lock the doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from the outside. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. Take the vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside.

Warning

For some national-market versions, unlocking from the inside is only possible with particular knowledge.

There is a risk of injury and danger to life if people or animals remain in the vehicle for a long period of time and are exposed to extreme temperatures. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people or animals in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals alone in the vehicle.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for example, due to the following actions:

▶ Establishing standby.
▶ Releasing the parking broke.

Opening and closing the doors or windows.
▶ Engaging selector lever position N.
▶ Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

NOTICE

The window will be lowered slightly when pulling on the door handle. In the event of frost, the window may be frozen solid and may not be able to be lowered. There is a risk of property damage. When pulling on the

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Actions during unlocking

Depending on the settings, the following functions are performed when unlocking the vehicle:

▶ Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap will be unlocked or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked.
The unlocking of the vehicle can be confirmed with a light signal or a sound signal.
The welcome light can be turned on when the vehicle is being unlocked.

In addition, the following functions are executed:

▶ If a BMW ID or a driver profile was assigned to the vehicle key, this BMW ID or driver profile will be activated.
The interior lights are switched on, unless they were manually switched off.
▶ Depending on vehicle equipment, folded-in exterior mirrors are folded out.

If the exterior mirrors were folded in using the button inside the vehicle, they will not fold out when the vehicle is unlocked.

▶ Anti-theft protection is switched off.
The alarm system is switched off.
Additional information:
▶ Settings, refer to page 85.
▶ Welcome lights, refer to page 153.
▶ BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 64.

Actions during locking

Depending on the settings, the following functions are performed when locking the vehicle:
The locking of the vehicle can be confirmed with a light signal or a sound signal.
▷ Depending on vehicle equipment, the exte-

• All doors, the cargo area, and the fuel filler flap are locked.
  Anti-theft protection is switched on. This prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock buttons or the door openers.
  The alarm system is switched on.
  If the drive-ready state is still turned on when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will hork twice. In this case, drive-ready state must be turned off using the Star/Stop button.
  Additional Information:
  Settings, refer to page 05.

With the vehicle key

Unlocking the vehicle

Press the button on the vehicle key.

If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap have been unlocked due to the settings in place, press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points.

The lighting functions may depend on the ambient brightness.

Locking the vehicle

1. Close the driver's door.

1. The button on the vehicle key.

All vehicle access points are locked,

On the door handle

Principle

The vehicle can be accessed without operating the vehicle key.

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Functional requirements

Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket.
To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be outside of the vehicle near the doors.
After locking, approx. 2 seconds must elapse before unlocking is possible.

Unlock vehicle

Fully grasp the handle of a door.

Locking the vehicle

1. Close the driver's door.
2. With your finger, touch the grooved surface on a closed door handle for approx. 1 second without gripping the door handle.

Malfunction

Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-

Touchless unlocking/locking of the vehicle

Principle

When the driver approaches the locked vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle is unlocked.
When the driver walks away from the unlocked vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be locked.

General Information

The function is available with Comfort Access.
The vehicle will be unlocked when an authorized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking zone.
The unlocking zone is located within a radius of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the side and rear of the vehicle.
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key leaves the locking zone.
The locking zone is located within a radius of approx. 9 ft/3 m around the side and rear of the vehicle.
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking zone for an extended period of time without movement, the vehicle will be locked automatically.
If a passenger is detected in the front passenger seat during locking and the seat belt of the front passenger is engaged in the seat belt buckle during locking:
The vehicle will be locked but not secured against theft.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.

Actions during unlocking

If the settings specify that only the driver's

deemed and the first 50% follow will be metched

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Settings, refer to page 05.

Functional requirements

- Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket.

▶ Unlocking: when entering the unlocking zone, the doors and cargo area must be closed.

▶ Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the doors and cargo area must be closed.

▶ Automatic unlocking and locking must be activated in the settings.

The drive-ready state must be turned off.

For contactless locking of the vehicle, no second vehicle key may be within a radius of 10 ft/6 m around the vehicle.

▶ If the vehicle has been in the idle state for several days, contactless unlocking/locking will only be available after the vehicle has been driven.

Additional Information:

Settings, refer to page 85.

With the Key Cord

Principle

The Key Card is a chip card on which the digital key is installed. The Key Card can be used to unlock and lock the vehicle.

Additional information:

Key Card, refer to page 76.

Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the Key Card

Hold the activated Key Cord directly at the center of the driver's door handle.

When lacking the vehicle with the Key Card, make sure that all doors and the cargo area are closed.

If the Key Cord is not detected, slightly change the position of the Key Cord and repeat the procedure.

With the BMW Digital Key

Principle

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version, a digital key can be installed on a compatible smartphone and used to unlock and lock the vehicle.

Additional Information:

BMW Digital Key, refer to page 72.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle

sition of the near field communication antenna depends on the smartphone model.

When locking the vehicle with the smartphone, make sure that all doors and the cargo area are closed.

Frequently Asked Questions

What precautions can be taken to be able to open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in the vehicle key?

The app's remote services offer the option to lock and unlock a vehicle.

This requires an active BMW Connected-Drive contract, and the app must be installed on a smartphone.

Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via the BMW ConnectedDrive Coll Center.

An active BMW Connected Drive contract is required.

Access to the cargo area

General information

It may not be possible to open the cargo area when the vehicle is in valet parking mode.

Additional information:

Valet parking mode, refer to page 84.

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is clear while opening and closing.

Warning

While opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Make sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is clear while opening and closing.

With the vehicle key

General information

To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version, the following settings can be changed:

▶ Unlocking the cargo area with the vehicle key also unlocks the doors.
▶ Before unlocking the cargo area with the vehicle key, first unlock the vehicle.

Functional requirements

Selector lever position P must be engaged to open the cargo area with the vehicle key.

You must enable the setting for opening with the vehicle key.

Additional information:

Settings, refer to page 85.

Opening the cargo area

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

On the cargo area

General Information

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Functional prerequisite

Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket.

Opening the cargo area

▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button on the cargo area.

▶ With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key with you and press the button on the cargo area.

Locked doors are not unlocked.

Closing the cargo area manually

Pull down the cargo area using the recessed grips.

Depending on the equipment: press the button on the cargo area.

The vehicle is locked after closing the cargo area. To do so, the driver's door must be closed and the vehicle key must be outside of the vehicle near the cargo area.

Closing the cargo area automatically

▶ Press the button on the cargo area.

▷ Press the button on the cargo area.

The vehicle is locked after closing the cargo area. To do so, the driver's door must be closed and the vehicle key must be outside of the vehicle near the cargo area.

Inside the vehicle

Functional requirements

The vehicle key or digital key must be located within the vehicle in order to close the cargo area using the button inside the vehicle.

Opening the cargo area

Press the button in the driver's door.

Closing the cargo area

Depending on the equipment:

Pull and hold the button in the driver's

door.

An acoustic signal sounds before the cargo area is closed.

Interruption of the opening procedure

The opening procedure is interrupted in the following situations:

▶ When the vehicle starts moving.

By pressing the button on the outside of the cargo area. Pressing it again closes the cargo area again.

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Pressing the button again continues the opening process.

By pressing or pulling the button in the driver's door. Pressing again continues the opening procedure.

Interruption of the closing procedure The closing procedure is interrupted in the following situations:

If the vehicle drives off with a jerky movement.
By pressing the button on the outside of the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the cargo area again.
By pressing the button on the Inside of the cargo area. Pressing it again opens the cargo area again.
By pressing the button on the vehicle key. Pressing it again opens the cargo area again.
By releasing the button in the driver's door. Pulling again and holding continues the closing motion.

Emergency cargo area release

Pull the handle inside the cargo area. The cargo area is unlocked.

To close it completely, push the trunk lid down lightly. Closing occurs automatically.

Buttons for the central lock- ing system

General information

The vehicle is automatically locked when driving off.

In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning system and interior lights are illuminated.

Overview

The central locking buttons are located on the front door.

Locking the vehicle

Press the button in the driver's door or front passengers door with the front doors closed.

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Unlocking the vehicle

Press the button in the driver's door or front passenger's door.

Opening the door

▶ Press the button to unlock all the doors.

Pull the door opener above the arm-

▶ Front doors: pull the door opener on the door to open the door. The other doors remain locked.

Back doors; pull twice on the door opener on the door to be opened; the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it. The other doors remain locked.

Valet parking mode

Principle

In the valet parking mode, the control display is disabled.

E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle is handed over for valet parking.

General information

Depending on the national-market version, the valet parking mode may not be available.

Volet Parking mode has the following restrictions:

▶ Vehicle settings cannot be changed via IDrivo.

Settings stored to a BMW ID or guest profile cannot be changed.

▶ Personal data cannot be displayed.

▷ Dynamic Stability Control cannot be turned off.

The availability of certain settings of the driving modes is limited.

The M1 and M2 buttons on the steering wheel are not active.

The Head-up display may turn off. Additional information:

BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 64.

Functional requirement

The driver has registered in the vehicle with a BMW ID.

Activating the valet parking mode

1. https menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

4. "Volet parking mode"

5. "Lock tailgate"

The cargo area is locked and disconnected from the central locking system.

6."PIN"

1. Enter the one-time PIN to activate volet parking mode.

2. "Activate volet parking mode"

Deactivating valet parking mode

1. Activate the desired BMW ID on the lock screen.

2. Enter the valet parking mode PIN associated with the BMW ID.

If the one-time PIN for volet parking mode has been forgotten: enter the login information for the BMW ID or scan the QR code.

Settings

General information

Depending on the equipment and national-market version, various settings for opening and closing are possible.

Unlocking and locking

Doors

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. "Unlock"
6. Select the desired setting:

"Driver's door only"

Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks the entire vehicle.

"All doors"

The entire vehicle is unlocked.

Touchless unlocking/locking

1. 4ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"

4. "Comfort access"

5. Select the desired setting.

Automatic unlocking

1. 4ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. III

If locked, the vehicle unlocks automatically when drive-ready state is turned off or selector lever position P is engaged.

Automatic locking

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. "Lock after a short time"

The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if no door is opened after un-locking.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle

1. 4-ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. Select the desired setting:

▶ "Flash on lock/unlock"

Unlocking is signaled by flashing twice, locking by flashing once.

With alarm system:

"Sound on lock/unlock"

Unlocking is confirmed with two sound signals, locking is confirmed with one sound signal.

Folding mirrors in automatically

1. 4ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lack/unlock"
5. "Fold mirrors on lock/unlock"

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Cargo area

Cargo area and doors

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. 'Keys'
4. "Vehicle key"
5. "Tailgate button"
6. Select the desired setting:

▶ "Tallgate"

Depending on the equipment, the cargo area will be unlocked or opened.

▷ "Tallgate and door(s)"

Depending on the equipment, the cargo area will be unlocked or opened and the doors are unlocked.

"Tailgate will only open if vehicle is already unlocked"

The vehicle must be unlocked before the cargo area can be operated with the vehicle key.

▶ "Lockfolgate button"

Operating the cargo area with the vehicle key is disabled.

Alarm system

Principle

The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic signal when someone attempts to open the locked vehicle Incorrectly.

General information

When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system reacts to the following changes:

▶ Changes in the vehicle inclination such as during attempts of stealing a wheel or when towing the vehicle.

▶ Disconnected battery voltage.

▷ Incorrect use of the diagnostic socket.

- Locking the vehicle while a device is connected to the diagnostic socket.

The alarm system signals these changes visually and acoustically:

▶ Acoustic alarm:

Depending on local regulations, the acoustic alarm may be suppressed.

▶ Optical alarm:

By flashing of the hazard warning system and headlights, where required.

Do not modify the system to ensure function of the alarm system.

Turning the alarm system on/off

The alarm system is turned on as soon as the vehicle is locked from the outside.

The alarm system does not turn on if the vehicle is locked manually from the inside.

The alarm system is switched off as soon as the vehicle is unlocked.

Opening the doors with the alarm system switched on

The alarm system is triggered when a door is opened if the door was unlocked using the integrated key in the door lock.

Opening the cargo area with the alarm system switched on

The cargo area can be opened even when the alarm system is switched on.

1.2.1.1

Panic mode

You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation.

▶ Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds.

▶ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession.

To switch off the alarm: press any button.

Indicator light on the interior mirror

The indicator light flushes briefly every 2 seconds:

The alarm system is switched on.

The indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds, then flashes briefly every 2 seconds:

Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or tollgate are not correctly closed. Correctly closed access points are secured.

When the remaining open access points are closed, the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor will be turned on.

The indicator light flashes even though all access points have been closed; Alarm system error.

The indicator light goes out after unlocking:

The alarm has been triggered.

Tilt alarm sensor

The inclination of the vehicle is monitored.

The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is towed.

Interior motion sensor

The vehicle interior is monitored.

The alarm system triggers when movement is detected inside the vehicle.

The windows and the glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly.

Avoiding unintentional alarms

General Information

The tilt alarm sensor and Interior motion sensor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized action occurred.

Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:

In car washes.

In duplex garages.

▶ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at sea or on a trailer.

With animals in the vehicle.

- When the vehicle is locked after start of refueling.

The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor can be switched off in such situations.

Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor

Press the button on the vehicle key within 30 seconds as soon as the vehi-

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again.

Ending the alarm

Unlock the vehicle.

If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated key, the drive-ready state must subsequently be turned on via the emergency detection of the vehicle key.

Window

General information

When a window is frequently opened to the same position, this task can be performed by the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. This is useful if you frequently use the same parking garage, for example.

Additional information:

BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to page 53.

Safety information

Warning

When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Make sure that the travel path of the windows is clear while opening and closing.

With the vehicle key

Opening windows

Press and hold the button on the vena-

Closing the windows

With Comfort Access: Press and hold the button on the vehicle key after locking.

The windows close for as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment; exterior mirrors are folded in unless they were folded. In during locking. The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the hazard warning system is turned on.

On the door handle

Principle

The windows can be closed using the door handle without operating the vehicle key.

The vehicle key is automatically detected near the vehicle.

General information

The function is available with Comfort Access.

Functional prerequisite

Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance in your pants pocket.

Closing the windows

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior mirrors are folded in unless they were folded in during locking. The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the hazard warning system is turned on.

Inside the vehicle

Overview

Power window

Functional requirements

Standby state is switched on.

Drive-ready state is switched on.

The vehicle key or digital key must be inside the vehicle.

Opening windows

Press the switch to the resistance

point.

The window opens while the switch is being held.

Press the switch beyond the resist-

once point.

The window opens automatically.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

The window closes while the switch is being held.

Pull the switch beyond the resistance point.

The window closes automatically. Pulling again stops the motion.

Anti-trap mechanism

Principle

The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or body parts becoming jammed between the door frame and window while a window is being closed.

General information

If resistance or blockage is detected while a window is being closed, the closing will be interrupted.

Safety Information

Warning

Accessories on the windows such as antennas can impact anti-trap mechanism. There is a risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the travel path of the windows.

Closing without the anti-trap mechanism

In case of danger from the outside or if icing might prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:

1. Pull the

Pull the ▶ switch past the resistance point and hold it there.

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

The window closes with limited anti-trap mechanism. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted.

1. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there.

The window closes without the anti-trap mechanism.

Glass sunroof

Safety information

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when operating the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and closing.

With the vehicle key

Opening glass sunroof

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key after unlocking.

The glass sunroof with sun protection will be opened for as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed.

Closing glass sunroof

With Comfort Access: press and hold the button on the vehicle key in close range of the vehicle after locking.

in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the hazard warning system is turned on.

On the door handle

Principle

The glass sunroof can be closed using the door handle without operating the vehicle key. The vehicle key is automatically detected near the vehicle.

Functional prerequisite

Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance in your pants pocket.

Closing glass sunroof

Touch the grooved surface on the external door handle of a closed door with your finger and hold it there without grasping the door handle.

In addition to locking, the windows and glass sunroof with sun protection will be closed.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior mirrors are folded in unless they were folded in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the hazard warning system is turned on.

Inside the vehicle

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

Standby state is switched on.
Drive-ready state is switched on.
The vehicle key must be inside the vehicle.

General information

The glass sunroof and the sun protection are operated using the same switch.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Opening/closing the glass sun-roof/sun protection.

Lifting/closing glass sunroof

Push switch briefly upward.

The closed glass sunroof tilts and the sun protection opens slightly.
The opened gloss sunroof closes until it is in the tilted position. The sun protection does not move.

The tilted glass sunroof closes.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sun protection separately

▶ Slide switch back to the resistance point and hold. Holding down the switch opens the sun protection. If the sun protection is already fully open, the glass sunroof opens.

Slide switch forward to the resistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof closes while the switch is being held. If the glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted position, the sun protection closes.
▶ Slide the switch back post the resistance point.
The sun protection opens automatically. If the sun protection is already fully open, the glass sunroof opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Push the switch forward past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If the glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted position, the sun protection closes automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sun protection together

▶ Briefly press out the switch twice in succession toward the rear past the resistance point.

The gloss sunroof and sun protection open together.

CONTROLS

Opening and closing

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

▶ Briefly press out the switch twice in succession toward the front past the resistance point.

The glass sunroof and sun protection close together.

Pressing the switch again stops the motion.

Comfort position

In some models, the wind noises in the car's interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not fully open. In these models, the automatic function initially only opens the glass sunroof up to this comfort position.

Operating the switch inside the vehicle again opens the glass sunroof completely.

Anti-trap mechanism

Principle

The anti-trap mechanism prevents objects or body parts from becoming jammed between the roof frame and glass sunroof while the glass sunroof is closing.

General Information

If a resistance or blockage is detected while the glass sunroof is closing, the closing operation is interrupted once the roof reaches the half-open position, or it is stopped when closing from the tilted position.

Closing from the open position without the anti-trap mechanism

If an external hazard or ice prevents normal closure, proceed as follows:

^

1. Close all doors.
2. Switch on drive-ready state or stop a moving vehicle.
3. Push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold.
   The glass sunroof closes with limited anti-trap mechanism. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted.
4. Push the switch forward again post the resistance point and hold until the glass sunroof closes without the anti-trop mechanism. Make sure that the closing path is clear.

Closing from the lifted position without the anti-trap mechanism

In case of danger from the outside or if icing might prevent normal closing, proceed as follows:

1. Close all doors.
2. Switch on drive-ready state or stop a moving vehicle.
3. Push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold.

Initializing after a power interruption

General information

After a power interruption during the opening or closing process, the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent. Initializing the system can help in this case.

Opening and closing

CONTROLS

The vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.
The vehicle will not be moved until the initialization is completed.
The drive-ready state is established.
The outside temperature is above 41°F/5°C.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes without the anti-trap mechanism.
Make sure that the closing path is clear.

Initializing the system

Press the switch up and hold it until the initialization is complete:

Initialization begins within 15 seconds.

If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then closes again.
If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes, then opens and closes again.
The sun protection is initialized in the closed position.

Initialization is complete once the glass sun-roof and the sun protection have opened then closed again.

CONTROLS

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Sitting safely

An ideal seat position that meets the needs of the occupants can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving.

In the event of an accident, the correct seat position plays an important role. Follow the information in the following chapters.

Additional information:

▶ Seats, refer to page 94.
▷ Seat belts, refer to page 98.

Head restraints, refer to page 100.
▶ Airbags, refer to page 160

Seats

Safety information

Warning

Seat setting while driving can lead to unexpected movements of the seat. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is sta-

Warning

With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the protective effect of the seat belt can no longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding under the seat belt in an accident. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the most upright position as possible and do not adjust again while driving.

Warning

There is a danger of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Make sure that the travel path of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Electrically adjustable seats

General information

The current seat position can be stored using the memory function.

Overview

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Setting the longitudinal direction

Press switch forward or backward.

Adjusting backrest tilt

Tilt switch forward or backward.

Adjusting the height

Press switch up or down.
Adjusting the seat position automatically

General Information

The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored in the active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated at a later time, the saved position will be called up automatically.

Adjusting seat tilt

Tilt switch up or down.

Activate/deactivate the function

1. https menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select driver's seat.
5. "Use automatically"
6. Select the desired setting.

CONTROLS

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Thigh support

Sport seat

Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push the thigh support forward or back.

Lumbar support

Principle

The curvature of the seat backrest can be adjusted in a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright sitting position.

Adjusting the lumbar support

▶ Press the front/rear section of the button: The curvature is increased/decreased.

▶ Press the upper/lower section of the button:

The curvature is shifted up/down.

The lumbar support cannot be adjusted on the M Carbon bucket seat.

Functional limitation

It may not be possible to adjust the lumbar support at very high and very low tempens-

Backrest width

Principle

Adjusting the backrest width may improve side support when cornering.

General information

The backrest width is changed by adjusting the side sections of the backrest.

Adjusting the backrest width

▶ Press the front section of the button:

The backrest width decreases.

Press the rear section of the button:

The backrest width increases.

Functional limitation

It may not be possible to adjust the backrest width at very high and very low temperatures.

Entering the rear

Safety information

Warning

There is a danger of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Make sure that the travel path of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Warning

Unexpected movements of the rear seat backrest while driving may occur if the rear

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

the backrest engages correctly by slightly moving forward and back.

Electric longitudinal setting

Fold the seat backrest forward

1. Pull the lever.

1. Fold the seat backrest forward.

To make the entry to the rear easier, the seat will automatically move to the most forward position.

The process will be terminated when the switch for the forward/back direction adjustment is pressed or the backrest is reclined.

Push the seat backrest rearward

Push the seat backrest rearward and lock it.

The seat moves automatically to the last seat position that was stored.

Pulling the lever again stops the motion.

Calibrating the front seats

General information

As soon as the electric seat setting no longer functions precisely, a Check Control message is displayed on the control display.

To restore the accuracy of the electric seal sel-

Safety Information

Warning

There is a danger of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Make sure that the travel path of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Functional requirements

To calibrate the front seats, the following functional requirements must be met:

Selector lever position P is engaged.

The seat to be calibrated is unoccupied.

Calibrating the front seats

1. To collibrate the rear seat position, press and hold the longitudinal direction switch backward until the seat stops.

2. Repeat step 1 until the seat stops then moves slightly in the opposite direction. The rear end position is calibrated.

3. To calibrate the front seat position, press and hold the longitudinal direction switch forward until the seat stops.

4. Repeat step 3 until the seat stops then moves slightly in the opposite direction. The front end position is calibrated.

As soon as the message on the control display disappears, the calibration is complete. If the message remains active, repeat the calibration.

If the message is still shown after repeated calibration, have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

CONTROLS

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Seat belts

General information

The vehicle is fitted with four seat belts to ensure occupant safety. However, they can only offer protection when adjusted correctly.

Always make sure that seat belts are being worn by the occupants before driving off. The airbags supplement the seat belts as an additional safety device. The airbags do not replace seat belts.

All seat belt anchorage points are designed to achieve the best possible protective effect of the seat belts when used properly and with the correct seat settings.

Additional information:

Notes on sitting solely, refer to page 94.

Safety information

Warning

Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one person will potentially defeat the ability of the seat belt to serve its protective function. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. Do not strap in more than one person per single seat belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an occupant's lap, and must be transported and secured in designated child restraint systems.

Warning

The protective effect of safety gear, including seat belts, can be limited or last when seat belts are fastened Incorrectly. An Incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause additional inju

Warning

With a rear seat backrest that is not locked, the protective effect of the middle seat belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. If you are using the middle seat belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.

Warning

The protective effect of safety gear, including seat belts, may not be fully operational or fail in the following situations:

The seat belts or seat belt buckles are damaged, soiled, or changed in any other way.

Seat belt tensioners or seat belt winders were modified.

Seat belts can be Imperceptibly damaged in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. Keep clean and do not modify: seat belts, seat belt buckles, seat belt tensioners, seat belt winders, and seat belt anchors. After an accident, have the seat belts checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Correct use of seat belts

▶ Wear the seat belt so that it fits tightly to your body over your pelvis and shoulder and is not twisted.
▶ Wear the seat belt low down on your hips in the pelvic region. The seat belt must not press on your stomach.
Do not rub the sect belt against sharp edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or fragile objects

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Fastening the seat belt

1. Guide the seat belt slowly over shoulder and hip to put it on.
2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage audibly.

To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an adjustable slider is available on the belt to help position the buckle when not in use.

Unfastening the seat belt

1. Hold down the seat belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the seat belt buckle.
3. Guide the seat belt back into the seat belt winder.

Seat belt reminder

General information

Make sure that the seat belts are positioned correctly.

The seat belt reminder becomes active in the following situations:

When the seat belt on the driver's side or on the passenger's side is not fastened.
When the seat belt is unfastened while driving.
When objects are lying on a seat.

A Check Control message is displayed where applicable. Check whether the seat bell has been fastened correctly.

Icon Meaning

Seat belt on the driver's seat is not buckled.

Seat belt on the passenger seat or another seat in the vehicle is not buckled.

Seat belt is buckled on the corresponding seat.

Seat belt is not buckled on the corresponding seat.

Rear Occupant Alert

Principle

At the end of a trip, the system informs the driver of the possible presence of occupants on the rear seats.

General information

If a door with access to the rear seat row is operated within 30 minutes before starting a drive, a notice appears on the control display and a signal tone sounds at the end of the drive.

If the drive is continued within 30 minutes, the notice is displayed again after the drive is complete.

Activate/deactivate the function

1. Apps menu
2. "System settings"
   2 "Rent Occasion" Men

CONTROLS

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Safety mode

Depending on vehicle equipment, the driver and front passenger seat bolt straps are automatically tightened once after driving off, if the seat bolt is fastened.

If necessary, in critical driving situations, e.g., during emergency braking, the front seat belts are automatically pretensioned.

After a critical driving situation without an accident, the front seat belts are loosened again. If the belt tension does not loosen automatically, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the seat belt using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the seat belt before continuing to drive.

Front head restraints

Safety information

Warning

The lack of protective effect due to removal or incorrect adjustment of head restraints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

▶ Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats.

▶ If possible, adjust the head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level.

Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed.

For manually adjustable head restraints: After adjusting, make sure that the head restraint is correctly engaged.

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint.

Warning

Objects on the head restraint reduce the protective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury.

Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint.
Only use accessories that have been determined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint.
Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving.

Adjusting the height: M Sport seat

Press switch up or down.

Adjusting the height: M Carbon bucket seat

The height of the head restpoints cannot be

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head.

Removing the head restraints

The head restraints cannot be removed.

Exterior mirrors

General information

The front passenger's side exterior mirror is more curved than the driver's side mirror.

The exterior mirror adjustment is stored in the active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated at a later time, the stored position is called up automatically.

The current exterior mirror adjustment can be stored using the memory function.

Depending on vehicle equipment, the driver's side exterior mirror also dims automatically. Photocells in the interior mirror are used to control this.

Depending on vehicle equipment, both exterior mirrors are heated automatically as necessary and when drive-ready state is on.

Safety information

Warning

Objects in the mirror are closer than they appear. The distance to the road users behind could be incorrectly estimated, for instance, while changing lanes. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind by looking over your shoulder.

Overview

Icon Meaning

Fold the exterior mirrors in and out,

Adjust the exterior mirrors.

Select exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Press the button.

The selected exterior mirror moves along with the button movement.

Selecting the exterior mirror

To change over to the other mirror; Slide the switch.

Malfunction

In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the exterior mirror by pressing on the edges of the mirror glass.

CONTROLS

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Folding in/folding out the exterior mirrors

NOTICE

Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle can be damaged in car washes. There is a risk of property damage. Before washing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.

Press the button.

Folding is possible at vehicle speeds of up to approx. 12 mph/20 km/h.

Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is helpful in the following situations:

In cor washes.

On narrow roads.

Exterior mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Automatic heating

Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as needed and when the drive-ready state is switched on.

Automatic dimming

The exterior mirror on the driver's side is automatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior mirror are used to control this.

Automatic Curb Monitor

Principle

If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror gloss on the passenger's side is tilted downward. This

Activating the Automatic Curb Monitor

Slide the switch to the driver's side position.

1. Engage selector lever position R.

Deactivating the Automatic Curb Monitor

Slide the switch to the front passenger's side exterior mirror position.

Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature

General information

The interior mirror is dimmed automatically. Photocells are used for control:

In the mirror glass.

On the rear of the mirror.

Overview

Functional requirements

▶ Keep the photocells clean.

Do not cover the area between the interior mirror and the windshield.

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

CONTROLS

Steering wheel

Safety information

Warning

Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel movements. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary only.

Manual steering wheel adjustment

1. Fold the lever down completely.
2. Grip the steering wheel with both hands and move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seat position.
3. Fold the lever back up.

Memory function

Principle

The following settings can be stored and, if necessary, retrieved using the memory function:

Seat position.

General information

Two memory locations with different settings can be set for each driver profile.
The following settings are not stored:

Backrest width.
Lumbar support.

Safety information

Warning

Using the memory function while driving can lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel movements. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Only retrieve the memory function when the vehicle is stationary.

Warning

There is a danger of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Make sure that the travel path of the seat is clear prior to any adjustment.

Overview

The memory buttons are located on the front door.

CONTROLS

Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Storing settings

1. Set the desired position.
2. SET Press the button. The LED illuminates.
3. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2 while the LED is illuminated. A signal sounds.

Calling up settings

Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.

The stored position is called up.

The procedure stops when a seat setting switch or one of the memory buttons is pressed again.

The adjustment of the seat position on the driver's side is interrupted after a short time while driving.

Seat climate control

Various climate control functions are available for the seats.

Additional information:

Climate control, refer to page 249.

Transporting children safely

CONTROLS

Transporting children safely

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

The right place for children

Safety information

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for example, due to the following actions:

▶ Establishing standby.

▶ Releasing the parking brake.

▶ Opening and closing the doors or windows.

▶ Engaging selector lever position N.

▶ Using vehicle equipment,

There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lock the vehicle.

Warning

A hot vehicle may result in death to persons, especially children, or animals. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. Do not leave people, especially children, or animals unattended in the vehicle.

Warning

Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child restraint systems and their components to become very hot. Persons may sustain burn injuries when touching the hot components.

There is a risk of injury. Do not expose the child restraint system to direct sunlight or cover where necessary. If necessary, let the child restraint system cool down before transporting a child. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Children in the rear seat

General information

Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the rear seat.

Children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported in the rear seat in suitable child restraint systems designed for the age, weight and size of the child. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight, or size.

CONTROLS

Transporting children safely

Safety Information

Warning

The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without suitable additional child restraint systems. The protective effect of safety gear, including seat bolts, can be limited or lost when seat belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened seat bolt can cause additional injuries, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive moncuvers. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child restraint systems.

Children on the front passenger seat

General Information

When using a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, observe the respective national and local regulations.

When using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, make sure that the front passenger airbag is deactivated.

Additional Information:

Automatic deactivation of front passenger air bag, refer to page 162.

Safety Information

Warning

If activated, the front passenger airbag can injure children seated in a child restraint systems when deployed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front passenger airbag is

Installing child restraint systems

General information

Pay attention to the specifications and the operating and safety information of the child restraint system manufacturer when selecting, installing, and using child restraint systems.

Safety information

Warning

The protective effect of child restraint systems and their fastening systems which have been damaged or exposed to an accident can be limited or lost. A child cannot be properly restrained in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and danger to life.

Do not use child restraint systems which have been damaged or exposed to an accident.

If attachment systems have been damaged or strained by an accident, have them checked and replaced by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat setting or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest till for all affected backrests and effectively adequate use. Make

On the front passenger seat

Deactivating the airbag

Warning

If activated, the front passenger airbag can injure children seated in a child restraint systems when deployed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front passenger airbag is deactivated and that the PASSENGER AIR-BAG OFF Indicator light is illuminated.

After mounting a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, make sure that the front passenger airbag is deactivated.

Additional information:

Automatic deactivation of front passenger air bag, refer to page 162.

Seat position and height

After installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go and, if possible, bring it up to the highest position. This seat position and height ensure the best possible position for the belt and offers optimal protection in the event of an accident.

After mounting a universal child restraint system, adjust the tilt of the seat backrest so that the belt is not constrained.

If the upper attachment point of the seat belt is located in front of the seat belt guide of the child seat, move the front passenger seat carefully forward until the best possible seat belt guide position is reached.

Backrest width

Adjustable backrest width: before installing a

Child seat security

To secure child restraint systems, the rear seat belts and front passenger seat belt can be locked to prevent them from being pulled out.

Locking the seat belt

1. Pull out the seat belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the seat belt.
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in and pull it tight against the child restraint system. The seat belt is locked.

Unlocking the seat belt

1. Unbuckle the seat belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the seat belt strap to be pulled in completely.

Lower anchors for child restraint systems

General information

LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children.

Pay attention to the specifications, operating fire and safety instructions from the child

CONTROLS

Transporting children safely

Mounts for lower anchors

General information

The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses.

Safety information

Warning

If the lower anchors on child restraint system are not engaged correctly, the child restraint system will not be able to provide suitable protection. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. Make sure that the lower anchors are correctly engaged and that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest.

Warning

The mounts for the lower anchors and attachment points of the child restraint system are intended for attaching child restraint systems only. If other objects are attached, the mounts or attachment points can be damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Only attach child restraint systems at the corresponding mounts for the lower anchors or attachment points.

Position

Icon Meaning

The corresponding icon shows the mounts for the lower ATC Lenders.

Seats equipped with lower anchors are marked with a pair (2) of LATCH icons.

For vehicles equipped with a middle seat:

It is not recommended to use the inner lower anchors of standard outer LATCH positions to secure a child restraint system on the middle seat. Use the vehicle seat belt instead for the middle seat.

Before installing child restraint systems

Before installing a child restraint system, pull the seat belt away from the area of the lower anchors of the child restraint system.

Installing child restraint systems

1. Mount child restraint system, see manufacturer's Information.
2. Make sure that the child restraint system mount is correctly engaged in the lower anchor on both sides.

Child restraint systems with tether strap

General information

Transporting children safely

CONTROLS

Safety information

Warning

If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used for the child restraint system, the protective effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. Ensure that the upper retaining strap is guided to the upper attachment point without twisting and not over sharp edges.

Warning

If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the protective effect of the child restraint system is limited or nonexistent. In certain situations, for instance braking maneuvers or in case of an accident, the rear seat backrest can fold forward. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. Make sure that the rear seat backrests are locked.

Warning

The mounts for the lower anchors and attachment points of the child restraint system are intended for attaching child restraint systems only. If other objects are attached, the mounts or attachment points can be damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Only attach child restraint systems at the corresponding mounts for the lower anchors or attachment points.

Attachment points for upper retaining strap

Icon Meaning

The respective icon shows the attachment point for the upper retaining strap. Seats with an upper top tether are marked with this icon. It is located on the rear seat backrest, the rear shelf or the rear seat.

Routing the retaining strap

1 Driving direction
2 Upper retaining strap
3 Head restraint
4 Rear shelf
5 Attachment point
6 Hook for upper retaining strap

Attaching the upper retaining strap to the attachment point

1. Open the attachment point cover.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap over the head restraint to the anchor.
3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the attachment point.

CONTROLS

Driving

Driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Start/Stop button

Principle

Pressing the Start/Stop button turns drive-ready state on/off.

Overview

Start/Stop button

Turning on the drive-ready state

Manual transmission: Drive-ready state turns on when the clutch pedal is pressed while pushing the Start/Stop button.

A. Electrons form monomolecular D-substrate

Additional information:

▶ Drive-ready state, refer to page 42.

▷ Standby state, refer to page 41.

Auto Start/Stop function

Principle

The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on. The engine starts automatically for driving off.

General information

The Auto Start/Stop function switches to standby whenever the engine is started using the Start/Stop button. The function is activated at low speeds.

Engine stop

Functional requirements

The engine is switched off automatically when stopping under the following conditions: Manual transmission:

▶ Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal is not pressed.

The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driver's door is closed.

M Steptronic Sport transmission:

The selector lever is in selector lever position D.

K. The broke panel remains denressed while

Driving

CONTROLS

M Steptronic Sport transmission: Manual engine stop

If the engine was not switched off automatically when the vehicle stopped, the engine can be switched off manually:

Depress the brake pedal forcefully again from the current pedal position.

▶ Engage selector lever position P. When all functional preconditions are fulfilled, the engine switches off.

Air conditioning system when the engine is switched off

The air flow from the air conditioning system is reduced when the engine is switched off.

Display in the instrument cluster

The display in the instrument cluster indicates that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready for an automatic engine start.

Indications on the control display

The total time for which the Auto Start/Stop function has switched off the engine is displayed in the trip data.

The total time is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled.

Functional limitations

The engine does not switch off automatically in situations like the following:

In case of a steep downhill grade.
▶ Brake pedal was not depressed hard enough.

▷ When the outside temperature is high and

When there is heavy window condensation and the air conditioning system is on.
▶ Engine or other components are not at operating temperature.
▶ Engine cooling is required.
▶ Vehicle battery is deeply discharged.
▶ At higher elevations.
The hood is unlocked.
▶ For stop-and-go traffic.
▶ After driving in reverse.
▶ Wheels are at a sharp angle or steering wheel is being turned.
▶ M Steptronic Sport transmission: selector lever position in S or R.
▶ Selector lever position is S or R.

Starting the engine

Functional requirements

The engine starts automatically under the following preconditions:

Manual transmission:

By pressing the clutch pedal.

M Steptronic Sport transmission:

By releasing the brake pedal.

▶ When Automatic Hold is activated; step on the accelerator pedal.

By the driver assistance systems activated, depending on vehicle equipment and driving situation.

Driving off

Accelerating as usual after starting the engine.

Safety mode

After the engine switches off automatically, it

CONTROLS

Driving

The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open.

▶ Hood was unlocked. Some indicator lights illuminate for a varied length of time.

The engine can only be started using the Start/Stop button.

System limits

Even if driving off was not intended, the deactivated engine starts up automatically in the following situations:

▶ Vehicle Interior is extremely hot when the cooling is on.

▶ Vehicle interior is extremely cold when the heating is on.

▶ When there is heavy window condensation and the air conditioning system is on.

▶ In case of a steering operation.

▶ M Steptronic Sport transmission:

When changing selector lever position from D or P.

▶ In case of seriously discharged vehicle battery.

▶ When starting on oil level measurement.

Deactivating the system manually

Principle

In certain driving situations, e.g., traffic jams, it may be helpful to deactivate Auto Start/Stop manually. The engine will then no longer switch off automatically.

If this function is deactivated while the engine is being stopped automatically, the engine will start.

Via button

Press the button.

▶ LED is illuminated: Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated.

▶ LED off: Auto Start/Stop function is enabled.

M Steptronic Sport transmission: via selector lever position

The Auto Start/Stop function is also disabled in selector lever position S.

Using the M1/M2 buttons on the steering wheel

The Auto Start/Stop function can be activated/deactivated using the M1 or M2 buttons on the steering wheel.

Additional information:

M Setup menu, refer to page 191.

Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop

If the engine stops automatically, the vehicle can be parked safely, for example to leave it.

Manual transmission:

1. Press the Start/Stop button.

▶ Drive-ready state is switched off.

Driving

CONTROLS

1. Press the Start/Stop button.

▶ Drive-ready state is switched off.
▶ Standby state is switched on.
▶ Selector lever position P is engaged automatically.

1. Set the parking brake.

Automatic deactivation

In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated automatically for safety reasons, for instance if no driver is detected.

Malfunction

The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches off the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. You may continue driving. Have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Manual transmission

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling away.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

▷ Set the parking brake.

▶ Automatic transmission: Make sure that selector lever position P is engaged.

1. Manual transmission: Make sure that

On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

NOTICE

When shifting to a lower gear, excessive RPM can damage the engine. There is a risk of property damage. When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the right.

Shift pattern

1–6: forward gears.
▷ R: reverse gear.

Shifting

Gear Shift Assistant

When the Gear Shift Assistant is activated, the rpm will be adjusted automatically during a shifting operation for a fast gear change.

The system is automatically active when the vehicle is turned on.

The Gear Shift Assistant can be deactivated/activated via the M Setup menu.

CONTROLS

Driving

Reverse gear

Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

To overcome the resistance push the gearshift lever dynamically to the left and engage reverse gear with a forward shifting movement.

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own drive, for instance in a car wash, or be pushed.

1. Turn on standby state.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out of a forward gear or reverse.
3. Release the parking brake.

M Steptronic Sport transmission

General information

The M Steptronic Sport transmission is operated via the selector lever or the two shift paddles on the steering wheel.

The following functions are available:

▶ Various shift modes: Drive mode D or Sequential mode S.
▶ Low Speed Assistant.
▶ Various Driveloglc programs.
▶ Launch Control.

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident, injury, and emergency damage. During landing

Overview

Selector lever

Selector lever functions

Icon Function

Drivelagic modes.

R Reverse gear.

N Neutral.

Center position, forward position.

- Downshifting, manual.

+ Upshifting, manual.

D/S Drive mode or sequential mode.

P Parking.

Selector lever positions

D is Drive mode

Selector lever position for driving. All gears for forward travel are activated automatically.

S is Sequential mode

Selector over porting for driving. All orders for

Driving

CONTROLS

R is reverse

Engage selector lever position R only when the vehicle is stationary.

N Neutral

In selector lever position N, the vehicle may be pushed or roll without power, for instance, in car washes.

P Park

Selector lever position, for instance for parking the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive wheels in selector lever position P.

Engage selector lever position P only when the vehicle is stationary.

Selector lever position P is engaged automatically in situations such as the following:

After the drive-ready state or standby state is switched off and selector lever position D/S or R is engaged.

After the standby state has been switched off when selector lever position N is engaged.

The driver's seat belt is unbuckled, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and the selector lever is set to D/S or R.

Engaging a selector lever position

General information

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear position or reverse gear, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to drive off.

The engaged selector lever position is displayed in the instrument cluster and on the selector lever.

Functional requirements

Only when the drive-ready state is switched on and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to change from selector lever position P to another selector lever position.

Engaging selector lever position D/S, N, R

With the driver's seat belt fastened, press on the broke pedal and pull or push the selector lever in the required direction. The selector lever automatically returns to the center position when released.

In selector lever position R, the selector lever locks.

Engaging selector lever position P

Press button P.

CONTROLS

Driving

Rolling or pushing the vehicle

General information

In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to roll without its own drive for a short distance, for instance in a car wash or to be pushed.

Engaging selector lever position N

NOTICE

Selector lever position P is automatically engaged when standby state is switched off. The wheels are blocked. There is a risk of property damage. Do not switch off standby if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g., in a car wash.

1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. If necessary, deactivate Automatic Hold, Automatic Hold, refer to page 123.
4. If necessary, loosen the belt.
5. If necessary, open the door.
6. Depress the broke pedal.
7. Engage selector lever position N.
8. Switch off drive-ready state.

In this way, standby state remains switched on, and a Check Control message is displayed.

The vehicle can roll.

Selector lever position P is engaged automatically after approximately 35 minutes.

If the system is not operational, you may not be able to change the selector lever position.

Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if

Kickdown

Kickdown is used to achieve maximum drive power in Drive mode.

Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position.

Drive mode D

Principle

In Drive mode, all forward gears are automatically changed.

Activating Drive mode

Push the selector lever out of the center position in the D/S direction.

Drive mode is activated. The engaged gear is shown on the instrument cluster along with a "D", e.g., D1.

Deactivating Drive mode

Push the selector lever out of Drive mode in the D/S direction. Sequential mode is activated.

The engaged gear is shown on the instrument cluster, e.g., D1.

Sequential mode S

Principle

Driving

CONTROLS

General Information

Shortly before falling below a gear-dependent minimum speed, the transmission is automatically downshifted.

Once the maximum engine speed is attained, upshifting is not automatically performed. In sequential mode and the kickdown is deactivated.

It is also possible to drive off in 2nd gear; for instance, on icy roads.

Activating sequential mode

Push the selector lever out of Drive mode in the D/S direction, arrow 1, or shift via the selector lever, arrows at 2.

Sequential mode is activated. The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, e.g., 1.

Deactivating sequential mode

Push the selector lever out of the center position in the D/S direction. Drive mode is activated.

The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster along with a D, e.g., 1D.

Gear change

Principle

The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to change gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel.

General Information

Shifting

Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds; for instance, downshifting is not possible if the engine speed is too high.

The lowest possible gear is selected by simultaneously operating the kickdown and moving the selector lever forward or actuating the left shift paddle.

Temporary sequential mode

After a shift paddle is actuated in Drive mode, the system temporarily switches to sequential mode.

After conservative driving in sequential mode without acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to Drive mode.

Permanent sequential mode

Sequential mode remains permanently active if it was active before the shift paddle was actuated.

Switching to Drive mode

It is possible to switch to Drive mode as follows: pull and hold the right shift paddle.

Switching via the selector lever

Upshifting: pull the selector lever rearwards.

Downshifting; press the selector lever forward.

A shift in Drive mode raises a switch to Se-

CONTROLS

Driving

Switching via the shift paddles

▶ Upshift: pull right shift paddle.

Downshift: pull left shift paddle.

Display on the selector lever

The actually engaged transmission position can deviate from the selector lever position in some situations. The display in the selector lever flashes.

Observe the display in the instrument cluster in these cases.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Drive mode

▶ Engaged gear together with a D, arrow 1.
▶ Selected Drivelogic program, arrow 2.

Sequential mode

▶ Gear shift indicator, arrow 1.
▶ Engaged gear, arrow 2.
▶ Selected Drivelogic program, arrow 3.

Notice

Low Speed Assistant

Principle

The Low Speed Assistant gives assistance at very low speeds. The vehicle moves at walking speed.

General Information

Use the Low Speed Assistant for maneuvering or in stop-and-go traffic.

The Low Speed Assistant can also be used for rocking the vehicle free in the snow. To do this, change over between reverse gear and forward gear without stepping on the brakes in the process.

Activating

1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on the brake pedal.

2. If necessary, release the parking brake.

3. If necessary, deactivate Automatic Hold.

4. Engage selector lever position D/S or R,

5. Release brake.

In 1st and 2nd gear and In reverse, the vehicle rolls at minimum speed.

Deactivating

Decelerate the vehicle to a stop.

Drivelogic

Principle

Drivelogic changes the gear-shifting characteristics of the M Steptronic Sport transmission. For example, the shifting points are changed in Drive mode and the shifting times in sequential mode.

Driving

CONTROLS

Whenever you switch between Sequential mode and Drive mode, the last Drivelogic program selected is enabled.

If drive-ready state is switched on after the vehicle has been idle, Drivelogic program D1 is enabled in Drive mode.

Drivelogic programs

Program

Drive mode Sequential mode

D1/S1

Efficient driving. Comfortable shifting operations.

D2/S2

Fast driving, Sporty, fast shifting operations.

D3/S3

Sporty driving, Maximum shifting speed, Launch Control.

Selecting a Drivelogic program

Via the rocker switch on the selector lever

Press the rocker switch repeatedly until the desired Drivelogic program is displayed on the instrument cluster.

Via IDrive

The desired Drivelogic program can be configured for buttons M1, M2, or M Setup.

1. Press the button.
2. "M1 CONFIGURATION" or "M2 CONFIGURATION"
3. "Drivelogic"
4. Select the desired Drivelogic mode.

The setting is immediately applied with active M1 or M2 configuration.

To activate the desired configuration with the selected settings, press the corresponding but tan on the steering wheel:

Additional Information:

M Setup menu, refer to page 191.

Display in the instrument cluster

The Drivelogic program selected corresponds to the number of illuminated fields.

Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock

General Information

Unlock the transmission lock electronically, e.g., to maneuver the vehicle out of a hazardous area in the event of a malfunction.

CONTROLS

Driving

Engaging selector lever position N

1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must audibly start. Press the Start/Stop button and hold.
3. With your free hand, press and hold the selector lever in selector lever position N, until selector lever position N is displayed in the instrument cluster.
   A Check Control message is displayed.
4. Release the Start/Stop button and selector lever.
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous area and secure it against rolling away.
   Additional information: Tow-starting/towling, refer to page 338.

Launch Control

Principle

In dry ambient conditions, Launch Control ensures optimal acceleration on roads with good traction by temporarily providing higher system power.

General information

The use of Launch Control causes premature component wear since this function represents a very heavy load for the vehicle.

Do not use Launch Control during the break-in.

Do not steer the steering wheel when driving off with Launch Control.

Additional information:

□rank in refer to page 700

operating temperature after an uninterrupted trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.

Display in the instrument cluster

▶ Arrows 1: function has been activated.
▶ Arrow 2: function is being used for maximum acceleration.

Starting with launch control

Manual transmission

1. Turn on drive-ready state.
2. Activate M Dynamic Mode.

M Dynamic Mode (MDM), refer to page 198.

1. Step on the clutch pedal.
2. Engage first gear
3. Press the accelerator pedal all the way down.

A destination flag is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Preparing Launch Control. An appropriate Check Control message is displayed.

Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.

1. The starting engine speed adjusts. With sufficiently high starting torque, the Launch Control is active.

Driving

CONTROLS

M Steptronic Sport transmission

1. Turn on drive-ready state.

2. Deactivate the Dynamic Stability Control. Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 196.

3. Without xDrive: select sequential mode with gear 2 and Drivelogic program S3. With xDrive: select sequential mode with gear 1 and Drivelogic program S3.

4. With your left foot, forcefully press down on the brake.

5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position, kickdown. Preparing Launch Control. An appropriate Check Control message is displayed. A destination flag is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.

1. The starting engine speed adjusts. With sufficiently high starting torque, the Launch Control is active. An appropriate Check Control message is displayed.

Now release the brake. The vehicle accelerates. Upshifting occurs automatically as long as the destination flag is displayed and the accelerator pedal is not released.

Repeated use during a trip

After Launch Control has been used, it is necessary to drive a certain distance before Launch Control can be used again. Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions, when used again.

After using Launch Control

System limits

Manual transmission; if drive-off is delayed, the Launch Control is automatically terminated to protect the engine.

The best acceleration figures are reached with sport tires at operating temperature.

An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.

Drive-off assistant

Principle

The drive-off assistant supports driving off on uphill grades.

Driving off

1. Hold the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal.

2. Release the brake pedal and drive off quickly.
   After the brake pedal is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
   Depending on the vehicle loading, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
   In order to prevent rolling back when driving off, use the parking brake.

3. (P) Pull and release switch before driving off.
   The parking brake is set.

4. Step on the accelerator pedal sufficiently to drive off. The parking brake is released automatically when you drive off.

Parking broke

CONTROLS

Driving

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling away.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

▷ Set the parking broke.

Automatic transmission: Make sure that selector lever position P is engaged.
▶ Manual transmission: Make sure that first gear is engaged on uphill gradients and reverse gear on downhill gradients.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for example, due to the following actions:

Establishing standby.

▶ Releasing the parking brake.

▶ Opening and closing the doors or windows.

▶ Engaging selector lever position N.

▶ Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Do not leave children on

Overview

Parking brake

Setting the parking brake

With a stationary vehicle

Pull the switch.

The LED illuminates.

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster illuminates red.

The parking broke is set.

While driving

Use while driving serves as an emergency braking function.

Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the switch is pulled.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds, and the brake lights illuminate.

A Check Control message is displayed.

The parking brake is engaged when the vehicle is stationary.

Driving

CONTROLS

Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 181.

Releasing the parking brake

Releasing the parking brake manually

1. Turn on drive-ready state.

1. Manual transmission, press the switch while the brake pedal is depressed.

M Steptronic Sport transmission: the switch while the brake is de- and or selector lever position P is set.

The LED and the indicator light go out. The parking brake is released.

Releasing the parking brake automatically

The parking brake is released automatically when you drive off.

The LED and the indicator light go out.

Malfunction

If the parking brake falls or malfunctions, secure the vehicle so that it does not roll away before you exit.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for instance with a wheel chock, after getting out of the vehicle.

After a power interruption

To reestablish parking brake operability after a power interruption, an initialization may be required.

1. Turn on standby state

This process may take a few seconds. Some mechanical sounds associated with this process are normal.

The indicator light is no longer illuminated as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation again.

M Steptronic Sport transmission: Automatic Hold

Principle

Automatic Hold provides assistance by automatically applying and releasing the brake, e.g., when driving off on inclines or in stop-and-go traffic.

The vehicle is automatically held in place when it is stationary.

General information

The parking brake is automatically engaged under the following conditions:
▶ If drive-ready state is turned off.
▶ If the driver's door is opened while the vehicle is stationary.
▶ If the parking brake is used to brake the vehicle to a stop while driving.

Safety information

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling away.

1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 99.

CONTROLS

Driving

▶ Manual transmission: Make sure that first gear is engaged on uphill gradients and reverse gear on downhill gradients.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Warning

Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for example, due to the following actions:

▶ Establishing standby.
▶ Releasing the parking broke.
▶ Opening and closing the doors or windows.
- Engaging selector lever position N. - Using vehicle equipment.

There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exiting and lack the vehicle.

NOTICE

If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold engages the parking brake and prevents the vehicle from rolling in a car wash. There is a risk of property damage. Deactivate Automatic Hold prior to entering the car wash.

Overview

Automatic Hold

Activating Automatic Hold

1. Turn on drive-ready state.

Press the button.

The LED Illuminates.

The indicator light illuminates green.

Automatic Hold is activated.

Automatic Hold holding the vehicle

If Automatic Hold is activated and the driver's door is closed, the vehicle is automatically secured to prevent it from rolling away after stopping.

As soon as Automatic Hold secures the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away,

illuminates green.

Automatic parking brake application

The parking brake is automatically set if driver-ready state is switched off while the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle

Driving

CONTROLS

The parking brake is not set automatically if the drive-ready state was switched off while the vehicle was coasting. Automatic Hold is temporarily deactivated in this case.

Driving off

Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.

The brake is released automatically and the indicator light of the parking brake is no longer illuminated.

The vehicle may roll back slightly when driving off, depending on the load.

Drive off quickly to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward when driving off.

If necessary, also apply the parking brake. The parking brake is released automatically when you drive off.

Additional Information:

Parking broke, refer to page 121.

Deactivate Automatic Hold

Press the button.

AUTO H The LED goes out.

The indicator light goes out.

Automatic Hold is deactivated.

If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold, also press the brake pedal when deactivating.

Drive system

Principle

The drive's response to movement of the accelerator pedal can be adjusted. The intensity of the drive requires changes depending on

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Programs

Program Response characteristics

"EFFICIENT" Efficient, comfortable.

"SPORT" Sporty, dynamic.

"SPORT PLUS Spontaneous, direct. Maxi- " mum dynamics.

When Sound Control is on, the SPORT and SPORT PLUS programs change the intensity of the drive acoustics.

Additional information:

Sound control, refer to page 126.

Selecting a program

Using the button

SETUP Press the button and select the desired program on the control display.

CONTROLS

Driving

Display in the instrument cluster

When the display for M Setup is activated in the instrument cluster, the selected program is displayed.

Additional information: Central display area, refer to page 141.

Sound control

Principle

The sound control function changes the sound characteristics of the exhaust system.

General information

When sound control is switched on, the sound of the exhaust system takes on a spotty nature.

When sound control is switched off, the sound is focused on comfort.

During the engine warm-up phase, sound control does not have any effect on the sound of the exhaust system.

Additional Information:

High-performance engine, refer to page 278.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Activate/deactivate the function

Using the button

Press button to activate or deactivate the sound control.

Depending on the equipment, a Check Control message is displayed when the Sound Control is turned on or an LED will illuminate in the button.

Via |Drive

The Sound Control settings can be configured In M Setup.

Additional information:

M Setup, refer to page 191.

Displays

CONTROLS

Displays

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Instrument cluster

Principle

The instrument cluster comprises various digital displays, e.g., a speedometer, time, range, temperature as well as indicator and warning lights.

General information

Some of the displays in the instrument cluster may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's Manual.

The view on the instrument cluster can vary depending on the selected driving mode. The driving mode is set using the M MODE button.

The following M MODE views are available:

"ROAD": standard view of the instrument cluster for comfort-oriented driving. All displays for driver assistance systems and collision warning systems are enabled.

"SPORT": M View to assist a sporty driving style. The displays for driver assistance systems and collision warning systems are reduced to a minimum.

M MODE, refer to page 193.

Safety information

Warning

If the driving information displays on the instrument cluster fail, e.g., the speedometer, do not use the vehicle. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Immediately pork the vehicle in a safe manner. Turning drive-ready state off and on again may correct the malfunction, allowing you to continue driving. If the malfunction cannot be corrected, have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Overview

Instrument cluster

Display ranges on the instrument cluster

The contents of the Instrument cluster are shown using the standard view as an example. This view is displayed in the following driving

CONTROLS

Displays

1 Speedometer

2 Driver assistance systems 204

Parking assistance systems 228

3 Digital speedometer 130

4 Shift lights 140

5 Driver Attention Camera 139

6 Manual transmission: transmission display 113

M Steplronic Sport transmission: gear dis-

play with Drivelogic 118

Gear shift indicator 139

7 Tachometer 139

8 Outside temperature 140

9 Engine oil temperature 140

10 Driving stability control systems 191

11 Central display range 141

Check Control 131

Selection lists 138

M Drift Analyzer 201

12 Speed Limit Info 204

Speed Limit Assistant 218

13 Fuel gouge 145

14 Range 145

15 Time 145

Additional Information:

Operating elements on the steering wheel

Operating element	Function
	Display the menu bar on the instrument cluster.
	Press the corresponding arrow key to move the selection.
	Turn knurled wheel: scroll selection up or down.Press knurled wheel: confirm selection.

Settings

Specific displays can be configured Individu-

ally, e.g., a second actual speed.

Apps menu

1. "Vehicle"

2. "Displays"

3. "Instrument cluster"

4. Select the desired setting.

Live Vehicle

Principle

Live Vehicle is a virtual representation of your

vehicle with different information, e.g., vehicle status or current driving condition.

General information

Corresponding Information is shown on the

control display depending on the driving situation

Displays

CONTROLS

Adaptive content

The following content is displayed in alternating order and, if necessary, depending on the selected drive mode;

Vehicle status, refer to page 146.
Current driving condition, refer to page 146.
Sport displays, refer to page 147.
Trip data, refer to page 142.

Static information

The following information may be shown permanently on the control display regardless of the driving situation and driving mode set.

Vehicle status.
Trip data.

Adjusting the display

In the Live Vehicle menu, adoptive content or various static content for the display can be selected on the left-hand side bar;

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Live Vehicle"
4. Select the desired setting.

BMW Head-up display

Principle

The Head-up display projects important information, e.g., speed, onto the windshield in the driver's field of view. Information can be recorded without you having to look away from the road.

The steering wheel buttons can be used to configure various views for the Head-up dis-

General information

The views on the Head-up display adjust automatically depending on the selected driving mode.
Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up display in the Vehicle Care chapter.
Additional information:
Caring for special components, refer to page 345.

Overview

Head-up display views are projected onto the windshield through a protective glass. The protective glass is located between the steering wheel and windshield.

Displayable information

The following information is displayed on the Head-up display depending on the driving mode selected:

Vehicle speed.
▶ Navigation Instructions.
Check Control messages.
Shift lights.
▷ Tachometer.
Selector lever display.
Lists and messages.

CONTROLS

Displays

Configuring a view

The views for the Head-up display can be set independently of the display on the instrument cluster, e.g., a reduced view.

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

A menu bar is displayed in the instrument cluster.

1. "HEAD-UP"

Select the menu using the arrow buttons on the steering wheel where applicable.

1. Select the desired setting using the knurled wheel on the steering wheel.

Turning the Head-up display on/off

1.ips menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Head-up display"

Settings

Various settings can be configured for the Head-up display, e.g., height, brightness, or rotation. In addition, individual displays in the Head-up display can be set up separately such as for Driver Assistance.

1. https menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. Select the desired setting.

Setting the view

Additional settings can be applied depending on the driving mode selected and the Head-up display configuration.

1."MENU"
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. Select the desired setting.

Visibility of the display

The visibility of the displays in the Head-up display is influenced by the following factors: ▶ Seat position.
▶ Objects on the Head-up display's protective glass.
▶ Dust or dirt on the Head-up display's protective glass.
▷Windshield dirty on inside or outside.

Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
▷ Wet road.
▶ Unfavorable light conditions.

If the image is distorted, have the basic settings checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Special windshield

The windshield is part of the system.
The shape and coating of the special wind-shield enable the system to function.
If damaged, have the special windshield replaced by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Displays

CONTROLS

Check Control

Principle

The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the monitored systems.

A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator lights or warning lights and text messages on the instrument cluster and, if applicable, on the Head-up display. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a text message may appear on the control display.

Some Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds, but they will be stored. Stored Check Control messages can be displayed on the control display. Urgent Check Control messages are permanently displayed but may be hidden temporarily.

Hiding Check Control messages

Permanently displayed Check Control messages can be hidden temporarily. These messages are automatically displayed again after approx. 8 seconds.

< An arrow icon next to the Check Control message indicates whether the Check Control message can be hidden.

To hide Check Control messages, press the left arrow button on the steering wheel.

Displaying stored Check Control messages

Additional information such as the cause of a fault or the required action can be called up via Check Control.

1. "Vehicle status"
2. "Check Control"
3. Select the desired text message.

Display

A Check Control message is displayed in the instrument cluster as a text message with an icon.

For urgent messages, on added text is automatically displayed on the control display. If several faults occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively.

Certain messages displayed while driving are displayed again after drive-ready state is switched off.

Icons in the instrument cluster indicate an active or saved Check Control message.

Indicator lights and warning lights

Principle

The indicator lights and the warning lights on the instrument cluster show the status of some functions in the vehicle. The indicator lights and warning lights indicate faults in monitored systems.

C 112

CONTROLS

Displays

Several of the lights are checked for proper functioning and illuminate temporarily when drive-ready state is turned on.

Red lights

Seat belt reminder

Seat bell on the driver's seat is not buckled. Additional information:

Seat belt reminder, refer to page 99.

Airbag system

Warning light illuminates briefly: indicates that the entire airbag system and seat belt tensioners are operational

when drive-ready state is switched on.

Warning light does not illuminate or illuminates continuously; the airbag system or the seat belt tensioners may not be operational. Have the vehicle checked immediately by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Additional information:

Airbags, refer to page 160.

Parking brake

The parking brake is set. Additional information: Parking brake, refer to page 121.

Brake system

The broke pods are worn or there is another issue with the broke system. The braking assistance may not be operational. A higher model force may be

Emergency Stop Assistant

The Emergency Stop Assistant is triggered. Additional information:

Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 181.

Pedestrian Warning

Warning light illuminates: risk of collision with a person, e.g., a pedestrian or a cyclist. Increased awareness is re

Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk of imminent collision with a person, e.g., a pedestrian or a cyclist. Immediately initiate braking or an evasive maneuver.

Additional information:

Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation, refer to page 169.

Forward Collision Warning

Warning light illuminates: risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle, is detected. Increased awareness is required.

Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk of imminent collision with a vehicle detected. Immediately initiate braking or an evasive maneuver.

Additional Information:

Forward Collision Warning with braking function, refer to page 160.

Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle detected from the right

Warning light illuminates: risk of collision with vehicle crossing from the right detected, increased guidance in

Displays

CONTROLS

detected. Immediately initiate braking or an evasive maneuver.

Additional information:

Intersection Collision Warning with city braking function, refer to page 170.

Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle detected from the left

Warning light illuminates: risk of collision with vehicle crossing from the left detected. Increased awareness is re-

quired.

Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk of imminent collision with a crossing vehicle detected. Immediately initiate braking or an evasive maneuver.

Additional information:

Intersection Collision Warning with city braking function, refer to page 170.

Intersection Collision Warning: vehicle from undetectable direction of travel

Warning light illuminates: risk of collision with vehicle from unrecognizable direction of travel detected. Increased ness is required.

Waming light flashes and a signal sounds: risk of imminent collision with a vehicle detected. Immediately initiate braking or an evasive maneuver.

Additional information:

Intersection Collision Warning with city braking function, refer to page 170.

Active Cruise Control with Distance Control

Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, refer to page 211.

Steering Assistant

Depending on national-market version: The warning light flashes or illuminates. A signal sounds:

The system is switched off.

Additional Information:

Steering Assistant, refer to page 220.

Steering Assistant: hands not on steering wheel

Warning light illuminates and acoustic signal sounds:

Hands are not grasping the steering

wheel. System interruption is imminent.

The system reduces the speed to a standstill if applicable.

It is possible that the system will not execute any supporting steering movements.

Grab the steering wheel with your hands. Additional Information:

Steering Assistant, refer to page 220.

Yellow lights

Antilock Braking System

The system may not be operational. The Antilock Broking System is not available.

The ability to steer may be restricted during full braking.

Have the vehicle checked immediately by an authorized service center or another qualified

CONTROLS

Displays

Steering Assistant

Warning light illuminates and acoustic signal may sound: A system interruption is imminent.

Warning light flashes: Lane boundary has been crossed,

Additional information:

Steering Assistant, refer to page 220.

Steering Assistant: hands not on steering wheel

Hands are not grasping the steering wheel. The system is still active.

Grab the steering wheel with your

hands.

Additional information:

Steering Assistant, refer to page 220.

Dynamic Stability Control

Warning light flashes; Dynamic Stability Control is regulating the driving and brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.

Reduce the vehicle speed and adjust your driving style to the road conditions.

Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability Control has malfunctioned or is initializing. Driving stabilization is restricted or has failed. If the warning light illuminates continuously, have the vehicle checked immediately by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Additional information:

Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 196.

Dynamic Stability Control deactivated

- Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 196.

▶ M Dynamic Mode, refer to page 198.

Flat tire monitor

Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or tire pressure loss has been detected.

Require your speed and stop cou-

tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.

Additional information;

Flat tire monitor, refer to page 307.

Tire Pressure Monitor

Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or tire pressure loss has been detected.

Follow the information in the Check

Control message.

Warning light flashes then illuminates continuously: Flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot be detected.

Fault caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again.

In the case of tires with special approval: the tire pressure monitor was unable to complete the reset. Reset the system again.

▶ Wheel without wheel electronics installed: Have it checked by on authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed.

▶ Malfunction: have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Additional information

Displays

CONTROLS

Steering system

The steering system may not be operational.

Have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Pollutant emissions

The warning light illuminates:

The exhaust gas quality is declining, e.g., because the fuel filler cap is fitted incorrectly.

The warning light flashes under certain circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the vehicle checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period con seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter.

Have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Additional information:

Diagnostic socket, refer to page 330.

M xDrive

MxDrive is malfunctioning.

Have the vehicle checked immediately by an authorized service center or an-

other qualified service center or repair shop.

Additional information:

M xDrive, refer to page 199.

M Traction Control, refer to page 200.

Green lights

Turn signal

Turn signal is on.

Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light indicates that a turn signal bulb

has failed.

Additional information:

Turn signal, refer to page 149.

Parking lights

Parking lights are switched on.

Additional information:

Parking lights, low-beam headlights,

refer to page 152.

Low-beam headlights

Low-beam headlights are switched on.

Additional information:

Parking lights, low-beam headlights,

refer to page 152.

High Beam Assistant

Low-beam headlights are switched on

and the High Beam Assistant is acti-

vated.

High-beam headlights are switched on and off automatically depending on the traffic situation.

Additional information:

High Beam Assistant, refer to page 149.

CONTROLS

Displays

The indicator light illuminates: the system is switched on. At least one lone boundary has been detected on one side of the vehicle. The system is ready to intervene and issue warnings. The system can perform steering interventions.

Indicator light flashes: the system is performing a steering intervention.

Additional information:

Lane Departure Warning, refer to page 172.

Automatic Hold is activated

After stopping, Automatic Hold automatically secures the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.

Additional information:

Automatic Hold, refer to page 123.

Automatic Hold holding the vehicle

Automatic Hold secures the stopped vehicle to prevent it from rolling away, e.g., when stopped at a traffic light.

Additional information:

Automatic Hold, refer to page 123.

Manual Speed Limiter

The indicator light illuminates: the system is switched on.

The indicator light flashes: the set limit has been exceeded.

Additional Information:

Manual Speed Limiter, refer to page 206.

Cruise Control

The custom is native

Active Cruise Control with Distance Control

Indicator light illuminates: Vehicle has been detected ahead of you. The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle has been ahead of you.

Indicator light flashes: Preceding vehicle has driven off.

Additional Information:

Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, refer to page 21.

Speed Limit Assistant activated

Depending on vehicle equipment, the indicator light illuminates green, together with the icon for a speed control. Speed Limit Assistant is active and speed limits can be applied manually displayed system.

Additional Information:

Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 218.

Speed Limit Assistant: Apply speed limit

The detected speed limit can be applied with the SET button. As soon as the speed limit has been applied, a checkmark is displayed.

Additional information:

Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 218.

Steering Assistant

The system is activated and helps to keep the vehicle in the lane.

Additional information:

Displays

CONTROLS

Lane Change Assistant: lane change in progress

Arrow icon for lane change green; the system carries out a lane change.

Additional information:

Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 226.

Lane Change Assistant: lane change not possible

Gray line for lane boundary on the appropriate side: system detected a lane change request. Lane change not curvossible.

Additional Information:

Lone Change Assistant, refer to page 226.

Lane Change Assistant: functional requirements not met

Depending on the national-market version:

Arrow icon for lane change gray: lane change not possible; functional requirements not met.

Additional Information:

Lane Change Assistant, refer to page 226.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus

The system is active.

Additional information;

Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to page 224.

Blue lights

▶ High-beam headlights, refer to page 149.
▶ High Beam Assistant, refer to page 149.

High Beam Assistant

High-beam headlights are switched on

via the High Beam Assistant.

Additional information:

High Beam Assistant, refer to page 149.

Gray lights

Seat belt reminder

Seat belt on the passenger seat or an-

other seat in the vehicle is not buckled.

Additional information:

Seat belts, refer to page 98.

Manual Speed Limiter

The system is interrupted.

Additional information:

Manual Speed Limiter, refer to

page 206.

Cruise Control

The system is interrupted.

Additional information:

Cruise Control, refer to page 200.

Active Cruise Control with Distance Control

Indicator light is illuminated: the system

is interrupted.

Indicator light flashes: Conditions are

111 1 1 1 111 1.

CONTROLS

Displays

Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, refer to page 211.

Steering Assistant

The system is an standby and does not manipulate steering movements.

System activates automatically as soon function conditions are fulfilled.

Additional information:

Steering Assistant, refer to page 220.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus

The system is interrupted and will activate automatically as soon as all functional requirements are met.

Additional information:

Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to page 224.

White lights

Cruise Control with Distance Control

No Distance Control because accelerator pedal is being pressed.

Additional information:

Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, refer to page 211.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus

The system can be activated.

Additional information:

Assisted Driving Mode Plus, refer to

page 224.

M Traction Control

Digital tachometer

General information

The digital speedometer is permanently displayed in all driving modes. The speed currently driven is displayed.

Adjusting the unit

Depending on the national-market version, it may be possible to set the unit for the digital tachometer.

1. Apps menu

2. "All opps"

3. 'System settings'

4. "Units"

5. "Distance"

6. Select the desired setting.

Selection lists

Principle

Selection lists, e.g., entertainment sources, are shown on the Head-up display or on the instrument cluster, depending on vehicle equipment and settings. Lists can be displayed and used for certain functions as necessary:

▶ Entertainment source.

Current audio source.

List of most recent telephone calls.

If necessary, the corresponding menu will open on the control display.

Displaying and using the list

The selection lists can be displayed and op-

adapted using the operating elements on the

Displays

CONTROLS

Operating elements

Function

Turn the knurled wheel: display the entertainment list or scroll up or down in the list. Press knurled wheel: confirm selection.

Press the corresponding arrow key to change the entertainment source.

Show list of most recent telephone calls.

Gear shift indicator

Principle

The shift point indicator recommends the gear that best suits the current driving situation. Using the optimal gear supports an efficient driving style.

General Information

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version, the gear shift indicator is active in sequential mode of the M Steptronic Sport transmission and with manual transmission.

Display

Icon Description

Shift up to the most fuel efficient gear.

yellow prewarming field and a red warming field. The permissible speed increases as the engine oil temperature increases.

Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect the engine.

Display

The tochometer display changes depending on the selected driving mode.

Reduced rotational speed range

The available rotational speed range may be reduced due certain factors such as a cold drive system. The tachometer display is automatically adjusted depending on the available rotational speed range.

Standby state and drive-ready state

OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster. Drive-ready state is turned off and standby state turned on.

READY is displayed in the Instrument cluster. The Auto Start/Stop function is ready for automatic engine start.

Additional Information:

Operating state of the vehicle, refer to page 40.

▶ Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 110.

Tachometer

CONTROLS

Displays

Engine oil temperature

▶ Cold engine: the bar display is in the blue temperature range.

Drive at moderate RPM and vehicle speeds.

▶ Normal operating temperature: the bar display is in the middle of the temperature display.
▶ Hot engine: the bar display is in the upper temperature range. In addition, a Check Control message is displayed.

Additional Information:

Coolant level, refer to page 326.

Display

▶ Cold engine: the bar display is in the blue temperature range.

Drive at moderate RPM and vehicle speeds.

▶ Normal operating temperature: the bar display is in the middle of the temperature display.
▶ Hot engine: the bar display is in the upper temperature range. In addition, a Check Control message is displayed.

Additional information:

Coolant level, refer to page 326.

Indicator light in the instrument cluster

A red indicator light is displayed.

Outside temperature

General information

If the indicator drops to +37°F/+3°C or lower, a signal sounds.

A Check Control message is displayed.

There is an increased risk of ice on roads.

When the vehicle is stationary or at low speed, the temperature displayed may differ slightly from the actual outside temperature due to external environmental influences.

Safety information

Warning

Even at temperatures above +3/°/-/+3°C there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on bridges or shady sections of the road. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Modify your driving style to the weather conditions at low temperatures.

Shift lights

Principle

Shift lights indicate the suitable upshift point at which optimal acceleration can be achieved.

General information

Successive fields illuminating yellow indicate the upcoming shift point.

Shift when all fields illuminate red at the latest. When the maximum rotational speed is reached, the entire display flashes and the fuel supply is interrupted in order to protect the en-

Displays

CONTROLS

Functional requirement

If the vehicle is equipped with an M Steptronic Sport transmission, sequential mode must be selected to display the shift lights.

Shift lights in the instrument cluster

The Shift lights are shown on the instrument cluster in the following situations:

The Head-up display is deactivated or the following drive mode is activated: "ROAD".

Shift lights in the Head-up display

The shift lights, arrow 1, are displayed above the tachometer, arrow 2.

The shift lights are shown on the Head-up display in the following driving modes:

"SPORT"

▷ Depending on vehicle equipment: "TRACK"

Central display range

Displayable content

The following settings are available depending on the driving mode selected:

▶ Reduced display.

Trip data, refer to page 142.
▶ Assisted View, refer to page 143.
Navigation system route preview.
▶ Navigation system map view.
▶ M Setup, refer to page 191.

Information on the systems configured using the SETUP button.

▶ Engine data.

Information on the coolant temperature and boost pressure of the turbocharger can be displayed.

▶ Tire data.

Information on wheels and tires can be displayed.

▶ Sport displays, refer to page 147.
▷ G-Meter, refer to page 144.
Entertainment

Android Auto©

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version, select functions of a compatible smartphone can also be displayed, e.g., map views.

Some contents for the control display range can also be configured as a view in the Head-up display.

Additional information:

Head-up display, refer to page 129.

Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication refer to page 6

CONTROLS

Displays

Configuring the central display range

The content of the central display range on the Instrument cluster can be configured individually, for instance the trip data display.

Press the button on the steering

。

A menu bar is displayed in the instrument cluster.

1. "CONTENT"

Select the menu using the arrow buttons on the steering wheel where applicable.

1. Select the desired setting using the knurled wheel on the steering wheel.

Trip data

Principle

The trip data display provides various information about the trip, e.g., average consumption or trip distance.

General information

The trip data can be displayed on the control display and in the instrument cluster.

Depending on the setting in the Live Vehicle menu, the trip data is shown on the control display.

The values can be displayed and reset depending on different intervals.

Display on the control display

General information

- Travel time depending on the configured interval.

Distance traveled depending on the configured interval.

Displaying trip data continuously

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. Ulva Vehicle ¹

4. "Vehicle status"

Display in the instrument cluster

Information on consumption and distance covered can be displayed in the instrument cluster.

Current consumption, arrow 1.

▷ Average consumption, arrow 2.

- Distance traveled depending on the configured interval, arrow 3.

▷ Total mileage, arrow 4.

Current consumption

The current fuel consumption display allows you to check the current fuel consumption, e.g., to drive economically and in an environmentally-friendly manner.

Average consumption

Displays

CONTROLS

Adjusting the display of the trip data

The intervals for the display of the trip data in the instrument cluster and on the control display are adjustable.

Using the button on the left steering column switch:

1. Press the button.

The trip data is displayed.

1. Press button repeatedly until the desired setting is displayed.

Via iDrive:

1. 4ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Time period for trip data"
5. "Values"
6. Select the desired setting;

"Since start of trip": the values are automatically reset approx. four hours after the vehicle has come to a standstill.
"Since last refuel": the values are automatically reset after refueling with a larger quantity of fuel.
"Since factory": the values since the time of the factory delivery are displayed.
× "Since Individual" the values since the

Resetting average values manually

The following interval can be reset manually at any time:

"Since Individual ( )"

Using the button on the left steering column switch:

1. Press the button.

The trip data is displayed.

1. Press and hold the button until the values are reset.

Via iDrive:

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Time period for trip date"
5. "Reset Individual"
   The average values and counters are reset. Once the average values and counters have been reset, the following interval is automatically activated:
   "Since Individual ( )"

Assisted View

Principle

In Table 3. A calculated (U) formula: Information given by

CONTROLS

Displays

"ROAD"

If the parking assistance system is on, parking and maneuvering information is shown in Assisted View for all driving modes.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. In assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

General

You can configure how Assisted View is displayed on the central display range.

Additional information:

Central display area, refer to page 141.

Temporary display

With the temporary display, Assisted View is always shown when driver assistance systems are active, regardless of how the central display range is configured.

1. ■■ Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Displays"

4. "Instrument cluster"

5. "Assisted Driving info will appear in front of other content"

Display

An example with active Driver Assistance: the indicator and warning lights for the Distance Control and the Lane Change Assistant indicate a lane change to the next lane. At the same time, the lane change to the next lane is shown with animation in the Assisted View.

System limits

The system's detection capability is limited.

Only objects that are detected by the system are taken into account.

The system may indicate something wrong.

Additional Information:

▷ Cameras, refer to page 35.

▶ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.

G-Meter

General information

The C-Meter indicates the forces that are applied in longitudinal and transverse direction on the vehicle occupants while driving.

The display can be configured on the central display range of the instrument cluster.

The values are automatically reset whenever you start a new drive.

Displays

CONTROLS

Manually resetting G-Meter values

1. Display the G-Meter on the instrument cluster.

2. Press and hold the knurled wheel on the steering wheel until the values are reset.

Date and time

Various settings can be applied for the date and time display such as the date format. Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version, the time zone can be set or automatic time zone enabled. With automatic time setting, the time, date and, if necessary, the time zone are updated automatically.

1. 📄ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. Select the desired settings.

Fuel gauge

Principle

The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed.

General information

Vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary.

Additional Information:

Refueling, refer to page 288.

Display

An arrow beside the fuel pump icon shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler flop is on.

Indicator light in the instrument cluster

The yellow indicator light illuminates, once the fuel reserve is reached.

Range

Principle

The range indicates the distance that can still be covered with the current tank of fuel.

General information

The estimated range with remaining fuel is permanently displayed on the instrument cluster.

With a low remaining range, a Check Control message is briefly displayed. A low remaining range means that engine functions cannot always be ensured for sparty driving, e.g., when cornering at speed.

The Check Control message appears continuously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the

CONTROLS

Displays

Display

The current range is displayed as a numerical value next to the fuel gouge.

Setting the units of measurement

Depending on the national-market version, you can set the units of measurement for some values, for instance consumption, distances, and temperature.

1. ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Units"
5. Select the desired setting.

Vehicle status

General information

The status can be displayed and actions performed for several systems such as for Check Control.

Displaying vehicle status

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"

Overview

Icon Description

(1) "FLATTIRE MONITOR": Status of the flat tire monitor, refer to page 307.
(1) "Tire Pressure Monitor": status of the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 302.
"Engine oil level": electronic oil measurement, refer to page 324.
⚠ "Check Control": displaying stored Check Control messages, refer to page 131.
"Service": display of the service notifications, refer to page 147.

Current driving condition

General information

The current driving condition is displayed dynamically while driving in the Live Vehicle menu on the control display.
The following states can be displayed:
▶ Driving.
▶ Battery is charging.

Functional requirements

The following driving mode is selected: "ROAD"
The following setting is selected for Live Vehicle: "Vehicle status"

Displays

CONTROLS

Display

An example:

The vehicle battery is charged when the vehicle decelerates.

Sport displays

Principle

The Sport displays especially support a sporty driving style.

Functional requirements

▶ One of the following driving modes is selected:

"SPORT"

Depending on vehicle equipment: "TRACK".

The following setting is selected for Live Vehicle:"Adoptive content"

Indicators on control display

The sport displays are displayed in the Live Vehicle menu on the control display.

The following information is displayed:

▷ Torque.

Power.

Display in the instrument cluster

Sport displays can be shown in the central display area of the instrument cluster. Sport displays include information on power and torque. Additional information:

Central display area, refer to page 141.

Service

Principle

The service notifications indicate recommended maintenance work.

General information

After turning on drive-ready state, the instrument cluster briefly displays the next service appointment or the distance remaining until the next recommended maintenance measures.

These can be read out from the vehicle key at an authorized service center.

Display

More information may be displayed on the control display.

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Vehicle status"

4. "Service"

Maintenance measures as well as legally mandated inspections are displayed.

1. Select the desired entry.

Entering appointment dates

Dates for mandatory vehicle inspections con

CONTROLS

Displays

Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.

1. ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Service"
5. "Vehicle Inspection"
6. "Date:"
7. Select the desired setting.

Light and view

CONTROLS

Light and view

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Turn signal

Turn signal in exterior mirror

When driving and during operation of the turn signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in the exterior mirrors so that the turn signal lumps on the exterior mirror are easy to see.

Flashing

Press the lever past the resistance point.

One-touch signaling

Lightly top the lever up or down:

The one-touch signaling duration can be adjusted.

1. If necessary, "Additional settings"
2. "One-touch turn signal"
3. Select the desired setting.

Brief flashing

Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flesh.

High-beam headlights, headlight flasher

Press the lever forward or pull it backward.

High-beam headlights on, arrow 1.
The high-beam headlights illuminate when the low-beam headlights are switched on.
High-beam headlights off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the high-beam headlights are turned on.

High Room Assistant

CONTROLS

Light and view

high-beam headlights on or off depending on the traffic situation.

General information

The High Beam Assistant ensures that the high-beam headlights are switched on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the low speed range, the high-beam headlights are not switched on by the system.

The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cities.

The high-beam headlights can be switched on and off manually at any time.

Functional requirements

▶ Automatic headlight control is activated.

▶ Low-beam headlights are switched on.

Activating High Beam Assistant

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

The indicator light in the instrument

cluster is illuminated when the low-

beam headlights are switched on.

The headlights are automatically changed between low-beam headlights and high-beam headlights.

Interruption of the journey with activated High Beam Assistant: the High Beam Assistant remains activated when continuing the journey.

The High Beam Assistant is deactivated when manually switching the high-beam headlights on and off.

To reactivate the High Beam Assistant, press the button on the turn signal lever.

Deactivating High Beam Assistant

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Sensitivity of the High Beam Assistant

General information

The sensitivity of the High Beam Assistant can be adjusted.

Safety information

Warning

If adjustments have been made or the sensitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. If adjustments have been made and the sensitivity has been modified, make sure that oncoming traffic is not temporarily blinded

Light and view

CONTROLS

Functional requirements

Setting at standstill only.
Drive-ready state is switched on.
Light is turned off.

Increasing sensitivity

Push the turn signal lever to the front for approximately 10 seconds.

A Check Control message is displayed. The system responds more sensitively.

Resetting the sensitivity

Push the turn signal lever to the front again for approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-ready state.
The sensitivity of the High Beam Assistant is reset to the factory settings.

System limits

The High Beam Assistant cannot replace the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high-beam headlights. When appropriate, dim the high beams manually.

The system may not be fully operational in the following situations, and driver intervention may be necessary:

In very unfavorable weather conditions such as fog or heavy precipitation.
When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; or at animal crossings.
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on highways.
In poorly-It towns and cities or in the presence of highly reflective signs.

Exterior lighting

Overview

Buttons in the vehicle

Icon Function

OFF

Exterior lighting off, Daytime driving lights.

DO

Parking lights.

AUTO

Automatic headlight control. Adoptive lighting functions.

3D

Low-beam headlights.

[NO TEXT]

Instrument lighting.

P

Right roadside parking light.

≥p

Left roadside parking light.

CONTROLS

Light and view

Buttons on the vehicle key

Icon Function

Interior lighting.

Parts of the exterior lighting.

Pathway lighting.

Driving lights automatic

Principle

The low-beam headlights are switched on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness, for example in tunnels, in twilight or if there is precipitation.

General information

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be turned on.

If the low-beam headlights are switched on manually, the automatic headlight control is deactivated.

Activate automatic headlight control

Press the button on the light switch.

The LED in the button illuminates.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the low-beam headlights are switched on,

System limits

The automatic headlight control cannot re-

Parking lights, low-beam headlights and roadside parking lights

General information

If the driver's door is opened when the driver-ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off after a period of time.

Parking lights

General information

The parking lights can only be turned on at low speeds.

Turning on parking lights

200

Press the button on the light switch.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates.

The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.

Do not use the parking lights for extended periods; otherwise, they might drain the vehicle battery and it would then be impossible to switch on drive-ready state.

Turning off parking lights

The following options are available to turn off the parking lights:

Press the button on the light switch.

▷ Turn on drive-ready state.

After the drive-ready state is switched on,

Low-beam headlights

Turning on low-beam headlights

Press the button on the light switch.

The low-beam headlights illuminate when drive-ready state is switched on.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates.

Press the button again to switch on the low-beam headlights when the standby state is switched on.

Turning off low-beam headlights

Depending on the national-market version, the low-beam headlights can be turned off in the low speed range:

Press the button on the light switch.

Roadside parking lights

When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road-side parking light can be switched on.

Button Function

Right roadside parking light on.

Left roadside parking light off.

Switching off the roadside parking light:

Press the button on the light switch or turn on drive-ready state.

Welcome lights

Principle

The welcome light turns on automatically for a limited period of time when approaching or unlocking the vehicle.

General information

Depending on the equipment, the exterior lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.

Activating/deactivating welcome light

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. Depending on the equipment, select the following setting:

"Welcome and goodbye" When unlocking the vehicle, individual lighting functions are turned on.

"BMW Iconic Glow"

The radiator grille lighting can only be adjusted when the vehicle is stationary and the drive-ready state is switched off.

Turning on the welcome light

▶ Automatically an approach.

During unlocking.

Press the button on the vehicle key with the vehicle locked. Depending on the settings, the interior

CONTROLS

Light and view

Pathway lighting

Principle

For the pathway lighting, the exterior lighting turns on for a certain period of time after leaving the vehicle in order to illuminate the area surrounding the vehicle.

Switching pathway lighting on

▶ After switching off the drive-ready state, briefly push the turn signal lever forward.

◀

Press and hold the button on the vehicle key for approx. 1 second.

Setting the duration

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Select the desired setting.

Daytime driving lights

General information

The daytime driving lights illuminate when drive-ready state is switched on.

Activating/deactivating daytime driving lights

in some countries, daytime driving lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to deactivate the daytime driving lights in front.

1. If necessary, "Additional settings"

2. Depending on vehicle equipment or national-market version:

▶ "Daytime driving lights"
▶ "Rear daytime driving lights"

Adaptive lighting functions

Principle

Adaptive lighting functions enable dynamic illumination of the road.

General information

The adoptive lighting functions may consist of one system or multiple systems, depending on the equipment version:

▷ Cornering light.

Activating the adaptive lighting functions

Press the button on the light switch.

AUTO

The LED in the button illuminates.

The adoptive lighting functions are active when the drive-ready state is switched on.

Cornering light

Principle

In tight curves, for instance on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional cornering light is switched on that illuminates the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed.

Light and view

CONTROLS

When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may be automatically switched on regardless of the steering-wheel angle.

Adaptive headlight range control

The adoptive headlight range control feature balances out acceleration and braking as well as the vehicle load conditions in order to avoid blinding oncoming traffic.

Laser tail light

Principle

The LED rear light includes a decorative laser component.

General Information

The laser rear light is integrated into the tail light and emits from there.

Depending on the national-market version, additional information can be found on the laser sign in the tail light.

Safety information

Laser class 1.

Instrument lighting

Functional requirement

The brightness can only be adjusted in darkness and with turned on parking lights or low-beam headlights.

Setting the brightness

Adjust the brightness with the knuried wheel.

Interior lighting

General information

Depending on the equipment version, interior lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically controlled.

Overview

CONTROLS

Light and view

Turning interior lights on/off

Press the button.

To switch off permanently: press the button and hold for approx. 3 seconds.

The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle can be switched on and off independently. The button is located in the rear headliner.

Turning reading lights on/off

Press the button.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the reading lights are located next to the Interior lights in the front and rear.

Ambient light

General information

Depending on the equipment version, lighting can be adjusted for some lights in the car's interior.

Activating/deactivating ambient light

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Ambient lighting"

Turning ambient light on/off

The ambient light is switched on when the vehicle is unlocked, and switched off when the

Selecting the color

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. 'Interior lighting'
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Color"
6. Select the desired setting.

Setting the brightness

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Brightness"
6. Select the desired setting.

Dynamic light

Individual actions, for example incoming calls or opened doors, are indicated by light effects. If the ambient light is disabled, the light effects are still displayed.

1. eps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. 'Interior lighting'
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Dynamic light"
6. Select the desired setting.

Reduced for night drive

Some lights of the interior lighting are reduced when the vehicle is driven in the dark.

1. 4ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. 'Interior Ilahtina'

Light and view

CONTROLS

Window wiper system

Safety information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded-away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

The wiper blades can wear out or become damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry window for a longer period of time. The wiper motor can overheat. There is a risk of property damage. Do not use the wipers when the window is dry.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of properly damage. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Turning on window wiper system

Press the lever up until the desired position is reached.

▷ Rest position of the wipers, position 0.

Rain sensor mode, position 1.

▶ Normal wiper speed, position 2.

Fast wiper speed, position 3.

When the journey is interrupted with the window wiper system turned on; when the journey continues, the wipers resume at their previous speed.

Turning off the window wiper sys- tem and flick wipe

Press the lever down.

Turning off: press the lever down until it reaches the 0 position.

▶ Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0 position.

The lever automatically returns to its 0 position when released.

Rain sensor

Principle

The rain sensor automatically controls the wiper operation depending on the intensity of the rainfall.

CONTROLS

Light and view

Safety Information

NOTICE

If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in car washes. There is a risk of property damage. Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes.

Activating rain sensor

Press lever up once from the 0 position, arrow 1.

Wiping operation is started.

The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.

In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not start.

Deactivating rain sensor

Press lever back into the 0 position.

Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity

▶ Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.

▶ Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.

Window washer system

Safety information

Warning

The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and abstract the view. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Only use the window washer system when the washer fluid will not freeze. Use antifreeze if needed.

NOTICE

When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the washer pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of property damage. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty.

Cleaning the windshield

Pull the lever.

The washer fluid is sprayed onto the wind-shield directly in front of the wiper blade when the wiper moves upward.

Light and view

CONTROLS

Fold-out position of the wipers

Principle

In the fold-out position, the wipers can be folded out from the windshield, which is important, for instance, when changing the wiper blades or for folding away under frosty conditions.

Safety Information

Warning

If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded-away state and the wipers are folded in when switching on.

NOTICE

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper motor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of property damage. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on.

Folding out the wipers

1. Turn on standby state.
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down until the wipers stop in a nearly vertical position.

1. Fold the wipers all the way out from the windshield.

Folding in the wipers

1. Fold the wipers back in onto the windshield.
2. Switch on standby state and press and hold the wiper lever down again.
   Wipers return to their rest position and are ready again for operation.

CONTROLS

Safety

Safety

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle. Additional information: Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Airbags

1 Front airbag, driver

2 Front airbag, front passenger

3 Head olrbog

Front airbag

The front airbag helps protect the driver and front passenger in the event of a frontal impact. In which the seat belts alone would not provide

4 Side airbag

5 Knee airbag

Side airbag

In the event of a side collision, the side airbag protects the side of the body in the chest and pelvic realms.

Safety

CONTROLS

the side of the bodies of the occupants in the outer rear seats.

Head airbag

In the event of a side collision, the head airbag protects the head.

Ejection Mitigation

The head airbag system is designed as an ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants through side windows during rollovers or side collision events.

Knee airbag

The oval ability of the knee airbag depends on the national-market version.

The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of a frontal impact.

Protective effect

General information

Airbags are not deployed in every impact situation, e.g., in less severe accidents.

Information on optimum protective effect of the airbags

Warning

If the seat position is incorrect, the seat bolts are fastened incorrectly or the deployment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag system cannot provide protection as intended and may cause additional injuries due to deployment. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. Follow the information on achieving the optimum protective effect of the

Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is deployed.

Adjust seat and steering wheel so that hands can be crossed over the steering wheel. Select the settings so that when reaching over the steering wheel the shoulders rest against the backrest and the upper body is as far away as possible from the steering wheel.

Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., with their feet and legs in the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.

- Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag.

There should be no additional persons, animals or objects between an airbag and a person.

Dashboard and windshield on the passenger's side must stay clear - do not attach adhesive film or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables, for instance for navigation devices or mobile phones.

Do not bond the airbag cover panels with adhesive, do not cover them or modify them in any way.

Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the passenger's side as a storage area.

- Keep storage compartments near the air bags closed, e.g., glove compartment or center armrest.

Do not place slip covers, seat cushions, or other objects on the front seats unless they are specifically designed for seats with integrated airbags.

Do not hang pieces of clothing such as inlets over the backrests

CONTROLS

Safety

Do not attach any objects to the steering wheel, e.g., mobile phone holders or trim elements.

Do not disassemble the airbag system. Even when you follow all instructions very closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.

The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.

Vehicle modifications for a person with disabilities may affect the airbag system; contact BMW Customer Relations for further information.

Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors.

Operational readiness of the airbag system

Safety information

Warning

Individual components can be hot after deployment of the airbag system. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch individual components.

Warning

Improperly executed work can lead to failure, malfunction or unintentional deployment of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the airbag system might not deploy as intended despite the accident severity. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. Have the airbag system checked, repaired, disassembled, and scrapped by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or

Display in the instrument cluster

When drive-ready state is turned on, the warning light in the instrument cluster illuminates briefly, thereby indi

closer trifminutes of city, thereby indicating the operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the seat belt tensioners.

Malfunction

▶ Warning light does not illuminate when drive-ready state is turned on.

The warning light illuminates continuously.

The airbag system or the seat bell tensioners may not be operational. Have the vehicle checked immediately by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Setting the front seat positions

The power that deploys the driver's/front passenger airbags depends on the position of the driver's/front passenger seat.

To maintain the accuracy of this function, calibrate the electrical front seats as soon as a respective message appears on the control display.

Additional Information:

Seats, refer to page 94.

Automatic deactivation of front passenger airbag

Principle

The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's

Safety

CONTROLS

General information

Before transporting a child on the front passenger seat, refer to the safety information and instructions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children.

Safety information

Warning

To ensure the front passenger airbag function, the system must be able to detect whether a person is sitting in the front passenger seat. The entire seat surface must be used for this purpose. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the foot-well.

Functional requirements

To enable accurate recognition of the occupied seat surface:

Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically determined to be safe for use on the front passenger seat.
Do not place objects under the seat that can press against the seat from below.
Do not place any electronic devices on the front passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it.
No moisture in or on the seat.

Indicator light, front passenger air-bog

The front passenger airbag indicator light in the headliner indicates the operating state of the front passenger airbao.

After drive-ready state is switched on, the light illuminates briefly and then indicates whether the airbag is activated or deactivated.

The indicator light does not illuminate when, for instance, a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbag on the front passenger's side is activated.

Fault of the automatic deactivation system

For adolescents and adults, the front passenger airbag may deactivate in certain seat positions. In this case, the indicator light for the front passenger airbag illuminates in the headliner.

In this case, change the seat position so that the front passenger airbag activates and the Indicator light goes out.

If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person slit in the rear seat.

Detected child restraint systems

The system generally detects children seated in a child restraint system, particularly in child restraint systems required by NHTSA at the point in time when the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child restraint system, make sure that the indicator light for the front passenger airbag illuminates. This indicates that the child restraint system has been detected and the front passenger airbag is not

CONTROLS

Safety

Collision warning systems

General information

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle has different systems that can help prevent the risk of imminent collision.

▶ Forward Collision Mitigation with brake intervention, refer to page 165.
▶ Lane Departure Warning, refer to page 172.
Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to page 176.
▶ Side Collision Protection, refer to page 178.
▶ Rear-End Collision Preparation, refer to page 180.
Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 181.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. In assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue

rounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Sensors

Depending on vehicle equipment, the intelligent Safety systems are controlled by the following sensors:

▶ Camera behind the windshield.

▶ Front radar sensor.

▶ Radar sensors, side, front.

▶ Radar sensors, side, rear.

Additional Information:

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.

Turning on/turning off collision warning systems

Depending on national-market version, some of the systems are automatically activated whenever you start driving.

The following functions are adjustable.

M MODE: The warning time setting cannot be changed in SPORT driving mode or, depending on vehicle equipment, in TRACK driving mode.

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. Select the desired settings.

M MODE: the various driving modes affect the availability of the collision warning systems. Some collision warning systems are deactivated depending on the driving mode selected. Additional information:

Safety

CONTROLS

Resetting the settings

The settings of the collision warning systems can be reset to the default settings of vehicle outbound delivery.

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. 'Driving settings'
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Reset to recommended settings"

System limits

Safety information

Warning

Because of system limitations, this system may either not respond, or respond too late, Incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.

Detection capability

The system's detection capability is limited.

The system only takes into account objects that are located in the detection range of the installed sensors and are detected by the system.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.

Thus, a system response might not come or might come late.

Forward Collision Mitigation with brake intervention

Principle

The Forward Collision Mitigation can help prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be avoided, the system can help reduce the severity of the accident.

The system can issue a warning of a possible risk of collision and activate the brakes independently, if needed.

General information

Depending on the equipment version, the Forward Collision Mitigation system includes the following functions:

Forward Collision Warning with braking function, refer to page 168.
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation, refer to page 169.
▶ Intersection Collision Warning with city braking function, refer to page 170.
▶ Evasion Assistant, refer to page 171.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

CONTROLS

Safety

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or responses, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Sensors

Depending on the equipment, the system is controlled by the following sensors:

▶ Camera behind the windshield.

▷ Front radar sensor.

▶ Radar sensors, side, front.

Additional information:

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.

Speed range

The system issues a warning of a possible risk of collision at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.

Depending on vehicle equipment, the system is temporarily deactivated at the following speeds:

City brake function: At speeds above approx. 50 mph/80 km/h

With radar sensor: At speeds above approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.

Some functions are deactivated earlier.

The system is enabled as soon as the speed drops below these values again.

Turning the Forward Collision Mitigation on/off

Turning on the system automatically Depending on the national-market version, the system is automatically active after every departure.

Turning on system manually

The system is activated by setting the warning time.

Additional Information:

Setting the warning time, refer to page 166.

Turning system off manually

Depending on national-market version, the adjustment can only be made when the vehicle is at a standstill or in a very low speed range.

If necessary, the switch-off must be confirmed successively on the control display.

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"

7. 'Off'

Setting the warning time

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"

Safety

CONTROLS

The system checks for visual impairments. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver Attention Camera in the Instrument cluster captures the driver's field of vision. Visibility and field of vision also affect the timing of the warnings.

Display in the instrument cluster

The following Indicator lights and warning lights are shown on the instrument cluster and, depending on vehicle equipment, on the Head-up display:

Icon Meaning

	Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a pedestrian.
(DY42)	Risk of collision, for instance with a preceding vehicle.
(57WH)	Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle crossing from the right.
(HCSZ)	Risk of collision, e.g., with a vehicle crossing from the left.
(3A27)	Risk of collision with a vehicle from an unrecognizable direction of travel.

The corresponding indicator lights and warning lights may display differently if the system detects multiple objects.

Warning function

The Forward Collision Mitigation warns on different warning levels, depending on the respective hazardous situation.

In the event of a prewarning, a warning light illuminates red. In the event of an acute warn-

▶ Red warning light illuminates:
A hazardous situation has been detected. Increased awareness is required.
▶ Red warning light flashes:
There is a risk of collision. Intervene immediately.

A warning signal sounds;
There is a risk of collision. Intervene immediately.

▶ Automatic brake intervention:

Depending on the equipment and situation in case of risk of imminent collision, the system can also intervene with an automatic brake intervention and automatically decelerate the vehicle, if necessary, to a complete stop.

When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and hard, the maximum brake power of the vehicle is used.

Automatic brake intervention

In case of a risk of collision, the system can assist with an automatic brake intervention, if necessary.

When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop.

Manual transmission: during a brake intervention up to a complete stop, the engine may be shut down.

During automatic brake intervention, Dynamic Stability Control activates automatically.

A broke intervention can be canceled by depressing the accelerator pedal with sufficient force, releasing the broke pedal, or by actively steering.

Depending on vehicle equipment, a broke intervention is performed up to the following

CONTROLS

Safety

At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, only a brief broke intervention will occur.

System limits

Safety Information

Warning

Because of system limitations, this system may either not respond, or respond too late, Incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.

Detection capability

The system's detection capability is limited.

The system only takes into account objects that are located in the detection range of the installed sensors and are detected by the system.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.

Thus, a system response might not come or might come late.

System limits of the sensors

Additional information:

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.

Functional limitations

The system may be limited in the following situations:

▷ In light curves.

1. With limitation of the driving stability control

Also, do not use Forward Collision Mitigation when lowing.

Forward Collision Warning with braking function

Principle

The Forward Collision Warning with braking function is a warning function that notifies the driver of a possible risk of collision and brakes automatically as necessary.

In the event of an accident, the system helps by reducing impact speed.

General information

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their detection range.

The system issues a warning of a possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings may vary with the current driving situation.

The system considers the driver's vehicle handling when responding. If an active driving style is detected, warnings and broke interventions occur less frequently.

Safety information

Safety

CONTROLS

Display in the instrument cluster

If there is a risk of collision with a detected vehicle, a warning light is displayed.

Icon Meaning

Forward Collision Warning with a detected vehicle.

Warning function

The warning prompts the driver to intervene.

Additional information:

Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 165.

System limits

General Information

Follow the system limits in the "Forward Collision Mitigation" chapter.

Detection range

The following situations may not be detected, or only detected with a delay, for instance:

Vehicle driving slowly in front and being approached at high speed.
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.

Upper speed limit

Depending on vehicle equipment, the system is temporarily deactivated at the following speeds:

City brake function: At speeds above approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.
With radar sensor: At speeds above approx.

Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation

Principle

The Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation is a warning function that notifies the driver of a possible risk of collision with pedestrians and cyclists and brakes automatically as necessary. The system issues warnings for speeds that are common in towns and cities,

In the event of an accident, the system helps by reducing import speed.

General information

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their detection range.

The system issues a warning of a possible risk of collision with pedestrians or cyclists at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.

Safety information

Follow the safety information in Chapter "Forward Collision Mitigation".

Display in the instrument cluster

If there is a risk of collision with a detected pedestrian or cyclist, a warning light is displayed.

CONTROLS

Safety

Warning function

The warning prompts the driver to intervene.

Additional information:

Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 165.

System limits

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-

sion Mitigation ^® chapter.

Detection range

The detection range in front of the vehicle is divided into two areas:

▶ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle.

▶ Extended area, arrows 2, to the right and left of the central area.

There is a risk of collision if persons, e.g., pedestrians or cyclists, are located within the central area. A warning is issued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area.

The following situations may not be detected, for instance:

▶ Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.

is Perceptions that are not detected as such

Upper speed limit

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the system responds to pedestrians and cyclists when your vehicle speed is less than approx. 50 mph/30 km/h.

Intersection Collision Warning with city braking function

Principle

The Intersection Collision Warning with city broking function is a warning function that helps prevent accidents with cross traffic at intersections and junctions. At speeds that are common in towns and cities, the system warns the driver of a possible risk of collision and brakes automatically if necessary.

In the event of an accident, the system helps by reducing impact speed.

General information

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their detection range.

Vehicles crossing your driving direction can be detected by the system as soon as these vehicles enter into detection range of the sensors.

At intersections and junctions, a warning is issued when a delay of collision with exercise was

Safety

CONTROLS

The timing of warnings may vary with the current driving situation.

Safety information

Follow the safety Information In Chapter "Forward Collision Mitigation".

Display in the instrument cluster

If there is a risk of collision with a detected vehicle, a warning light is displayed.

Icon Meaning

Risk of collision with vehicle crossing from the right.

Risk of collision with vehicle crossing from the left.

Risk of collision with vehicle for which the driving direction cannot be determined.

Warning function

The warning prompts the driver to intervene,

Additional Information:

Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 165.

System limits

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Forward Collision Mitigation" chapter.

Detection range

The following situations may not be detected, for instance:

Crossing vehicles when they are hidden, e.g. by buildings

Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.

▶ Crossing two-wheeled vehicles,

Upper speed limit

The system responds to crossing vehicles when the vehicle speed is below approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.

Evasion Assistant

Principle

The Evasion Assistant can help the driver perform evasive maneuvers in certain situations, e.g., when obstacles or pedestrians appear suddenly.

General information

The system issues a warning and intervenes to support the driver if a lateral evasive maneuver is possible.

Sensors monitor and detect the clearance around the vehicle.

If the system detects sufficient free space alongside the vehicle, it helps the driver perform an evasive maneuver safely.

Safety information

CONTROLS

Safety

Functional requirements

▶ Forward Collision Mitigation is active.
▶ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around vehicle.

Speed range

The Erosion Assistant helps the driver when the vehicle speed is between approx. 19 mph/30 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h.

Display in the instrument cluster If there is a risk of collision with a detected vehicle or detected person, e.g., a pedestrian, a warning light is displayed.

Icon Meaning

Warning when a vehicle is detected.

Risk of collision with a pedestrian.

Warning function with evasion support

If the vehicle approaches another object at a high differential speed, a warning is displayed if there is an immediate risk of collision. Intervene in case of a warning.

The system is designed to provide assistance during evasive maneuvers when there is a risk of collision.

System limits

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Forward Collision Mitigation" chapter.

▶ Vehicle driving slowly in front and being approached at high speed.
▶ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.

Vehicles with unusual rear designs.
▶ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.
▶ Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of their contour or posture.
▶ Pedestrians who are too small for the sensors to detect.

Lane Departure Warning

Principle

The Lane Departure Warning alerts when the vehicle is about to run off the road or exit the lane.

General information

Sensors detect the traffic situation in their detection range.

The system issues a warning starting at a minimum speed. The minimum speed is country-specific and displayed on the control display. Various warning functions from this system help the driver keep their vehicle in their lane.

Safety

CONTROLS

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing road and traffic situations. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in response to a warning.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or responses, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Functional requirement

The camera must detect the lane boundary for the Lane Departure Warning to be active. The areas of the sensors must be clean and clear.

Sensors

The system is controlled by a camera behind the windshield.

Turning the Lane Departure Warning on/off

Turning on system manually

The system is activated by setting the warning

time,

Additional Information:

Setting the warning time, refer to page 173.

Turning system off manually

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version, you must successively confirm the switch-off on the control display.

1. 4ps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Lane Departure Warning"

7. "Off"

Setting Lane Departure Warning

Setting the warning time

1. 4ps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane Departure Warning"
7. Select the desired setting.

"Early"
"Medium"
"Reduced"

Some warnings are suppressed de-

pending on the situation, for instance

when purposely driving over lane mark-

inae in fumae or with dynamic viscosity

CONTROLS

Safety

Setting the Intensity of the steering wheel vibration

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Vibration Intensity"
7. Select the desired setting.
   The setting is applied to all collision warning systems.

Depending on the national-market version: turning steering intervention on/off

1.ips menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lone Departure Warning"
7. "Steering intervention"

Depending on the national-market version, the steering intervention is automatically active after every driving off.

Display in the instrument cluster

Different system statuses are displayed on the instrument cluster, depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version.

Icon Meaning

Indicator light illuminates green: System is switched on. At least one lane boundary has been detected on one side of the vehicle. The system is ready to intervene and issue warnings. The system can perform steering interventions.

Indicator light: flashes green; System is performing a steering intervention.

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version, information for the system is displayed in the Assisted View of the Instrument cluster.

Additional Information:

Assisted View, refer to page 143.

Warning function

General information

Different warnings are issued by the Lane Departure Warning system, depending on situation and speed:

Indicator lights and warning lights on the instrument cluster.
▶ Vibration of steering wheel.
▶ Steering intervention.
▷ Warning tone.

Steering wheel vibration

If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates in accordance with the steering wheel vibration setting.

When the turn signal is switched on in the cor-

Safety

CONTROLS

Steering intervention

Depending on the equipment and the national-market version: if a lane boundary is crossed in the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the system intervenes with a brief active steering intervention in addition to vibrating. The system supports the driver in keeping the vehicle within the lane. The steering intervention can be noticed on the steering wheel and can be manually overridden at any time.

During an active steering intervention, a light is displayed on the instrument cluster.

For instance, the steering intervention will be suppressed in the following situations:

▶ With hard accelerating or broking.
▷ When flashing.
▶ With hazard warning system switched on.

In driving situation with high driving dynamics.
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates driving stability.
▶ Immediately following a steering intervention by the vehicle systems.
When actively merging back to your own lane after passing.

End of warning

For instance, the warning or an active steering intervention will be canceled in the following situations:

▶ Automatically after a few seconds.
▶ When returning to your own lane.
▶ With hard accelerating or braking.
▶ With hazard warning system switched on.
▷ When flashing.

While Dynamic Stability Control regulates driving stability

▶ With manual steering intervention.
▶ When another driver assistance system is activated, if applicable.
▶ No lane boundaries detected.
▷ When the system limits are reached.

Warning signal

A warning tone sounds if the driver does not actively steer after the Lone Departure Warning system has performed multiple active steering interventions within three minutes.

A short warning tone will sound after the second steering intervention.
▶ A longer warning tone will sound following the third steering intervention.
In addition, a Check Control message is displayed.
The warning tone and Check Control message advise the driver to pay closer attention to their lane.
The longer warning tone is stopped if the driver takes control of the steering.

System limits

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Collision warning systems" chapter.

Functional limitations

The system may be limited in the following situations:
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, merging, diverging, or multiple lone boundaries such as in construction areas.
▶ With lane boundaries that are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water.

CONTROLS

Safety

▶ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.
▶ Up to 10 seconds after turning on driver-ready state using the Start/Stop button.
▶ While Dynamic Stability Control is restricted or disabled.

A Check Control message may be displayed when the system is limited. A yellow warning light also illuminates, depending on national-market version.

Active Blind Spot Detection

Principle

Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles in the blind spot or vehicles approaching from behind in the adjacent lane.

The warning light in the exterior mirror gives warnings at different levels.

General information

Radar sensors monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a minimum speed.

The minimum speed is country-specific and displayed in the Active Blind Spot Detection menu.

The system indicates whether there are vehi-

Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal, the system issues a warning in the situations described above. The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vibrates.

When turning at a speed of up to approx. 12 mph/20 km/h, the steering wheel will not vibrate.

Safety information

Follow the safety information in the "Forward Collision Mitigation" chapter.

Sensors

The system is controlled by the following sensors:

▶ Camera behind the windshield.

▶ Radar sensors, side, rear.

Functional requirement

The areas of the sensors must be clean and clear.

Turning Active Blind Spot Detection on/off

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"

7. Select the desired setting.

Adjusting the Active Blind Spot Detection

Safety

CONTROLS

1. "Driver Assistance"
2. "Safety and warnings"
3. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
4. Select the desired setting.

Setting the intensity of the steering wheel vibration

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Vibration Intensity"
7. Select the desired setting.

The setting is applied to all collision warning systems.

Depending on the national-market version: turning steering intervention on/off

1. 4ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
7. "Steering intervention"

Display in the instrument cluster

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version, Information for the system is displayed in the Assisted View of the instrument cluster.

Additional information:

Assisted View, refer to page 143.

Warning function

Warning light in exterior mirror

The warning light in the exterior mirror warns of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.

Prewarning

The dimmed warning light in the exterior mirror indicates when vehicles are in your blind spot or approaching from the rear.

Acute warning

When an acute warning occurs, the steering wheel vibrates briefly. The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes brightly.
An acute warning is issued if the following conditions are met:
▶ Another vehicle is located in the critical area.

Your own vehicle is approaching the other lane.
▷ Depending on the system setting when the turn signal is turned on.
The warning stops when the other vehicle has left the critical area or the turn signal has been turned off.

Steering intervention

CONTROLS

Safety

steering Intervention. The steering Intervention helps return the vehicle into the lane. The steering Intervention can be noticed on the steering wheel and can be manually overridden at any time.

The steering intervention is carried out from a minimum speed. The minimum speed is displayed on the control display.

Warning light flashing

When the vehicle is unlocked, the warning light in the exterior mirror flashes for self-testing purposes.

System limits

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Collision warning systems" chapter.

Upper speed limit

If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.

155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated temporarily.

If the vehicle speed falls below approx.

155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reactivated.

Displaying warnings

The number of warnings shown depends on how the settings are configured. However, there may also be an excess of unwarranted warnings of critical situations.

Functional limitations

The system may be limited in the following situations:

▶ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own.

Depending on the national-market version, the steering intervention e.g. in the following situations:

In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, merging, diverging, or multiple lane boundaries such as in construction areas.

With lane boundaries that are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water.

▶ With lane boundaries that are not white.

▶ With lane boundaries that are covered by objects.

- When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.

▶ If the camera is impaired.

▶ Up to 10 seconds after turning on drive-ready state using the Start/Stop button.

A Check Control message may be displayed when the system is limited. A yellow warning light also illuminates, depending on national-market version.

Side Collision Protection

Principle

The Side Collision Protection helps to avoid an impending side collision.

General information

Safety

CONTROLS

The minimum speed is country-specific and displayed on the control display.

If, for example, another vehicle is detected next to your vehicle and there is a risk of collision with this vehicle, the system helps avoid a collision. For this purpose, the system issues a warning with a flashing LED in the exterior mirror, a Check Control message and a vibrating steering wheel. If necessary, an active steering intervention is performed by the system.

Safety information

Follow the safety information in the "Forward Collision Mitigation" chapter.

Functional requirement

The camera behind the windshield determines the lane boundary positions.

The camera must detect the lane boundaries for the Side Collision Protection with steering Intervention to be active.

Sensors

The system is controlled by the following sensors:

Comero behind the windshield.
Radar sensors, side, front.
Radar sensors, side, rear.

Turning the Side Collision Protection on/off

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Side Collisions Protection"

Setting the intensity of the steering wheel vibration

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. 'Feedback via steering wheel'
6. "Vibration intensity"
7. Select the desired setting.
   The setting is applied to all collision warning

systems.

Display in the instrument cluster

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version, information for the system is displayed in the Assisted View of the instrument cluster.

Additional Information:

Assisted View, refer to page 143.

Warning function

Warning light in exterior mirror

The warning light in the exterior mirror warns of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.

Acute warning

CONTROLS

Safety

Steering Intervention

Depending on the national-market version, if necessary, the system engages the active steering intervention to prevent a collision and maintain the vehicle within its own lane. The steering intervention can be noticed on the steering wheel and can be manually overridden at any time.

System limits

General Information

Follow the system limits in the "Collision warning systems" chapter.

Functional limitations

The system may be limited in the following situations:

▶ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own.
▶ In tight corners or on narrow roads.
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, merging, diverging, or multiple lane boundaries such as in construction areas.

With lane boundaries that are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water.
▶ With lane boundaries that are not white.
▶ With lane boundaries that are covered by objects.
▶ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.
▶ Up to 10 seconds after turning on driver-ready state using the Start/Stop button.

A Check Control message may be displayed when the system is limited.

Rear-End Collision Preparation

Principle

Depending on the equipment and national-market version, the Rear-End Collision Preparation can react to vehicles approaching from behind.

General information

Radar sensors monitor the area behind the vehicle.
When a vehicle approaches from the rear of a certain speed, the system can react as follows:
▶ If necessary, the hazard warning system will turn on.

Where applicable, the PreCrash functions are triggered.

Safety information

Follow the safety information in the "Forward Collision Mitigation" chapter.

Sensors

The system is controlled by the rodor sensors on the sides and rear.

Safety

CONTROLS

System limits

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Collision warning systems" chapter.

Functional limitations

This function may be restricted if the speed of the approaching vehicle is much higher or similar to your own speed.

Emergency Stop Assistant

Principle

If the driver can no longer drive the vehicle safely, the Emergency Stop Assistant helps to bring the vehicle to a safe standstill.

General information

The Emergency Stop Assistant is not triggered automatically. The system can only be triggered manually by the occupants.

When the system is triggered, the vehicle is brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of lane keeping.

Depending on the vehicle equipment and national-market version, the system includes a lone change function.

With lane change function: on motorways or motorway-like roads, the system steers the vehicle to the side of the road or shoulder where possible. On other roads or with high traffic volume, the vehicle is brought to a standstill in the current lane.

Overview

Porking broke

Functional requirements

The Emergency Stop Assistant can be triggered at speeds of approx. 6 mph/10 km/h up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.
▶ With lane change function: lane changes are executed when the traffic situation allows.

Triggering the Emergency Stop Assistant

Briefly pull the parking broke switch to trigger the Emergency Stop Assistant.

• With lane change function: releasing the switch may trigger an automatic lane change.

  The system will take control of the vehicle for a maximum of 2 minutes.
  The hazard warning system is switched on.
  An emergency call is triggered when stationary, depending on vehicle equipment.
  The Head-up display may turn off while an emergency call is ongoing.

CONTROLS

Safety

Canceling Emergency Stop Assistant

The driver can cancel the Emergency Stop Assistant by actively taking control of driving the vehicle throughout the entire process.

The system is stopped by the following actions, for example:

By pressing the accelerator pedal.
By operating the turn signal.

By turning off the hazard warning system,
By steering.
▶ By changing the selector lever position when stopped.
By stopping the emergency call.
▷ By pressing the parking broke switch.

At standstill

As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the system will carry out the following settings:

The vehicle is secured against rolling away.
The interior lights are switched on.
The central locking system is unlocked.

Display in the instrument cluster

Icon Status

Emergency Stop Assistant is triggered.

Without lane change function:

Icon Status

When lane boundaries are detected, the system keeps the vehicle in the lane.

Icon Status

Lone boundary driven over. When lane boundaries are detected, the system keeps the vehicle in the lane.

The hands are not grasping the steering wheel. The system is still active.

Warning light illuminates red and acoustic signal sounds: Hands not grasping steering wheel. Interruption of lone keeping is imminent.

Warning light illuminates red and acoustic signal sounds; lane keeping is switched off.

System limits

Use the system only in the event of a driver failure.
The system cannot replace the roadworthy driving performance of a driver.

Cross Traffic Warning

Principle

At blind driveway exits or when driving out of perpendicular parking spaces, road users approaching from the side are detected sooner by the cross traffic warning than is possible from the driver's seat.

Safety

CONTROLS

General information

The area behind the vehicle is monitored by sensors.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area around the vehicle. In front of the vehicle is monitored as well.

The system indicates approaching road users.

Follow the information in the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Sensors

The system is controlled by the following sensors:

Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic Warning

The system must be activated on the control display for the Cross Traffic Warning to switch on automatically.

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Porking and maneuvering"

6. Depending on the equipment, select the following setting:

▶ "Rear warning"

▶ "Front and rear warning"

Turning on the cross traffic warning automatically

The system must be activated on the control display. The system turns on automatically as soon as Park Distance Control or a camera view activates and you engage a gear position. If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is switched on.

Depending on the equipment, the front system is turned on when a gear position is engaged.

Depending on the national-market version, the system is automatically active when the vehicle is started.

Turning off the cross traffic warning automatically

The system is automatically turned off in the following situations:

When the speed exceeds walking speed.

▷ When a certain distance covered is ex-reerterd

CONTROLS

Safety

Warning function

General information

The control display shows the corresponding view, on acoustic signal may sound as necessary, and the warning light in the exterior mirror flashes.

Visual warning

Warning light in exterior mirror

The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes if the rear sensors detect other vehicles when the vehicle is reversing.

Display in the Park Distance Control view

In the Park Distance Control view, the respective boundary area flosses red if vehicles are detected by the sensors.

Depending on vehicle equipment: display in camera image

Depending on the direction of travel, the view to the front or back is displayed in the camera image.

The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the camera image flashes red if vehicles are detected by the sensors.

Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your own vehicle.

Acoustic warning

In addition to the visual warning, a signal tone sounds if your own vehicle moves into the respective direction.

Depending on the national-market version, the signal tone will already sound when the gear position is engaged.

System limits

System limits of the sensors

Additional information:

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.

Functional limitations

The function can be limited, for instance in the following situations:

Safety

CONTROLS

BMW Drive Recorder

Principle

The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video recordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to document surrounding traffic.

Vehicle features and options

This system may not be available in the owned vehicle, e.g. due to the selected optional equipment, the national-market version or the option for later enabling and software updates. This also applies to individual functions of the system.

For Information on whether a function is currently available in the vehicle or when the function can be installed in the vehicle, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

General information

Video recordings can be saved in different ways:

▶ Automatic storage of the recording.
The function makes it possible to document the accident with the correspondingly set recording type.
The function makes it possible to document the accident or theft of the vehicle with the corresponding recording type set.

▶ Manual storage of the recording.

This function is used to document traffic situations with the configured recording type.

The assistance systems' cameras are used to record. c.a.. Panorama View.

▶ Vehicle speed.
▶ Global Positioning System coordinates.

Data protection

The permissibility of recording and using video recordings is contingent upon the statutory regulations of the country in which the system is to be used. The user is responsible for the use of the system and compliance with respective applicable regulations.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends confirming there are no statutory or regulatory constraints on use of the system in your state or country prior to the initial use. In addition, the laws with respect to use of the system should be verified in regular intervals, especially when borders are frequently crossed.

Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed about the system. In addition, information about the system is required when handling off the vehicle.

Functional requirements

▶ Standby state or drive-ready state is switched on.
▶ BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
▶ Privacy Policy was accepted.
▶ Recording type was selected.
▶ Recording time was selected.
Theft notification:
The theft notification was activated in the Data Protection menu or in the Drive Recorder menu.
▶ Data transfer is activated.
My BMW App is installed on the mobile device.
My BMW App Is linked with the Connected-

CONTROLS

Safety

Activating/deactivating the BMW Drive Recorder

The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated before the first use of the recording function.

1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. Accept Privacy Policy.
5. 'Settings'
6. "Allow recording"
7. Select the desired setting.

Recording functions

Automatic recording

Recordings are saved automatically when the vehicle sensors detect an accident.

The system saves recordings up to 20 seconds before and after storage is triggered.

The recording is automatically stored when the vehicle sensors detect an accident or theft.

In case of accident:

The system saves recordings up to 30 seconds before and after storage is triggered.

▷ In case of theft:

Depending on the selected recording duration, the system saves the recording after it has been triggered.

When the alarm system is triggered, a message is sent to the My BMW App.

After saving the recording, the reduced quality video can be downloaded to a mobile device.

If the vehicle accelerates rapidly, an automatic recording may be taken.

Manual recording

Using the button

Press and hold this button.

Via iDrive

Start the recording:

1. Apps menu

2. "All apps"

3. "Drive Recorder"

4. "Recording"

5. "Start recording"

The system saves recordings up to 20 seconds before and after storage is triggered.

Recording playback and administration

Stored video recordings can be played back, exported and deleted.

For your own safety, the video recording is only displayed on the control display up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market versions, the video recording is only displayed if the parking broke is engaged or if the selector lever is in the P position.

1. Apps menu

If a camera change occurred during the recording, different segments of the video can be selected.

Settings

Recording type

1. Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the desired setting.

Recording time

1. 📁ps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the desired setting.

Cameras

Different cameras can be selected.

1. 📄ps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Settings"
5. "Com. selection"
6. Select desired camera.

"All": In the event of an accident, the system switches automatically.

If driver assistance systems are enabled, their camera views are automatically selected.

System limits

In the event of serious accidents, it may not

The preferred file system for USB storage is NTFS. Other file systems may have limitations. In case of theft, the recording is only stored automatically when the anti-theft warning system has been triggered.

If the internet connection is weak or cannot be established, theft alerts and video downloads may be restricted or not available.

Active Protection

Principle

Active Protection prepares occupants and the vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving or collision situations.

General information

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version, Active Protection consists of various PreCrash functions.

The system is used to detect certain critical driving situations that might lead to an accident. This includes the following critical driving situations:

Emergency braking.
▶ Severe understeering.
▶ Severe oversteering.
Certain functions of several systems con, within the system limits, lead to Active Protection triggering:
▶ Forward Collision Warning with braking
function: automatic brake intervention.
▶ Forward Collision Warning with braking function: brake booster.
▶ Rear-End Collision Preparation: detection of impending rear-end collisions.

CONTROLS

Safety

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to the system limits, critical situations might not be detected reliably or in time. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Function

Depending on the equipment and requirements, the following individual functions are active in accident-critical driving situations:

Automatic closing of the windows.
The windows remain open with a small gap.
▶ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof. The sun protection is also closed.
▶ Automatic positioning of the backrest for the front passenger seat.

Systems can be returned to the desired settings following a critical driving situation without accident.

PostCrash iBrake

Principle

In certain accident situations, the PostCrash iBrake can automatically bring the vehicle to a standstill without intervention by the driver.

General information

At standstill

After coming to a halt, the brake is released automatically.

Harder vehicle deceleration

In certain situations, it may be necessary to bring the vehicle to a stop more quickly than automatic braking with PostCrash IBroke. To do this, quickly apply extra force to the broke. The brake pressure will then be higher than the brake pressure generated by automatic braking. Automatic braking with Post-Crash IBroke is conceded.

Abort automatic braking

It may be necessary to cancel PostCrash iBrake automatic braking in certain situations, e.g., when making an evasive maneuver.
Abort automatic broking:

By depressing the brake pedal for slightly longer.
- By pressing the accelerator pedal for slightly longer.

Fatigue Alert

Principle

The Fatigue Alert break recommendation feature can detect when the driver is fatigued or less alert during long, monotonous trips, for instance on highways. This function recommends taking a break.

Safety information

Warning

Safety

CONTROLS

accident, Injury, and property damage. Make sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions.

Break recommendation

Function

Once a drive is started, this function is trained to the driver, enabling it to detect when the driver is less alert or is fatigued.

This procedure takes, for example, the following criteria into account:

Personal driving style, for instance steering behavior.

Driving conditions, for instance time, length of trip.

Depending on the equipment: attention of the driver through the Driver Attention Camera.

This function activates at speeds greater than approx. 43 mph/70 km/h and can also display a break recommendation.

Setting break recommendation

The break recommendation can be switched on, off and adjusted via iDrive.

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safely and worrings"

6. "Fatigue Alert"

7. Select the desired setting.

Despite this function being off, some driver assistance systems may issue break recommendations.

During the display, various settings can be selected.

The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after parking the vehicle. A break recommendation can only be displayed again after this time has elapsed.

System limits

The Fatigue Alert system may be limited. If the system is limited, either no warning may be issued or an unwarranted warning may be issued.

The break recommendation function may be limited in the following situations:

▷ If the time is set incorrectly.

▶ At a predominantly driven speed below approx. 43 mph/70 km/h.

With a sporty driving style such as during rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.

▶ In active driving situations such as when changing lanes frequently.

When the road condition is poor.

▶ In the event of strong side winds.

Driver Attention Camera

Principle

A camera in the instrument cluster monitors the driver's activity and, depending on the equipment, the driver's viewing direction.

General information

The assistance systems help drivers by analyzing whether they are paying attention, e.g., by evaluating their head position and eyes.

Functional requirements

CONTROLS

Safety

The steering wheel and driver's seat height must be adjusted so that the entire instrument cluster is visible. This enables the Driver Attention Camera to record the driver's entire face.

Overview

One infrared light source is located on the instrument cluster. Depending on the lighting conditions, these light sources may be visible when the vehicle is in standby.

System limits

The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully operational in the following situations:

▶ When the Driver Attention Camera is covered by the steering wheel.
▶ With sunglasses with high protection from infrared light.

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Antilock Braking System

Principle

The Antilock Braking System prevents locking of the wheels during braking.

You remain able to steer your vehicle even during full braking, which increases active driving safety.

General information

The Antilock Braking System is ready after each time drive-ready state is turned on.

Malfunction

The waming light on the instrument cluster illuminates.

A Check Control message is displayed.

The Antilock Braking System Is not available,

Steerability is limited during full braking. Have the vehicle checked immediately by an authorized service center or another purified

Brake assistant

The brake assistant automatically applies maximum braking assistance when the brake pedal is depressed quickly. This reduces the braking distance to a minimum for full braking.

To make full use of braking assistance, do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during full braking.

M Setup

Principle

The SETUP button is used to configure various driving dynamics and drive systems. In addition, the M1/M2 buttons on the steering wheel can be used to configure and bring up two different settings.

General information

When the drive-ready state is switched on after the idle state, an efficient vehicle condition is active by default.

Overview

Button in the center console

CONTROLS

Driving stability control systems

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

MI configuration.

M2 configuration.

Settings

The SETUP button and M1/M2 buttons on the steering wheel can be used to configure the following systems:

Icon System

"Engine": Drive, refer to page 125, programs.

Manual transmission:

*Gear Shift Assistant": RPM change at gear change. Gear Shift Assistant, refer to page 713.

"Chassis": programs of Adaptive M suspension, refer to page 248.

'Stecking': programs of Servotronic, refer to page 195.

"Brake": programs of broke, refer to page 196.

*M xDrive": programs of M xDrive, refer to page 199.

*M Traction Control": M Traction Control, refer to page 200.

Icon System

"Auto Start/Stop": Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 110.

M Steptronic Sport transmission: "Drive logic": shift modes and Drive-logic programs.

Driveloglc, refer to page 118.

*DSC": Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 196, and M Dynamic Mode, refer to page 198.

"M Sound": Sound Control, refer to page 126.

Operation via SETUP

General information

The settings from the SETUP button are applied directly. The settings are not saved.

Configuring M Setup

(2) 1974

Press the button.

elect the desired setting.

Operation via M1/M2

General Information

The settings for the driving dynamics and drive systems can be configured for the M1/M2 buttons and retrieved if required.

With activated M1 or M2 configuration, any changes to the setting are immediately applied.

When M1/M2 is deactivated or reset, the driv-

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

Safety Information

Warning

Depending on the setting, Dynamic Stability Control may be restricted or not available when the M1 or M2 button is activated. There is a risk of accidents and risk of property damage. Note the settings for Dynamic Stability Control in iDrive and take any necessary action. Modify your driving style and react, if necessary.

Configuring M1/M2

Press the button.

1. "M1 CONFIGURATION" or "M2 CONFIGURATION"

2. Select the desired setting.

The individual settings are stored for the configuration currently in use.

Alternatively, current system settings can be directly saved to M1 or M2. To do this, press and hold the desired button on the steering wheel until an acoustic signal sounds.

Activating M1/M2

Press the corresponding button on the steering wheel;

"M1 CONFIGURATION" or "M2

CONFIGURATION*: IF DSC OFF or M Dynamic Mode is set, a message is displayed on the

Disabling M1/M2

Press the corresponding button on the steering wheel.

Resetting M1/M2

Press the button.

1. "M1 CONFIGURATION" or "M2 CONFIGURATION"

2. "Reset"

3. "Reset M1 settings."

To cancel resetting: "Cancel"

Display in the Instrument cluster

Icon Description

Icon illuminates: corresponding configuration is activated.

M MODE

Principle

Driver assistance and collision warning systems can be adapted to the situation via M MODE.

CONTROLS

Driving stability control systems

General information

The following driving modes are available:
▷ "ROAD"

"SPORT"
▷ Depending on the equipment: "TRACK"
The view on the instrument cluster changes depending on the selected drive mode.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situations. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or responses, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

M MODE

Driving modes

ROAD drive mode

▶ All available collision warning systems are switched on.
▶ All available driver assistance systems are active.

ROAD drive mode is activated after drive-ready state is switched on.

SPORT drive mode

Depending on the equipment, the following
systems are deactivated:

Lane Departure Warning.
▶ Side Collision Protection.
▶ Manual Speed Limiter.
▶ Cruise Control.
▶ Active Cruise Control with Distance Control.
▶ Steering Assistant.
▶ Assisted Driving Mode Plus.
Lone Change Assistant

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

Depending on vehicle equipment: TRACK driving mode

In addition to the deactivated systems in SPORT drive mode, the following systems are deactivated, depending on vehicle equipment:

Speed Limit Info.
Forward Collision Mitigation.
Active Blind Spot Detection.
Traffic Light And Sign Warning.
Rear-End Collision Preparation.
Hazard flashing with hard braking right before standstill is deactivated.
Control display is switched off.
The functions of the entertainment system are switched off.

Selecting the driving mode

ROAD and SPORT drive modes can only be enabled when drive-ready state is switched on.

TRACK drive mode can only be enabled when the vehicle is stationary or driving at a very low speed.

1. Select the desired setting.

In addition, the collision warning systems can be adjusted.

Additional information:

Collision warning systems, refer to page 165.

Servotronic

Principle

and makes steering firmer when driving at faster speeds.

Furthermore, the steering force adapts to the driving mode to convey a firm, sporty feel or a comfortable steering response.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

SETUP

Programs

Program Steering force tuning

"COMFORT" Low steering forces, good roadway feedback.

"SPORT" High steering forces, maximum roadway feedback.

Selecting a program

Using the button

SETUP Press the button and select the desired program on the control display.

Via iDrive

CONTROLS

Driving stability control systems

Display in the instrument cluster

When the display for M Setup is activated in the instrument cluster, the selected program is displayed.

Additional information: Central display area, refer to page 141.

Brake

Principle

The sensitivity of the brake pedal motions to the braking response can be adjusted.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

SETUP

Programs

Program Response characteristics

"COMFORT" Comfortable braking.

"SPORT" Sensitive braking.

Selecting a program

Using the button

SETUP Press the button and select the desired program on the control display.

Via iDrive

Brake settings can be configured in M Setup.

Additional Information:

M Setup, refer to page 191.

Display in the instrument cluster

When the display for M Setup is activated in the instrument cluster, the selected program is displayed.

Additional Information:

Central display area, refer to page 141.

Dynamic Stability Control

Principle

Dynamic Stability Control helps keep the vehicle on a steady course in critical driving situations. The drive power is reduced depending on the situation, and wheels can be brokered individually.

General information

The system detects the following unstable driving conditions, for instance:

Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.

▶ Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which can lead to understeering.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

When driving with a roof load, e.g., roof bars, the vehicle's center of gravity is higher. This increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situations. There is a risk of accident, Injury, and property damage. Drive with roof load only with activated Dynamic Stability Control.

Overview

Dynamic Stability Control

Activating/deactivating Dynamic Stability Control

General information

Dynamic Stability Control is automatically activated whenever drive-ready state is switched on.

If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, driving stability is limited when accelerating and cornering.

To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic Stability Control as soon as possible.

Activating/deactivating the system

1. Press the button to open the menu.
2. "DSC OFF"

Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.

1. Press the button again to reactivate Dynamic Stability Control.

Depending on vehicle equipment, the following programs can be displayed and selected immediately after disabling Dynamic Stability Control:

M xDrive, refer to page 199.

M Traction Control, refer to page 200.

▶ M Drift Analyzer, refer to page 201.

Dynamic Stability Control can be configured for use with the M1 or M2 button.

Additional information:

M Setup, refer to page 191.

Displays in the instrument cluster

View when Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated

CONTROLS

Driving stability control systems

Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.

Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stability Control is regulating the driving and brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.

Reduce speed and modify your driving style to the driving circumstances.

Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability Control has failed or is Initializing. Driving stabilization is restricted or has

failed.

If the warning light illuminates continuously, have the vehicle checked immediately by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Automatic program change

Dynamic Stability Control can be activated automatically by Forward Collision Mitigation depending on the situation. Deactivate Forward Collision Mitigation as necessary.

Additional information:

Forward Collision Mitigation with brake intervention, refer to page 165.

M Dynamic Mode

Principle

M Dynamic Mode allows a ride with high longitudinal and lateral acceleration but with limited driving stability.

Only in the absolute limit range does the system intervene for stabilization by reducing the engine power and by brake interventions on the wheels. In this driving condition, additional clearing corrections may be necessary.

General information

Depending on vehicle equipment, the active M xDrive mode is: "4WD SPORT" when M Dynamic Mode is activated.

You may find it useful to briefly activate the system under the following special circumstances:

▶ When rocking the vehicle free from deep snow or driving off from loose ground.

- With an increased need for dynamics or longitudinal acceleration, for instance when driving on a race track.

To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic Stability Control.

Safety information

Warning

When M Dynamic Mode is activated, stabilizing interventions are carried out only to a reduced extent. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in response to a warning.

Overview

Button In the vehicle

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

Activate/deactivate the function

1. Press the button to open the selection menu.

2. "MDM" M Dynamic Mode is activated.

3. Press the button again to reactivate Dynamic Stability Control.

Display in the instrument cluster

Icon Description

Display active and indicator light illuminates: M Dynamic Mode is activated.

Dynamic Stability Control waming light also flashes: M Dynamic Mode controls the driving and brake power,

Indicator and warning lights ill- luminate: M Dynamic Mode or Dynamic Stability Control may not be operational.

M xDrive

Principle

MyDrive is the all-wheel drive system of the

axes as demanded by the driving situation and road condition.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

SETUP

Programs

There are three M xDrive programs available when the DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.

Program Distribution of driving forces

"4WD" Front and rear axles.

"4WD SPORT" Front and rear axles. Main component, rear axle.

"2WD" Rear axle.

A program is activated automatically in the following situations:

When the drive-ready state is switched on: "4WD".
When the M Dynamic Mode is activated: "4WD SPORT".
When Dynamic Stability Control Is deacti-

CONTROLS

Driving stability control systems

Selecting a program

General information

Changing programs in dynamic driving situations is not possible.

Using the button

SETUP Press the button and select the desired program on the control display.

Via iDrive

MxDrive settings can be configured in M Setup.

Additional information:

M Setup, refer to page 191.

Display in the instrument cluster

Icon Description

The indicator light is illuminated and 4WD appears in the instrument cluster; Program is activated.

The indicator light is illuminated and 4WD Sport appears in the instrument cluster: Program is activated.

2WD display is active and indicator light illuminates: Program is activated.

A

Warning light illuminates

M Traction Control

Principle

M Traction Control permits the gradual adjustment of the wheel-slip behavior of the rear wheels during acceleration by regulating the driving power accordingly.

General information

If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated after an idle state, the M Traction Control level OFF/Level 0 is set.

Safety information

Warning

The deactivation of the Dynamic Stability Control limits the driving stability. Depending on the selected setting of M Traction Control, minor or major wheelspin is possible, which limits, e.g., lone keeping while accelerating. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

Functional requirement

Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated and, depending on vehicle equipment, M xDrive mode 2WD is activated.

Additional Information:

Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 196.

Selecting settings

Using the button

1. Press the button.
2. "M Traction Control"
3. Select the desired setting:

OFF/Level 0: support switched off. Wheels may spin strongly with severe oversteering.
Level 10: maximum support. Wheels may spin slightly with slight oversteering.

Via iDrive

M Traction Control settings can be configured in M Setup.

Additional Information:

M Setup, refer to page 191.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Icon Description

Display is active and indicator light illuminates:

The Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.

Dynamic Stability Control warning light also flashes; M Traction Control is regulating the drive power.

M Traction Control level display.

Indicator light flashes: M Traction Control level is changed.

M Drift Analyzer

Principle

The M Drift Analyzer detects and evaluates when the vehicle is moved in the drift.

General information

For safety reasons, the use of the M Drift Analyzer is only permitted outside of public road traffic and under suitable ambient conditions. Higher mechanical and thermal loads while drifting lead to increased wear. This wear is not covered by the warranty. Check the tire condition and the tire tread depth before driving off.

CONTROLS

Driving stability control systems

Additional information:

M Traction Control, refer to page 200.

Safety information

Warning

The deactivation of the Dynamic Stability Control limits the driving stability. Depending on the selected setting of M Traction Control, minor or major whoolspin is possible, which limits, e.g., lone keeping while accelerating. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Dynamic Stability Control

Activating/deactivating the system

General Information

Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated when the M Drift Analyzer is activated.

Deactivating M Drift Analyzer activates Stability Control and 4WD mode.

Using the button

1. Press the button.

2. "DSC OFF"

3. "M Drift Analyzer"

4. "Activate"

5. Confirm message.

Via IDrive

1. 📄ps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "M Drift Analyzer"

4. "Activote"

5. If necessary, "Activate anyway"

Set the M Traction Control level

1. 4-ps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "M Drift Analyzer"

4. "M Traction Control"

5. Select the desired setting.

Displays

Indications on the control display

The following information is shown on the control display:

▶ Values from the last and best drift.

▶ Drift angle performance values.

Displays in the Instrument cluster

The following icons are shown on the instru-

Driving stability control systems

CONTROLS

Icon Description

	Assessment of the current drift. The number of stars that can be reached varles depending on the selected M Traction Control level. The better the drift, the more stars are filled out.
	Current drift is the best drift.
	M Drift Analyzer is activated.
	For an optimal drift, apply the accelerator pedal less.

Reset the data

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "M Drift Analyzer"
4. "Reset"

Active M differential

The active M differential provides for continuously variable locking of the rear axle differential depending on the driving situation. This prevents an individual rear wheel from spinning even when the Dynamic Stability Control is turned off and in M Dynamic Mode, and thus enables optimum traction In all driving situations.

The driver is responsible adapting his or her driving style to the situation.

CONTROLS

Driver assistance systems

Driver assistance systems

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Speed warning

Principle

The speed warning can be used to set a speed limit. A warning will be issued when this speed limit is exceeded.

General information

Another warning occurs when the set speed limit is exceeded again after it has dropped by 3 mph/5 km/h.

Activating/deactivating the speed warning

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Safety and warnings"

6. "Speed warning"

Adjusting the speed

1. ps menu

2. "Speed warning"

3. "Warning above:"
4. Select the desired setting

Applying current speed as the speed warning

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Speed warning"
7. 'Adopt current speed'

Speed Limit Info

Speed Limit Info

Principle

Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if necessary, the Head-up display.

General information

The camera in the area of the interior mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as overhead sign posts.

Traffic signs with extra icons are considered

and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.

The traffic sign will then be either displayed

of ignored depending on the situation in the Instrument cluster and the Head-up display.

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

For Speed Limit Info to function correctly, current map data for the country in which the vehicle is operated must be downloaded.

For Information on the current map version and map updates, see Map update in the Navigation system chapter.

Without map data, the system is subject to certain technical limitations. Traffic signs with speed limitations are detected and displayed only. Speed limits due to entering towns/cities, highway signs, etc., are not displayed. Speed limits with extra traffic signs are always displayed.

Additional information:

Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and Communication, refer to page 6.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Sensors

The system is controlled by a camera behind the windshield.

Display

Speed Limit Info

Icon Description

Current speed limit. Depending on the national-market version, it is possible to switch between the units of measurement.

No data on current speed limit available.

Speed Limit Info deactivated.

Warning signals

Depending on the settings, the display flashes if the detected speed limit is exceeded.

Settings

Individual settings can be configured for Speed Limit Info, e.g., warnings issued if the speed is exceeded or the permissible maximum speed changes.

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"
7. Select the desired setting.

CONTROLS

Driver assistance systems

System limits

System limits of the sensors

Additional Information:

▶ Camera, refer to page 35.

Functional limitations

The system function may be limited and may provide incorrect information in the following situations:

▶ Traffic signs are fully or partially concealed by objects, stickers, or paint.
▶ Traffic signs do not comply with the standard.
▶ In areas that are not included in the navigation system map data.

If navigation system map data is invalid, outdated, or unavailable.
▶ When roads deviate from the navigation such as due to changes in road layout.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you.
When passing buses or trucks with traffic signs applied to them.
▶ In case of electronic traffic signs.
▶ When traffic signs that are void for a parallel road are detected.
▶ In the presence of country-specific road signs or road layouts.

Manual Speed Limiter

Principle

The Manual Speed Limiter can be used to set a speed limit, for instance to prevent the vehicle from exceeding speed limits.

General information

The system can limit the speed, starting at 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be driven at any speed below the set speed limit.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

System on/off.

Store current speed. Speed Limit Assistant: accept suggested speed manually.

Rocker switch: Changing the speed limit.

Operation

Turning on the speed limiter

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The current speed is adopted as the speed limit.

If the system is turned on while the vehicle is stationary or driving at low speeds, 20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.

The marking in the speedometer is set to the corresponding speed.

When the speed limit is activated, Dynamic Stability Control is switched on as necessary.

Turning off the speed limiter

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

When the engine is switched off.

When Cruise Control is switched on,

▶ When activating certain driving modes.

The displays turn off.

Stopping the speed limiter

If the reverse gear is engaged or in Neutral, the system is interrupted when rolling backwards.

Changing the speed limit

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed limit is set.

Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the resistance point, the speed limit increases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.

Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. If the set speed limit is reached or unintentionally exceeded such as when driving downhill, the vehicle is not actively broked.

When the speed limit is set during a trip to a value below the current speed, the vehicle coasts until it drops to the set speed limit.

The current speed can also be stored by pressing a button;

Press the button on the steering wheel.

SET

The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally.

Press the accelerator pedal all the way down to intentionally exceed the set speed limit.

When the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit, the limit is automatically reactivated.

Warning when the speed limit is exceeded

Visual warning

If the speed limit is exceeded: the indicator light in the instrument cluster finishes while the vehicle speed is than the set speed limit.

Acoustic warning

If the speed limit is exceeded unintentionally, a signal sounds.

When the speed limit is reduced to below the current vehicle speed, the signal sounds after some time.

When the speed limit is intentionally exceeded by stepping on the accelerator pedal all the way down, there is no signal.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Display in the speedometer

Depending on the equipment, a mark in the speedometer displays the status of the system.

▶ Green marking: system is active.

▶ Gray marking: system is interrupted.

▶ No marking; system is

CONTROLS

Driver assistance systems

Indicator light

Icon Description

The indicator light illuminates: the system is switched on.

The indicator light flashes: the set speed limit has been exceeded.

Gray indicator light: the system has been interrupted.

Cruise Control without Distance Control

Principle

With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the set speed. The system accelerates and brakes automatically as needed.

General information

The system can be activated starting at 20 mph/30 km/h.

Depending on the vehicle settings, the Cruise Control settings may change under certain conditions.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of occi-

to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

The use of the system can lead to an increased risk of accidents in the following situations, for instance:

On winding roads.

With high traffic volume.

On slippery roads, In fog, snow, or wet

conditions, or on a loose road surface. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Only use the system if driving at constant speed is possible.

Warning

The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident, injury, and properly damage. Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Cruise Control on/off.

Continue Cruise Control with the last

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Button Function

SET

Store current speed.

Speed Limit Assistant: accept suggested speed manually.

Rocker switch:

Set speed.

Turning Cruise Control on/off

Turning on the system

Depending on the equipment version, press the relevant button on the steering wheel.

The indicator lights in the instrument cluster illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is set to the current speed.

Cruise Control is active. The current speed is maintained and stored as desired speed.

If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on.

Turning off the system

Depending on the equipment version, press the relevant button on the steering wheel.

The displays turn off. The stored set speed is deleted.

Interrupting Cruise Control

Stopping the system manually

Stopping the system automatically

The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations, for example:

▷ When braking manually.

▶ Manual transmission:

The clutch pedal is depressed for a few seconds or released. If a gear is not engaged.

The gear engaged is too high for the current speed.

▶ M Steptronic Sport transmission: selector lever position D is disengaged.

While M Dynamic Mode is enabled or Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.

▶ While Dynamic Stability Control regulates driving stability.

Adjusting the speed

Maintaining and storing the speed

Press the rocker switch up or down once while the system is interrupted.

When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the set speed.

The stored speed is displayed on the speedometer.

If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will

CONTROLS

Driver assistance systems

SET

Press the button.

Changing the speed

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.

▶ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the resistance point, the set speed increases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. The maximum speed that can be set depends on the vehicle.
- Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance point and holding it; vehicle accelerates or decelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal.

After the rocker switch is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.

Continuing Cruise Control

rounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

An interrupted Cruise Control can be continued by calling up the stored speed. The difference between the current speed and the stored speed should be as little as possible.

RESUME Press the button with the system interrupted.

Cruise Control is continued with the stored values.

In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again;

When the system is switched off.

When drive-ready state is switched off.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Display in the speedometer

Depending on the equipment, a mark in the speedometer displays the status of the system.

▶ Green marking; system is active, the marking indicates the desired speed.

▶ Grey marking: system is interrupted, the marking indicates the stored speed.

▶ No marking: system is switched off.

Indicator light

Icon Description

No indicator light: system is switched off.

Indicator light green: system is active.

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Displays in the Head-up display

Some system information can also be displayed in the Head-up display.

The icon is displayed when the set speed is reached.

System limits

Do not use Cruise Control when towing.

Active Cruise Control with Distance Control

Principle

Using the Cruise Control, a desired speed and a distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using the buttons on the steering wheel.

General Information

The system maintains the set speed on clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes automatically.

If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system adjusts the speed of the vehicle so that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as the given situation allows.

The distance can be adjusted at several levels. For safety reasons, it depends on the respective speed.

If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a standstill and then drives off again within a brief period, the system is able to detect this within the given system limits.

Otherwise, drive off on your own such as by pressing the accelerator pedal or the rocker switch on the steering wheel

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle against rolling away.

In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following:

▶ Set the parking broke.

▶ Automatic transmission: Make sure that selector lever position P is engaged.
▶ Manual transmission: Make sure that first gear is engaged on uphill gradients and reverse gear on downhill gradients.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock.

Wamina

CONTROLS

Driver assistance systems

rounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Risk of accident is greater when there is a high speed differential to other vehicles, for instance in the following situations:

When approaching a slowly moving vehicle at speed.

▶ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.

▶ When approaching stationary vehicles at speed.

There is a risk of injury and danger to life. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

With Steering Assistant:

Cruise Control on/off,

With Steering Assistant:

Select function.

Without Steering Assistant

Cruise Control on/off.

Store current speed.

Speed Limit Assistant: accept suggested speed manually.

With Steering Assistant:

Internet Guide Control

Button Function

REGUME

Without Steering Assistant:

Continue Cruise Control with the last

setting.

CANCEL

Without Steering Assistant

Interrupt Cruise Control.

Increase the distance.

Switch Distance Control on/off.

Reduce distance.

Switch Distance Control on/off.

Rocker switch:

Set speed.

Sensors

The system is controlled by the following sensors:

▶ Comeras behind the windshield.

Front rodor sensor.

Additional information:

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.

Application range

The system is best used on well-maintained roads.

The minimum speed that can be set is 20 mph/30 km/h.

The maximum speed that can be set is limited and depends, for example, on the vehicle and the vehicle equipment.

The system can also be activated when stationary.

Do not use Cruise Control and Distance Control when lowing

Turning Cruise Control on/off or stopping it

With Steering Assistant: Assisted Driving Mode

General information

This button is used to switch the configured function on and off.

The button can be used to set the primarily used function.

Setting the function

When the system is active, press the button repeatedly until the desired function is selected in the toolbar. The for Assisted Driving mode is displayed bottom of the instrument cluster.

Icon Function

Cruise Control with Distance Control.

Cruise Control with Distance Control and Steering Assistant.

The selected function is shown in green.

Turning on the system

With Steering Assistant:

Press the button on the steering

If necessary set the Cruise Control

The indicator lights in the instrument cluster illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is set to the current speed.

Cruise Control is active. The current speed is maintained and stored as desired speed. If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on.

Turning off the system

To switch off the system while stationary, step on broke pedal at the same time.

Press the button on the steering wheel:

With Steering Assistant.

Without Steering Assistant.

The displays turn off. The stored set speed is deleted.

Stopping the system manually

When active, press the button on the steering wheel:

With Steering Assistant.

Without Steering Assistant.

If interrupting the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time.

Stopping the system automatically

The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations:

▷ When braking manually.

▶ Selector lever position D is disengaged.

CONTROLS

Driver assistance systems

• When the vehicle is stationary, the seat belt is unbunkled and the driver's door is opened.
  The system has not detected objects for an extended period, for instance on a road with very little traffic without curb or shoulder markings.
  The detection range of the radar is impaired, for instance by contamination or heavy precipitation.
  ▶ After a longer stationary period when the vehicle has been braked to a stop by the system.

Adjusting the speed

Maintaining and storing the speed

Press the rocker switch up or down once while the system is interrupted. The system will be activated.

The current speed is maintained and stored as desired speed.

The stored speed is displayed on the speedometer.

If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will be turned on.

The speed can also be stored by pressing a button.

Changing the speed

Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set.

If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear.
▶ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the resistance point, the set speed increases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
▶ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action.

Adjusting the distance

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. Due to the system limits, deceleration can be late. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Be aware of the surrounding traffic situation at all times. Adjust the distance to the traffic and weather conditions and maintain the prescribed safety distance, possibly by driving.

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Reducing the distance

Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

Instrument cluster will display selected distance.

Increasing the distance

Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set.

instrument cluster will display selected distance.

Automatic adaptation of the distance Depending on the equipment and national-market version: the system can be set so that the distance to the vehicle in front is automatically adjusted within the set distance. The system analyzes the traffic situation and ambient conditions, e.g., poor visibility.

1. 4ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"
7. "Situational distance control"

Continuing Cruise Control

Warning

The set speed can be Incorrectly adjusted or called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene

between the current speed and the stored speed should be as little as possible.

Press the button on the steering wheel with the system Interrupted:

With Steering Assistant.

REBUME

Without Steering Assistant.

Cruise Control is continued with the stored values.

In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again:

When the system is switched off.

▷ When drive-ready state is switched off.

Changing between Cruise Control with/without Distance Control

Safety information

Warning

The system does not react to traffic driving ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored speed. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions and broke as needed.

Changing over the Cruise Control mode

Switching Cruise Control without Distance Control off and on;

Press and hold this button.

CONTROLS

Driver assistance systems

Press the button.

Without Steering Assistant: switch on Distance Control;

Press the button.

Press the button.

After changing, a Check Control message is displayed.

Displays in the instrument cluster

General information

Depending on the equipment version, the displays in the instrument cluster may vary.

Display in the speedometer

Depending on the equipment, a mark in the speedometer displays the status of the system.

▶ Green marking: system is active, the marking indicates the desired speed.

▶ Gray marking: system is interrupted, the marking indicates the stored speed.

▶ No marking: system is switched off.

Indicator lights and warning lights Depending on the equipment:

Icon Description

White indicator light:

No Distance Control because accelerator pedal is being pressed.

Indicator light illuminates green: Vehicle has been detected ahead you.

The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle has been detected ahead of you.

Indicator light flashes green; Preceding vehicle has driven

Indicator light illuminates gray. System interrupted.

Indicator light flashes grey: Conditions are not adequate for the system to work.

The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.

Warning light flashes red and acoustic signal sounds: Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if necessary.

Assisted View

Depending on the equipment and national-market version, information for the system is displayed in the Assisted View in the central display area of the instrument cluster.

Additional Information:

Assisted View, refer to page 143.

Displays in the Head-up display.

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

The icon is displayed when the set speed is reached.

Distance information

The icon is displayed when the distance from the vehicle traveling ahead is too short.

The distance information is active in the following situations:

Active Cruise Control with Distance Control switched off.
Display in the Head-up display selected. Head-up display, refer to page 129.
Distance too short.
Speed greater than approx. 40 mph/70 km/h.

System limits

System limits of the sensors

Additional Information:

Cameros, refer to page 35.
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.

Detection range

The detection capability of the system and the automatic braking performance are limited.

Deceleration

The system does not decelerate in the following situations:
▶ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving road users.
▶ Depending on the vehicle equipment and national availability, for red traffic lights.

For cross traffic.
For oncoming traffic.

Merging vehicles

If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly merges into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected distance. It may not be possible to restore the selected distance in certain situations, including if you are driving significantly faster than vehicles driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and making an evasive maneuver, if needed.

CONTROLS

Driver assistance systems

Cornering

When the set speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed.

The system has a limited detection range. Situations can arise in tight curves where a vehicle driving ahead will not be detected or will be detected very late.

When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve, if the system decelerates you may compensate for it by briefly accelerating. After releasing the accelerator pedal the system is reactivated and controls speed independently.

Driving off

In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off automatically; for example:

Weather

The following restrictions can occur under unfavorable weather or light conditions:

▶ Poorer vehicle detection.

Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already recognized.

Drive attentively, and react to the current surrounding traffic situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for instance by braking, steering or making an evasive maneuver.

Speed Limit Assistant

Principle

Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the speed limit. A suggested speed can be applied.

General information

When the systems In the vehicle, e.g., Speed Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit, this new speed value can be applied for the following systems:

Manual Speed Limiter.

▶ Cruise Control.

▶ Active Cruise Control with Distance Control.

The speed value is suggested as the new desired speed to be applied. To apply the speed value, the corresponding system must be activated.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Accept suggested speed manually.

Rocker switch: Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.

Turning Speed Limit Assistant on/off

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Driving"

6. "Speed Limit Assistance"

7. "Speed limits"

8. Select the desired setting:

"Adjust manually": detected speed limits

the instrument cluster without being applied.

"Show current limit": current speed limits are displayed without being applied in the instrument cluster.

"Off"; depending on the national-market version, Speed Limit Info and Speed Limit Assistant will be turned off.

Displays in the instrument cluster

A message is displayed in the instrument cluster when the system and a driver assistance system are activated.

Icon Function

Depending on the equipment version, the indicator light illuminates green, together with the icon for a speed control system:

Speed Limit Assistant is active and detected speed limits can be applied manually for the displayed system.

Detected change of a speed limit with immediate effect.

Depending on the national-market version, it is possible to switch between the units of measurement.

Indicator light illuminates green; the detected speed limit can be applied with the SET button.

After it has been applied, a green checkmark is displayed.

Manual adoption

A detected speed limit can be applied manually for the active driver assistance system.

When the SET Icon Illuminotes. press

CONTROLS

Driver assistance systems

Speed adjustment

Principle

It can be adjusted whether the speed limit is applied exactly or with a tolerance.

General information

You can configure a speed adaptation for all speed limits and an additional speed adaptation for speed limits up to 40 mph/60 km/h. The additional speed adaptation for speed limits up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or deactivated.

Setting the speed adjustment

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"
7. Select the desired setting:

▶ "Adjust speed limits": set tolerance for the speed adaptation that affects all speeds.
▶ "2nd adjustment up to": activate or deactivate additional speed adaptation.
▶ "Adjust speed limits": With additional speed adjustment activated, set the tolerance for speed limits up to 40 mph/60 km/h.

Adapting to route

Principle

Depending on the national-market version, the system can be confloured so that the vehicle

▶ Before making turns.
▶ Before a roundabout.
▶ Before a curve.

Adapting speed automatically to route

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"
7. "Adjust to route" or "Automatically adjust speed to route"

System limits

Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed Limit Info system.
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.
Upcoming speed limits can only be applied to Active Cruise Control with Distance Control.
The system does not react or reacts to a limited extent to the route ahead in the following situations:
▶ If the vehicle location cannot be clearly determined by the navigation system.
▶ With wintry road conditions.
Additional Information:
▶ System limits of Speed Limit Information, refer to page 206.
▷ System limits of the sensors, refer to page 35.

Steering Assistant

Principle

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

General information

Depending on the speed, the system orients itself according to the lane boundaries or vehicles in front.

Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether the steering wheel is being touched.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. In assessing the traffic situation, Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Buttons on the steering wheel

Button Function

Steering Assistant with Traffic Jam Assistant on/off.

Switch function on.

Sensors

The system is controlled by the following sensors:

Cameras behind the windshield.

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.

Functional requirements

▶ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h.
▷ Sufficient lane width.
▶ Above approx. 43 mph/70 km/h: lane boundary on both sides is detected.
Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane boundary on both sides or vehicle driving ahead is detected.

Hands on the steering wheel rim.

Wide curves.

Drive in the center of the lane.

▶ Turn signal switched off.

The sensor system calibration process is complete.

▶ Cruise Control with Distance Control active.

Seat belt on the driver's side fastened.

Forward Collision Warning with braking function on.

Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation on.

Side Collision Protection active.

Turning Steering Assistant on/off

Assisted Driving Mode

General information

This button is used to switch the configured function on and off.

The button can be used to set the primarily used function.

Setting the function

CONTROLS

Driver assistance systems

Icon Function

Cruise Control with Distance Control.

ulse Control with Distance Control

and Steering Assistant.

The selected function is shown in green.

Turning on the system

1. | 7 4 5 Press the button on the steering wheel.

1. □ Adjust the Steering Assistant if necessary.

Indicator light illuminates gray.

The system is on standby and does not manipulate steering movements.

System activates automatically as soon as all function conditions are fulfilled.

The indicator light illuminates green.

The system is active.

With the system switched on, the Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation and the Side Collision Protection are activated.

Turning off the system

Press the button on the steering wheel.

The indicator goes out.

The system does not perform supportive steering wheel movements.

Stopping Steering Assistant automatically

The system interrupts the supporting steering movements automatically, for example in the following situations:

▶ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h.

▶ When the steering wheel is released,

▷ When braking manually.

With strong steering intervention.

▷ When leaving own lane.

▷ When the turn signal is switched on.

▷ When the lane is too narrow.

▶ If a lane boundary is not detected for a certain period of time and no vehicle is driving ahead.

▶ Active Cruise Control with Distance Control is stopped.

The seat belt on the driver's side is unfostened.

Indicator light illuminates gray.

The system is on standby and does not manipulate steering movements.

System activates automatically as soon as all function conditions are fulfilled.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Icon Description

Indicator light illuminates gray

The system is ready.

Indicator light illuminates green:

The system is activated.

The system supports the driver in

keeping the vehicle within the lane.

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Icon Description

Warning light illuminates yellow and acoustic signal may sound: System Interruption Is Imminent.

Depending on national-market version: The warning light flashes or illuminates red. A signal sounds; The system is switched off.

Warning light illuminates yellow: Hands are not grasping the steering wheel. The system is still active.

Warning light illuminates red, acoustic signal sounds; Hands are not grasping the steering wheel. System interruption is imminent.

The system reduces the speed to a standstill if applicable. It is possible that the system will not execute any supporting steering movements.

Depending on vehicle equipment and rational-market version, Information for the system is displayed in the Assisted View of the instrument cluster.

Additional Information:

Assisted View, refer to page 143.

Displays on the steering wheel

The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate analogously to the displays in the instrument cluster:

▶ Yellow: system interruption is imminent.

Red: system will be deactivated.

The steering wheel displays can be switched on/off if required.

1. 4ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Light elements"

Displays in the Head-up display

All system information can also be displayed in the Head-up display.

System limits

General information

The system cannot be activated or meaningfully used in certain situations, e.g., while towing a trailer.

CONTROLS

Driver assistance systems

Safety Information

Warning

Because of system limitations, this system may either not respond, or respond too late, Incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.

System limits of the sensors

Additional Information:

Cameras, refer to page 35.

▶ Radar sensors, refer to page 36.

Hands on the steering wheel

The sensors cannot detect hand-steering wheel contact in the following situations:

- Driving with gloves.

▶ Protective covers on the steering wheel.

Narrow lanes

When driving within narrow lanes, the system cannot be activated or effectively used, for instance in the following situations:

In construction areas.

▶ Depending on the equipment, with automatic formation of emergency lanes.

▶ Within city limits.

Weather

The following restrictions can occur under unfavorable weather or light conditions:

Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane

Drive attentively, and react to the current surrounding traffic situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for instance by braking, steering or making an evasive maneuver.

Assisted Driving Mode Plus

Principle

Assisted Driving Mode Plus helps drivers guide their vehicle through traffic joms.

Supporting steering movements take place without the driver actively steering.

General information

The system uses the sensors of the Steering Assistant.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Federal, state, or local laws may differ, and the use of this function may be prohibited or limited. Before use, check federal, state, and local laws.

Additionally, the notices for the Steering Assistant apply.

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

Functional requirements

The functional requirements of the Steering Assistant are fulfilled.
Functional requirements, refer to page 221.
The Steering Assistant is active.
The function is only available on certain street types, e.g. freeways.

Driving on a road without pedestrians or cyclists.
Sufficient lane width.
Lone boundaries and a vehicle driving ahead are detected.
Speed below approx. 40 mph/60 km/h.
The Driver Attention Camera in the Instrument cluster detects that the driver is paying attention to the surrounding traffic.
The function must be available in the country in which the vehicle is driven.

Switching on Assisted Driving Mode Plus

As soon as all functional requirements are met, an additional icon for Assisted Driving Mode Plus will be displayed on the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed at the bottom of the instrument cluster.

Select Assisted Driving Mode Plus with the button on the steering wheel.

The icon for Assisted Driving Mode shown in green.

Two green LED lights are illuminated on the steering wheel.

The indicator light in the instrument cluster is shown in green.

The system begins to assist the driver with vehicle control

Depending on vehicle equipment, this function

can be enabled/disabled on the control dis-

poy.

1. Maps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Assisted Driving"
7. "Assisted Driving Plus"

Displays in the instrument cluster

Icon Description

Indicator light green; system is active.

Indicator light white: system is ready.

Gray indicator light: the system has

been interrupted.

Displays on the steering wheel

The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate analogously to the displays in the instrument cluster;

CONTROLS

Driver assistance systems

System limits

General information

Assisted Driving Mode Plus is subject to the system limits of the Steering Assistant.

Additional information;

Steering Assistant, refer to page 220.

Driver Attention Camera

Assisted Driving Mode Plus is subject to the system limits of the Driver Attention Camera. Additional Information:

Driver Attention Camera, refer to page 189.

Lane Change Assistant

Principle

The Lone Change Assistant also assists when changing lanes on multi-lane roads.

General information

The system uses the sensors of the Steering Assistant.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time,

Steering Assistant, refer to page 220.

Functional requirements

The functional requirements of the Steering Assistant are fulfilled.

Functional requirements, refer to page 221.

- Driving on a road without pedestrians or cyclists and with physical barriers to oncoming traffic such as crash barriers.

▶ Crossable lane boundaries are detected.

Maximum speed approx.

110 mph/180 km/h.

The minimum speed is country-specific.

The function must be available in the coun

Try in which the vehicle is driven.

Turning on/turning off Lane Change

Assistant

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Driving settings"

4. "Driver Assistance"

5. "Driving"

6. "Assisted Driving"

7. "Lane Change Assistant"

Changing lanes

1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits changing lanes.

2. Press the turn signal lever in the desired direction to the resistance point.

Driver assistance systems

CONTROLS

A supporting steering movement in the required direction can be detected a short time later.

After the lane change, the system helps keep the vehicle in the new lane.

Canceling a lane change

The lane change can be canceled by steering movement into the opposite direction.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Icon Description

Green steering wheel icon.

Green arrow icon for lane-changing.

The system carries out a lane change.

Green steering wheel icon.

Gray line for lane boundary on the appropriate side.

The system detected the lone change request. Lone change not currently possible.

Depending on the national-market version:

Green steering wheel icon.

Gray arrow icon for lane-changing.

displayed in the Assisted View of the Instrument cluster.

Additional information:

Assisted View, refer to page 143.

System limits

The Lane Change Assistant is subject to the system limits of the Steering Assistant.

Additional Information:

Steering Assistant, refer to page 220.

CONTROLS

Parking

Parking

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Parking assistance systems

General information

The parking assistance systems include different individual systems. The individual systems help the driver when parking, maneuvering, or reversing by providing various assistance functions, sensors, and camera views.

Additional Information:

▶ Rear View Corner, refer to page 233.

▶ Automatic camera perspective, refer to page 233.

▶ Side view, refer to page 234.

▶ 3D view, refer to page 235.

▶ Car wash view, refer to page 235.

▶ Panorama View, refer to page 235.

▶ Door opening angle, refer to page 237.

▶ Remote 3D View, refer to page 237.

▶ Park Distance Control, refer to page 238.

▶ Active Park Distance Control, refer to page 241.

▶ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to page 242.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

Park assistance button

Panorama View

Sensors

Parking

CONTROLS

▶ Front camera.

▶ Top view cameras.

▶ Rear View Camera.

Additional information:

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.

Operating concept

The camera-based individual systems are operated with the function bars on the control display. The camera views can be viewed by selecting the appropriate icon.

In the Parking menu, some parking assistance systems can be configured individually.

Some parking assistance systems can be started by voice control as needed, e.g., driving in/out of a parking space with the Automatic Parking Assistant.

Additional information:

BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to page 53.

Calling up Park menu

Via Parking Assistant button

1. Press the button.
2. Settings"
3. Select the desired settings.

Via iDrive

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
   C. Select the desired settings

Display

Principle

With the Park Distance Control display and various camera views, the parking assistance systems help you park, maneuver, and reverse your vehicle.

General information

Depending on the equipment, one or more cameras capture the area from different selectable perspectives.
Depending on the view, the vehicle's surroundings or a part of it is depicted.
Depending on national-market version, the automatic camera perspective or the Rear View Camera is displayed.

Turning display on/off

General Information

The parking assistance systems view switches off automatically when driving forwards or if a certain distance or speed is exceeded.

With reverse gear

When drive-ready state is switched on, the display is automatically switched on if selector lever position R is engaged.

With the Park Assist key

Press the button.

Display on the control display

General Information

Depending on vehicle eoulament and on the

CONTROLS

Parking

Without Parking Assistant Plus

1 Toolbar, left
2 Camera image
3 Vehicle top view
4 Toolbar, right

With Parking Assistant Plus

1 Toolbar, left
2 Camera image
3 Selection window
4 Automatic camera perspective
5 Side view
6 Rear View Camera
7 Toolbar, right

Toolbar, left

Different views can be selected using the left

toobar depending on vehicle equipment:

The Park Distance Control view is displayed.

▶ "Parking"

The view of different camera perspectives is displayed.

D view

A three-dimensional view of the vehicle is displayed.

"or wash"

Your own lane can be displayed to make it easier to drive into a car wash.

Toolbar, right

The parking assistance functions are displayed in the right toolbar. The display may vary depending on vehicle equipment.

- Status of the parking assistance systems.

▶ "Automatic Parking"

Functions of the Automatic Parking Assistant.

Back-Up Assistant

Functions of the Back-up Assistant.

[Deltings]

Settings in the Park menu.

Status of parking assistance systems

The status of active parking assistance systems is indicated by icons in the right-hand toolbar.

Parking

CONTROLS

Icon Meaning

(Ⅱ) No search for Automatic Parking Assistant offers. Automatic Parking Assistant has failed.

(IP) Search for Automatic Parking Assistant offers is active.

Automatic Parking Assistant: If the icon is green, the Automatic Parking Assistant is active. The system assumes vehicle control. Back-up Assistant: If the Icon is green, the Back-up Assistant is active. The system takes over the steering.

Additional displays

General information

Additional displays can be shown in the com- ero image of the display of the parking asis- tance systems, e.g., parking old lines, to make parking and maneuvering easier.

Several additional displays can be active at the same time.

Turning additional displays on/off

Via Parking Assistant button

1. Enable the camera image.
2. Ⓞ 'Settings'
3. Select the desired settings.

Via iDrive

1. 4ps menu
2. "Vehicle"

Parking old lines

Pathway lines

Pathway lines help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads.

Lane lines are displayed in front of or behind the vehicle depending on the gear engaged. The pathway lines are continuously adjusted to the steering movements depending on the steering-wheel angle.

Turning circle lines

Turning circle lines can only be superimposed on the camera image together with pathway lines.

The lines show the course of the smallest possible turning circle on a level road.

Only one turning circle line is displayed after the steering wheel is turned past a certain on-

CONTROLS

Parking

Using parking aid lines

1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning circle line leads to within the limits of the parking space.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the green pathway line covers the corresponding turning circle line.

Obstacle marking

Obstacles are detected by the sensors.
The obstacles detected by the Park Distance Control are shown by marks in the camera image.
Colored gradients for the obstacle markings in green, yellow and red indicate the distances.

Functional limitations

The system can be used only to a limited extent in the following situations:

With a door open.

▶ With open cargo area.

▶ With exterior mirrors folded in.

Areas with gray hotching with an icon in the camera image identify areas that are currently not shown such as an open door.

System limits

Safety information

Warning

Because of system limitations, this system may either not respond, or respond too late, incorrectly, or without cause. There is a risk of accident, Injury, and property damage. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Owner's Manual regarding the scope of the system's operation and limitations.

System limits of the sensors

Additional information:

Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.

Field of view

Because of the camera angle, the areas under the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.

Detection of objects

Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the system.

Objects shown on the control display may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the objects on the control display.

The camera's detection range can be limited by protruding cargo or a rear carrier.

Malfunction

A camera failure is displayed on the control display.

The malfunctioning camera's detection range is shown by the shorter area on the control

Parking

CONTROLS

Rear View Camera

Principle

The Rear View Camera helps when reverse parking and maneuvering. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the control display.

Additional views can be shown on the display, e.g., parking old lines and obstacle markings.

General information

Follow the information in the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.

Functional requirements

The cargo area is fully closed.

The camera area is clean and clear.

Turning the Rear View Camera on/off

Turning the camera view on automatically

When drive-ready state is switched on, the Rear View Camera is automatically switched on if selector lever position R is engaged.

Turning the camera view off automatically

The Rear View Camera turns off automatically when driving forward or when a certain distance or speed is exceeded.

Turning the camera view on/off manually

Without Parking Assistant Plus

Dm

With Parking Assistant Plus

1. Select the Icon in the selection window. To exit the Rear View Camera view, select another camera view in the selection window.

Deactivated Rear View Camera

When the Rear View Camera is deactivated, for instance when the cargo area is open, the camera image is displayed with gray shading.

Automatic camera perspective

Principle

The automatic camera perspective shows a steering-dependent view in the respective driving direction.

This perspective adapts to the respective driving situation.

General information

As soon as obstacles are detected, the view changes to a fixed display of the area in front of or behind the bumper, or switches to slide. Park Distance Controls necessary.

When the reverse gear is engaged, the automatic camera perspective is exited if necessary and the Rear View Camera view is displayed. If necessary, select the automatic camera perspective when reverse gear is engaged. The automatic camera perspective will then be maintained for the current parking operation.

Follow the Information In the "Parking assls-

CONTROLS

Parking

Turning the automatic camera perspective on/off

Turning the camera view on/off automatically

When the parking assistance systems' display is turned on, automatic camera perspective is selected automatically.

The Icon in the selection window is selected automatically.

To exit the steering-dependent camera view, select another camera view in the selection window.

Turning the camera view on/off manually

1. Press the button.
2. Select the icon in the selection window. To exit the steering-dependent camera view, select another camera view in the selection window.

Side protection

Principle

The side Park Distance Control is automatically displayed when the automatic camera perspective is turned on. The function shows obstacles located next to the vehicle.

Display

To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle markings are displayed on the sides of the vehicle.
▶ No markings: no obstacles detected.
▶ Color marks: warning against detected obstacles.

System limits

The system only displays stationary obstacles that were previously detected by sensors while passing them.

The system does not detect whether an obstacle moves later on. For this reason, at standstill, the marks are not shown anymore in the display after a certain time. The area next to the vehicle must be newly captured.

Side view

Principle

Side view shows the vehicle's side surroundings, making it easier to position the vehicle at the curb or with other obstacles on the side. The side view looks from rear to front and, in case of danger, focuses automatically on possible obstacles.

Parking

CONTROLS

Turning the side view on/off

The selection window lets you choose the side view for the left or right side of the vehicle.

Press the button.

1. Select the icon for the desired vehicle side in the selection window. To exit the side view, select another camera view in the selection window.

3D view

Principle

With 3D view, a circle is displayed around the vehicle top view in the selection window.

Specified perspectives can be selected on the circle.

General information

The current perspective is marked with a camera icon.

Follow the information in the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.

Turning the 3D view on/off

Press the button.

1. ①D view"

To exit the 3D view, select another camera view on the left toolbar.

Car wash view

Principle

General information

Follow the information in the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.

Turning the car wash view on/off

Press the button.

1. "Car wash"

To exit the car wash view, select a different camera view in the left too bar.

Display

Your own lane is displayed for easier driving into a car wash.

This view can be used to position the vehicle correctly within the washing system guide rails.

In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll freely forward.

Additional information:

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 116.

Panorama View

Principle

The panoramic view gives you on earlier view

CONTROLS

Parking

General information

Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected relatively late from the driver's seat. The front camera and Rear View Camera capture the area around the side of the vehicle to improve the driver's view.

This function can be turned on automatically by saving activation points.

The camera image shows different levels of distortion in some areas and is thus not suitable for distance estimations.

Depending on vehicle equipment, the function can be used when driving forward or in reverse.

Follow the information in the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.

Sensors

The system is controlled by the following cameras:

▶ Rear View Camera.

Front camera.

Turning the panoramic view on/off

Press the button.

Display

Depending on the engaged selector lever position, the camera view of the Rear View Camera or front camera will be displayed.

Automatic activation of panorama view

Principle

Positions at which panorama view should switch on automatically can be saved as activation points.

General information

Up to ten activation points can be stored.

The activation points can be used when driving forward and, depending on national-market version, when reversing.

Follow instructions in the Parking assistance systems chapter.

Functional requirements

▶ A GPS signal must be received.

▶ Depending on national-market version: A BMW ID or driver profile must be activated.

The Rear View Camera and front camera must be installed.

The direction of travel, selector lever position, and vehicle angle must correspond to a stored activation point.

Storing activation points

1. Drive your vehicle to the location where you want the system to turn on, then stop.

Press the button.

1. "Activation point"

The concrete solution is displayed

Parking

CONTROLS

With the city/town.
With the city/town and the street.
▶ With the GPS coordinates.

Using activation points

The use of activation points can be switched on and off.

1. Settings!
2. Settings
3. "GPS-based"

Displaying activation points

A list of all activation points is displayed.

Editing activation points

1. 1235 and bottom
2. "Manage points"

A list of all activation points is displayed.

1. Select an activation point as needed.
2. Select the desired setting.

Door opening angle

Principle

Depending on vehicle equipment, the door opening angle display is shown automatically when stationary.

This display helps estimate how far the doors can be opened when parking.

General information

Follow the information in the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.

Display

Manual transmission: the maximum opening angles of the doors are displayed after a short time when the vehicle is stationary.
M Steptronic Sport transmission: the maximum opening angles of the doors are displayed in selectar lever position P.

System limits

The system does not provide a warning of approaching road users.
The vehicle's surroundings are distorted in the display for technical reasons.
Even if the door opening angle indicator on the control display does not overlap with any other objects, it is necessary to park carefully next to other objects.
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding objects may be closer than they appear on the control display.

Remote 3D View

Defects

CONTROLS

Parking

The function displays a snapshot of the situation.

General information

For reasons of data protection, the function can only be used three times within two hours. Follow the Information in the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.

Sensors

The system is controlled by the following cameras:

Front camera.

▶ Top view cameras.

▶ Rear View Camera.

Functional requirements

▶ Data transfer must be activated. Data protection, refer to page 6

The My BMW App must be installed on the mobile end device.

▶ ConnectedDrive countries: a BMW ID with an existing ConnectedDrive account must be activated. BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 64.

Activating/deactivating Remote 3D View

The function can be activated or deactivated individually or together with other functions.

1. 📄ps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

4. "Data privacy"

5. Select the desired setting.

System limits

The system may not be fully operational or may not be available in the following situations:

- With a door or the cargo area open. Dark fields in the display indicate areas that are not recorded by the system.

With manually folded-in exterior or mirrors.

▷ When other camera functions are being performed in the vehicle.

The vehicle moves faster than walking speed.

▶ In case of missing or weak Internet connection.

Park Distance Control

Principle

Park Distance Control assists with parking. Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles in front of or behind the vehicle.

Obstacles that are detected by the side ultrasonic sensors can also be reported.

General information

The range of the system, depending on obstacles and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.

An acoustic warning sounds in case of an impending collision at a distance to the object of approx. 27 In/70 cm.

For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic warning is issued as early as a distance to the object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.

Follow the information in the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.

Parking

CONTROLS

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

Due to high speeds when the Park Distance Control is activated, the warning can be delayed due to physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid driving off quickly while Park Distance Control is not yet active.

Sensors

The system is controlled by the following sensors:

Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bumpers.
Ultrasonic sensors, side.

Turning Park Distance Control on/off

Turning on the system automatically The system switches on automatically in the following situations:

2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance depends on the situation in question.

The automatic activation of detected obstacles can be activated or deactivated.

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
6. "Automatic PDC activation"

Turning off the system automatically When driving forward, the system turns off automatically as needed when a certain distance or speed is exceeded.

Turning the system on/off manually

Press the button.

On: the LED illuminates.

▶ Off: the LED goes out.

If the system is manually switched on when the reverse gear is engaged, the Rear View Camera image is displayed.
Depending on the national-market version, the system cannot be turned off manually when the reverse gear is engaged.

Acoustic warning

General information

An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle is approaching on object. E.g., when on object is detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a sound is heard from the rear left speaker.

The shorter the distance to the object, the shorter the intervals of the intermittent tones.

CONTROLS

Parking

When there are objects in front of and behind the vehicle at the same time, at a distance smaller than approx. 8 In/20 cm, an alternating continuous tone will sound between the front and rear speakers.

The intermittent tones and the continuous tone are turned off when selector lever position P is engaged.

Depending on national-market version, the intermittent tones are switched off after a short time when the vehicle is stationary.

If an object approaches when the vehicle is stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.

Adjusting the volume

The volume of the acoustic warning can be adjusted.

1. ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
6. "PDC signal volume"
7. Set the desired value.

Visual warning

General Information

The approach to an object is displayed on the control display as soon as the system is activated.

Objects that are farther away are already displayed before a signal sounds.

Depending on the view, pathway lines, turning circle lines and obstacle markings are shown for a better estimation of the space required.

Defending on vehicle environment. The cancer

If vehicle is equipped with Cross Traffic Warning: A warning is also shown on the display for vehicles approaching from the side at the rear and front.

To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle markings are displayed on the sides of the vehicle.

Display

Depending on vehicle equipment, warnings may be displayed in front of, next to, and behind the vehicle.

Example display of warnings behind the vehicle.

Example display of warnings next to the vehicle.

▶ Gray shaded area: Sensor detection range. No obstacles were detected within detection range.

- Coloured media in shaded areas Obstacles

Parking

CONTROLS

System limits

General information

The function for protecting the vehicle sides only shows stationary obstacles that were previously detected by the sensors when passing by.

The system does not detect whether an obstacle moves later on. When the vehicle is stationary, the gray shaded areas on the sides are hidden after a certain time. The area on the side of the vehicle must be newly captured.

Also follow the information on system limits in the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.

Unwarranted warnings

Reaching the system limits can cause unwarranted warnings.

To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance in car washes, turn off automatic Park Distance Control activation on obstacle detection.

Malfunction

An icon is displayed on the control display.

Depending on vehicle equipment: the sensor detection range may not be shown on the control display.

A Check Control message is displayed.

Park Distance Control may not be operational. Have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Active Park Distance Control

General information

Due to system limits, a collision cannot be prevented under all circumstances.

The function is available below walking speed when driving in reverse or rolling backward. Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts the brake intervention. Emergency braking is not performed.

After emergency braking to a stop, further creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Proceed with caution. To move forward, lightly press the accelerator pedal and release as needed.

If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer, the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possible at any time.

Follow the information in the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. In assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Sensors

The system is controlled by the following sensors:

▶ Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumpers.

CONTROLS

Parking

Deactivating Active Park Distance Control temporarily

After emergency braking, the function can be temporarily deactivated on the control display. A corresponding message is displayed.

1. "Configure"

2. "Deactivate temporarily"

During continued driving in this surrounding situation, no further emergency braking will occur.

The function is automatically reactivated when Park Distance Control is switched on again.

Settings

It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle will be protected by the system.

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
6. "Active PDC emergency braking"
7. Select the desired setting.

Display

As soon as the system engages, an icon is displayed with a corresponding message.

System limits

General Information

Follow the system limits in the "Porking assistance systems" chapter.

Automatic Parking Assistant

Principle

Automatic Parking Assistant provides support when parallel parking and parking transverse to the road.

The ultrasonic sensors measure both sides of the vehicle when driving slowly forward. Suitable parking spaces are calculated based on the objects detected, e.g., parking vehicles. The system status is displayed.

Manual transmission: the system calculates the best possible parking line for driving into parking spaces, and takes control of steering while parking.

M Steptronic Sport transmission: the system calculates the best possible parking line for driving into parking spaces, and takes control of the vehicle while parking.

The operating principle and operation of the system is divided into the following steps:

▶ Parking space search.

▷ Turning on.

Parking.

The parking maneuver while parking is performed automatically.

General information

Follow the Information in the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment in assessing the profile situation. Based on the rules of

Parking

CONTROLS

to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

The system can steer the vehicle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Parking methods

Park Assist supports the following functions:

Parallel parking: reverse parking parallel to the road.

Perpendicular parking: reverse parking perpendicular to the road.

▶ Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bumpers.
▶ Ultrasonic sensors, side.

Functional requirements

Measurement of parking spaces

Maximum speed while driving forward approx. 22 mph/35 km/h.

▶ Maximum distance to raw of parked vehicles: 5 ft/1.5 m.

Suitable parking space

Longitudinal parking:

▶ Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.

Minimum length of gap between two objects; own vehicle length plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m.

Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.

Perpendicular parking:

▶ Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.

Minimum width of the gap; own vehicle width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.

Minimum depth: own vehicle length. The depth of perpendicular parking spaces must be estimated by the driver. Due to technical limitations, the system is only able to approximate the depth of perpendicular parking spaces.

Parking operation

Doors and cargo area are closed.

M Steptronic Sport transmission: driver's seat belt is fastened.

Sensors

CONTROLS

Parking

If a parallel or perpendicular parking space is clearly detected, the system automatically adjusts to the suitable parking method. If there are parking spaces for parallel or perpendicular parking, both parking spaces are shown on the control display. The parking direction can be selected by selecting the parking space.

Turning the signal tone on/off

The signal tone for suitable parking spaces can be turned on and off.

1. 📄ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
6. "Sound when available"

Parking using the Automatic Parking Assistant

1. For the parking space search when driving past parked vehicles at a speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and a distance of max. 5 ft/1.5 m.

(«P») The parking space search is activated.

1. Press the gear.

The parking assistance systems view is displayed.

The status of the parking space search and possible parking spaces are displayed on the control display.

1. Select suggested parking method.

Green: the system takes control of the parking operation.

tomatic steering operation after changing gear on the stationary vehicle.

M Steptronic Sport transmission: the speed can be reduced using the brake. Other interventions will cancel the system. At the end of the parking operation, selector lever position P is set.

Depending on national-market version, an intermittent or continuous lone sounds for Park Distance Control.

The end of the parking operation is indicated on the control display.

1. Adjust the parking position yourself, if needed.

Canceling Automatic Parking Assistant manually

The Automatic Parking Assistant can be canceled manually at any time, e.g.:

Press the button.

▶ "Automatic Parking": select the icon on the control display.

Canceling Automatic Parking Assistant automatically

The system automatically cancels in situations such as the following:
- When the driver grasps the steering wheel or takes over steering.
- Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road. - When there are obstacles that are hard to overcome such as curbs.

When there are obstacles that suddenly appear,
- With insufficient distances, which are indicated by Park Distance Control

Parking

CONTROLS

When a maximum number of parking attempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded.

▶ When changing over to another function on the control display.

Manual transmission:

▶ If a gear is selected that does not match the instruction on the control display.

▶ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/10 km/h

The turn signal opposite to the desired parking side is switched on.

M Steptronic Sport transmission:

▶ With open cargo area.

With the doors open.

When setting the parking broke.

▶ When operating the accelerator pedal or the selector lever.

The brake pedal remains depressed for longer while the vehicle is at a standstill.

When unfastening the driver's seat belt.

A Check Control message is displayed where applicable.

Continuing the parking operation

An interrupted parking operation can be continued, if needed.

Restart the Automatic Parking Assistant and follow the Instructions on the control display.

System limits

General information

Follow the system limits in the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.

In tight curves.
▶ For diagonal parking spaces.
For parking spaces that are only marked with lines on the ground. The system orients itself according to objects.
For special parking spaces, e.g., metered parking spaces with automatic locking mechanisms, or mechanical parking systems.

Functional limitations

The system may be limited in the following situations:
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads.
On slippery ground.
On steep uphill or downhill grades.
▶ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space.
▶ In case of changes to an already-measured parking space.
▶ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge of a port.
- Parking spaces that are not suitable may be detected or suitable parking spaces may not be detected at all.

Malfunction

A Check Control message is displayed.

The Automatic Parking Assistant may not be operational. Have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Back-up assistant

CONTROLS

Parking

General information

The vehicle stores the driving movements of the last distance covered. This stored distance can be driven in reverse with automated steering.

The system takes over the steering. The driver must control the speed using the accelerator and broke pedals.

A maximum of 164 ft/50 m are stored.

Follow the information in the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.

Safety information

Warning

The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment. In assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate.

Warning

The system can steer the vehicle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate.

Functional requirements

Drive forward without interruption to store the distance covered.

Driving in reverse with automated steering

1. Turn on drive-ready state.

With the vehicle of a standstill, press or engage reverse gear.

The parking assistance systems view is displayed.

1. Back-Up Assistant

Follow the Instructions on the control display where required.

1. Take your hands off the steering wheel and carefully drive in reverse with the accelerator pedal and the brake.

Green: the system takes control of steering.

When driving in reverse, observe the vehicle's surroundings.

In case of obstacles, stop immediately and take over control of the vehicle. Follow the instructions for Park Distance Control.

1. Right before the end of the stored distance covered, a signal tone will sound and a message is displayed.

Stop no later than when normal road traffic is reached and take control of the vehicle such as by shifting to forward gear.

Canceling the Back-up Assistant manually

The assisted reversing by the Back-up Assistant can be concealed manually:

▶ Via touchscreen: Back-Up Assistant"

Press the button.

Parking

CONTROLS

When the driver grasps the steering wheel or takes over steering.
When shifting from reverse gear to another selector lever position.
▶ During activation or intervention by driver assistance systems.
▶ After an extended period of time when the vehicle is stationary.

When exiting the stored lane when reversing, for instance with maximum steering-wheel angle.
▶ When the view on the control display is overlaid with messages.
▶ In case of a slippery surface.
▶ When the vehicle is rolling such as on a slope.
In case of changed ambient conditions.
▶ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/9 km/h.

▶ Certain road characteristics such as gradients, inclines or slippery road surface.
▶ Greatly deviating conditions when storing and driving the route, for instance other tires or changed ambient conditions like weather.
Also follow the information on system limits in the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.

System limits

The maximum speed when reversing is limited to approx. 6 mph/9 km/h.
A warning is issued at a speed of approx. 4 mph/7 km/h.
If the maximum speed is exceeded, the function is interrupted.

After driving a stored distance covered with major steering-wheel angles, the function of the system will be limited for the return trip.
Different Influences can lead to side deviations when driving the stored distance covered in reverse. For example, this includes the following factors:
Steering movements when the vehicle is stationary while storing the distance cov-

CONTROLS

Driving comfort

Driving comfort

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Adaptive M chassis

Principle

By adjusting the dampers, the system reduces movement of the vehicle body when driving in a sporty way or on uneven roads.

This enhances the driving dynamics and driving comfort depending on the road condition and driving style.

Overview

Button in the vehicle

SETUP
SETUP

Programs

Program Damping settings

*COMFORT* Comfort-oriented.

"SPORT" Balanced out.

"SPORT PLUS" Consistently sporty.

Selecting a program

Using the button

SETUP Press the button and select the desired program on the control display.

Via iDrive

Adaptive M running gear settings can be configured in M Setup.

Additional Information:

M Setup, refer to page 191.

Display in the instrument cluster

When the display for M Setup is activated in the instrument cluster, the selected program is displayed.

Additional Information:

Central display area, refer to page 141.

Climate control

CONTROLS

Climate control

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Climate control

Overview

Functions in the Climate menu

Icon Function

	Turn the air conditioning system on/off.
AUTO	Automatic program.
72.0°F	Temperature,
A/C	Air conditioning.
MAX A/C	Maximum cooling.
	Air recirculation mode.

Icon Function

	Fresh air.
	Air flow.
	Air distribution.
SYNC	SYNC program.
	Seat heating.
	Active seat ventilation.
	Steering wheel heating.

Buttons, air conditioning system

CONTROLS

Climate control

Calling up climate control functions

The Climate menu can be accessed via iDrive:

Top the Icon for the Climate menu on the menu bar.

C

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Climate control"

Turning the air conditioning system on/off

The air conditioning system can be turned on/off via IDrive.

Top the icon for the Climate menu menu bar.

Tap the power button.

The entire air conditioning system is turned on/off with the last settings applied.

When the air conditioning system is on, individual climate control functions can be turned off. Make sure that there is sufficient ventilation when staying in the vehicle for extended periods of time with the air conditioning system off, e.g., when sleeping.

Settings

You can configure individual settings for climate control functions via iDrive, e.g.:
▶ Intensity of seat heating.
▶ Pre-ventilation.

Top the iron for the Climate menu

Automatic program

Principle

The automatic program ensures a comfortable climate, which can be adjusted by setting the desired temperature and configuring the settings.

The automatic program cools, ventilates or heats the vehicle interior automatically.

General information

Depending on the equipment, the automatic program provides the best possible settings for climate control functions depending on the outside temperature, interior temperature, sunlight, seat occupancy and the desired temperature setting:

▶ Air flow.

▷ Air distribution.

▷ Temperature.

▶ Seat heating.

▶ Active seat ventilation.

▶ Steering wheel heating.

The automatic program takes seat occupancy into account, regulating the climate in an energy-efficient manner that is tailored to the occupants.

At the same time, a condensation sensor controls the automatic program in order to prevent window condensation to the extent possible.

Climate control

CONTROLS

Overview

1 Settings
2 Air flow intensity
3 Climate control functions bar
4 Temperature
5 Seat heating

Steering wheel heating

Active seat ventilation

Turning the automatic program on/off

The AUTO program can be switched on or off via iDrive.

Top the icon for the Climate menu menu bar.

Top the AUTO program button.

Setting the intensity

When the automatic program is activated, the intensity of individual climate control functions, e.g., seat heating, is adjusted individually.

Each level has a specific control range of the intensity.

Based on the stored data models, the intensities are dynamically adjusted while driving. It is not necessary to manually change the desired intensity to lower or higher levels while driving.

The individually selected settings of the climate control functions are stored and automatically set up again such as after the vehicle is started again.

Display

The indicator on the menu bar provides information about the temperature difference between the configured desired temperature and current interior temperature:
The red or blue bar next to the temperature display indicates the progress of heating or cooling.
The desired interior temperature is reached as soon as the bar is no longer displayed.
Active climate control functions, e.g., seat heating, are indicated by the icons on the menu bar.

Temperature

Principle

The air conditioning system cools or heats to the set temperature, keeping the temperature constant.

General information

Do not rapidly switch between different temperature settings. Otherwise, the air conditioning system will not have enough time to adjust to the set temperature.

CONTROLS

Climate control

Setting the temperature

You can set the desired temperature for driver and front passenger individually on the menu bar.

▶ else the temperature.
▶ Lower the temperature.

Upper body temperature

General information

The air temperature in the upper body area can be adjusted.

This does not change the set interior temperature for the driver and front passenger.

Adjusting the upper body temperature

1. Top the icon for the Climate menu on the menu bar.
2. "Individual settings"
3. "Temperature adjustment upper body"
4. Increase or decrease temperature.

Air flow

Principle

Adjusting the air flow

The air flow can be set via iDrive:

1. Top the icon for the Climate menu on the menu bar.

1. Select the desired setting.

Automatic program:

▶ Top the large air flow icon to increase the air flow.

▶ Top the small air flow icon to reduce the air flow.

Manual mode:

▶ Top up arrow: increase air flow.

▶ Top down arrow: Reduce air flow.

Air distribution settings

Principle

In manual mode, the air distribution can be adjusted as needed.

Adjusting the air distribution

The air distribution can be set via iDrive:

1. Top the icon for the Climate menu on the menu bar.

1. Top the air distribution icon on the climate control functions bar.

2. Select the desired setting:

Aim the air flow into the footwell, arrow 1.

Climate control

CONTROLS

The selected air distribution is displayed.

Air conditioning

Principle

With the climate control function, the air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified, then warmed again depending on the temperature settings.

Functional requirement

Standby or drive-ready state is turned on.

Switching the cooling function on/off The air conditioning can be switched on or off via iDrive:

Tap the Icon for the Climate menu menu bar.

Top the air conditioning button.

In recirculated-air mode, air conditioning is automatically switched on to dry the air and avoid window condensation.

Depending on the weather, the windshield and the side windows may fog up briefly when drive-ready state is switched on.

Maximum cooling

Principle

Maximum cooling lets you cool the vehicle interior quickly and effectively.

The lowest temperature and the maximum air flow are set automatically.

The function is automatically activated in the rear when the SYNC program is turned on.

Functional requirement

The following functional requirements must be met for maximum cooling:

The outside temperature is higher than approx. 32°F / 0°C.

▶ Drive-ready state is switched on.

Turning maximum cooling on/off

Maximum cooling can be turned on or off via iDrive:

Top the icon for the Climate menu menu bar.

Top the maximum cooling button.

Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body area. Open the vents.

Air recirculation mode

Principle

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The purpose then repreculator the involar air

CONTROLS

Climate control

When the air recirculation is turned off, outside air is directed into the interior.

General information

If there is window condensation, turn off the air recirculation.

The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh air or the circulated interior air in recirculation mode.

Turning air recirculation on/off

Air recirculation mode can be switched on or off via Drive:

Top the icon for the Climate menu menu bar.

1. The current operating mode is displayed on the climate control functions bar. Top the button until the desired operating mode is set.

Depending on vehicle equipment, the air recirculation turns off automatically after some time based on the ambient conditions in order to prevent condensation.

SYNC program

Principle

If the SYNC program is activated, the settings

adjusted automatically in the automatic program depending on seal occupancy:

▶ If the front passenger seat is unoccupied, the settings for the driver's side are applied to the front passenger side.

▶ If the seats in the rear are unoccupied, the default settings for the rear are applied.

When the seat is occupied again, the most recent settings are reapplied.

General information

The following settings can be applied:

▷ Temperature.

▶ Air distribution.

Turning the SYNC program on/off The SYNC program can be switched on or off via iDrive:

Defrost function

Principle

With the defrost function, ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front slide windows.

The air flow and air temperature are automatically optimized for the removal of ice and con-

Climate control

CONTROLS

If there is window condensation, turn on the automatic program to take advantage of the condensation sensor.

When the defroster is on, the rear air conditioning system is deactivated to provide maximum performance.

Turning the defrost function on/off

Press the defrost button on the instrument panel.

The LED of the button is illuminated. The system is switched on.

Make sure that air is able to flow to the wind-shield and front side windows.

Rear window defroster

Principle

The rear window heating quickly removes ice and condensation from the rear window, depending on the outside temperature.

The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time.

Functional prerequisite

Drive-ready state is switched on.

Turning the rear window defroster on/off

To turn the rear window heating on/off, press the rear window heating button on the instrument panel.

The LED in the button illuminates when the rear window heating is turned on.

General information

If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes after an intermediate stop, the functions are turned on automatically with the temperature that was last set.

Adjusting seat heating

Automatic program

When the automatic program is activated, the intensity of seat heating can be adjusted. As you drive, the heater output is automatically adjusted according to your set intensity.

Adjusting seat heating manually

The heater output level can be adjusted manually:

1. Tap the seat climate control icon on the menu bar, arrow 1.

Tap the seat heating button repeat- till the desired level is selected, ar-

To turn off the seat heating, press and hold the seat heating button for approx. three seconds.

Active seat ventilation

CONTROLS

Climate control

Adjusting active seat ventilation

Automatic program

When the AUTO program is on, the intensity of seat ventilation can be adjusted. As you drive, the ventilation is automatically adjusted according to the set intensity.

Adjusting the active seat ventilation manually

The ventilation level can be adjusted manually:

1. Tap the seat climate control icon on the menu bar, arrow 1.

2. Top the seat ventilation button repeatedly until the desired level is selected, arrow 2.

Steering wheel heating

Principle

The system heats the steering wheel as necessary.

Adjusting steering wheel heating

Automatic program

Adjusting steering wheel heating manually

The heater output level can be adjusted manually:

1. Top the seat climate control icon on the menu bar, arrow 1.

2. Top the steering wheel heating button repeatedly until the desired level is selected, arrow 2.

Ventilation

Principle

The ventilation system offers individual adjustment ranges for direct/indirect ventilation in order to optimize the flow of air within the vehicle.

General information

Open the air vents and position them to ensure effective air conditioning.

The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending on the set desired temperature.

Climate control

CONTROLS

Front ventilation

Setting the air flow direction and air volume at the vent.

Change air flow direction: push the adjustment knob in the desired air flow direction.
Changing the air volume:
Turn adjustment knob clockwise: the air flow is increased.
Turn adjustment knob counterclockwise: the air flow is decreased.

Ventilation in the rear

Change the air flow direction, arrows 1.
Variably opening/closing the air vents, arrow 2.

Setting the ventilation

Depending on the desired ventilation, align the

Air quality

General information

The air quality in the interior is improved by the following components:

Emission tested passenger compartment.
Interior filter.
▶ Air conditioning system to control the temperature, air flow, and air recirculation.
▶ Pre-ventilation.

Interior filter

The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh air or the circulated interior air in recirculation mode.
Depending on the equipment:

Dust and pollen is filtered out from the inflowing air.
Nano-particle emissions are reduced.
Gaseous pollutants are filtered.
▶ Microbial particles, viruses and allergens are filtered.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends having the interior filter changed during vehicle maintenance.

Pre-ventilation

Principle

The car's interior can be cooled or heated before driving off with the pre-ventilation. Depending on the set temperature and ambient temperature, the vehicle interior is ventilated or, depending on model variant, heated using the residual engine heat.

CONTROLS

Climate control

The activation time is determined based on the outside temperature. The system promptly switches on before the selected departure time.

The system switches off automatically after a certain period of time. The system continues to run for some time after being switched off.

Functional requirements

The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.
The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged. If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the maximum activation time to save the vehicle battery. The system will be available again after the engine is started or after a short trip.
▶ Time and date are set correctly.
The air vents are open.

Switching pre-ventilation on/off

1. Top the icon for the Climate menu on the menu bar.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-ventilation"
4. Select the desired setting.

Departure time

General information

Different departure times can be set to ensure a comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at the time of departure.

One-time departure time; the time can be set.

The system is switched on once

On the desired weekdays, the system will be switched on before the set departure time.

The departure time is preselected in two steps:

Set departure times.

▶ Activate departure times.

Preventilation at the departure time can only be activated once.

Wait at least 10 minutes between setting and activating the departure time and deporting at the planned time. This gives the air conditioning sufficient time to bring the vehicle interior to the desired temperature.

Setting the departure time

1. Top the icon for the Climate menu on the menu bar.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-ventilation"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Select the desired departure time.
6. Set the desired departure time.
7. Select day of the week, if needed.

Activating the departure time

1. Top the icon for the Climate menu on the menu bar.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-ventilation"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Activate the desired departure time.

Climate control

CONTROLS

Display on the instrument cluster

Icon Description

Icon illuminates: a depart-

ture time is activated.

Icon flashes: pre-ventilo-

tion is switched on.

Activating with My BMW App

Depending on vehicle equipment, the My BMW App with remote functionality can be used to turn on precooling at a preset departure time or immediately.

Pre-conditioning through Remote Engine Start

Principle

Pre-conditioning cools or heats the car's interior prior to start of the trip to a comfortable temperature. This system automatically cools, ventilates, and heats depending on the inside/outside temperature and set temperature. Snow and ice may be removed more easily.

This system starts the engine automatically and lets it run for a limited time.

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pollute the area in and around the vehicle or penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are colorless and

pre-conditioning in enclosed areas or areas with insufficient ventilation, e.g. in enclosed garages.

Warning

When pre-conditioning is in operation, high temperatures can occur underneath the body, for instance caused by the exhaust system. If combustible materials such as leaves or grass come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, these materials can ignite. There is a risk of fire, injury, and property damage. Make sure that no combustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts during pre-conditioning, e.g. leaves, grass, natural gas, gasoline, oil or other combustible objects.

Functional requirements

The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.

Battery is sufficiently charged.
The fuel tank is at a sufficient level.
Hood is closed.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly.
Air vents are open.

Enabling the automatic engine start function

The automatic engine start must be enabled before using the system. Otherwise, the engine cannot switch on automatically to climate the cor's Interior.

Top the icon for the Climate menu

- 10.25 - 10.30

CONTROLS

Climate control

1. "Start engine for climate control"
2. Confirm the disclaimer.

Turning on/turning off the pre-conditioning

General information

The system switches off automatically after max. 15 minutes for safety reasons.

The system can be switched on a maximum of two times in a row.

The system will be available again as soon as the drive-ready state is activated and deactivated again.

Switching on via iDrive

Top the icon for the Climate menu menu bar.

1. "General settings"
2. "Pre-conditioning"
3. "Start now"

Switching on/off via vehicle key

The system can be switched on and off using the vehicle key.

Press the button on the vehicle key three times within 1 second.

The engine turns on approx. 3 seconds after the vehicle key is pressed.

To switch off the system, press the button again three times.

Turning off with the Start/Stop button

This system can be turned off directly by pushing the Start/Stop button without depressing

Air conditioning for departure time

General information

Scheduled departure times can be set up in the system to ensure a comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at the time of departure.

▶ One-time departure time: the time of the scheduled departure can be set.

The system is switched on once.

Departure time with weekday: time and day of the week of the scheduled departure can be set.

The departure time is preselected in two steps:

▷ Set departure times.

▶ Activate departure times.

The system is activated automatically a few minutes before the set departure time. The system remains switched on for a short time after the set departure time.

For safety reasons, the air conditioning can only be activated once for the departure time.

The system will be available again as soon as the drive-ready state is activated and deactivated again.

Observe the information about the intended use of the vehicle.

Additional information:

For Your Own Safety, refer to page 9.

Setting the departure time

Top the icon for the Climate menu menu bar.

1. "General settings"
2. "Pre-conditioning"

Climate control

CONTROLS

Activating the departure time

1. Top the icon for the Climate menu on the menu bar.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Activate the desired departure time.

Display

In the instrument cluster:

The engine runs for the purpose of operating the pre-conditioning. The vehicle is not ready to drive.

Icon Description

Icon on the Instrument

panel.

Icon illuminates: a depar-

ture time is activated.

Icon flashes: pre-condition-

Ing Is switched on.

Confirmation signals from the vehicle

The activation of the system is confirmed by fleshing twice.

The parking lights are switched on as long as the system is switched on.

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

Interior equipment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Integrated universal remote control

Principle

The integrated universal remote control in the Interior mirror can operate remote-controlled systems such as garage door openers, alarm systems or locking systems.

General information

The integrated universal remote control replaces various hand-held transmitters for remote-controlled systems. The buttons on the interior mirror must be programmed before they can be used.

If possible, do not install the antenna of the remote-controlled system near metal objects to ensure the best possible operation.

Safety information

Warning

The operation of remote-controlled systems with the integrated universal remote control

during programming and operation. Also follow the safety instructions of the hand-held transmitter.

Overview

▷ Buttons, arrow 1.

▷ LED, arrow 2.

▶ Hand-held transmitter of the remote-controlled system, arrow 3.

Compatibility

If this icon is printed on the packaging or in the operating instructions of the remote-controlled system, the system

is generally compatible with the integrated universal remote control.

Additional questions are answered by:

▶ An authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

www.homelink.com on the Internet.

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.

For any additional questions, contact an au-

Programming the integrated universal remote control

Functional requirements

To program the integrated universal remote control, the following functional requirements must be met:

To ensure optimum range of the Integrated universal remote control, the hand-held transmitter's battery must be fully charged at the time of programming.
The vehicle is parked within range of the remote-controlled system.
There are no persons or objects in the area around the remote-controlled system.
▶ Standby state is switched on.

Programming individual buttons

1. Select desired button on the interior mirror:

Program available button: Press the button.

▶ Program already assigned button: Press and hold the button for approx. 20 seconds.

The LED on the interior mirror will slowly begin flashing orange.

1. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the remote-controlled system approx. 1 to 3 in/3 to 8 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror.

The required distance depends on the hand-held transmitter and can be found in the operating instructions for the remote-controlled system.

1. Press and hold the button on the hand-held transmitter until the LED on the Interior mirror illuminates green. Programming is com-

▶ LED flashes green: The hand-held transmitter has been detected but programming is not complete. Continue with the specific features for rolling code radio systems.
▶ If the LED does not illuminate green after 60 seconds, programming could not be completed. Repeat the programming procedure.

Special feature of the rolling code wireless system

For systems with a rolling code radio system, the integrated universal remote control and the system also have to be synchronized. Refer to information on synchronization in the operating instructions of the remote-controlled system. Synchronization is easier with the aid of a second person.

1. Program the desired button on the interior mirror.
2. Press the synchronize button on the remote-controlled system, e.g., on the garage door.
3. Within 30 seconds, press and hold the programmed button on the interior mirror for approx. 3 seconds.

When synchronization is complete, the programmed function is performed, e.g., opening the garage door.

If the function is not performed, reject this step up to three times, if necessary, until the synchronization is complete and the programmed function is performed as desired.

Operation

After programming, the remote-controlled system can be operated with the button on the interior mirror.

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

The interior mirror LED illuminates green while the wireless signal is being transmitted.

Deleting a button assignment

The programming for the Interior mirror buttons can be deleted, e.g., before selling the vehicle.

Press and hold the two outer buttons on the Interior mirror simultaneously for approx. 10 seconds until the LED flashes green.

All stored button assignments will be deleted.

Sun visor

Glare shield

Fold the sun visor down or up.

Glare shield from the side

Folding the sun visor out

1. Fold the sun visor down.

2. Detach it from the holder and swing it to- ward the side window.

Folding the sun visor in

Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun visor.

Vanity mirror

A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind a cover.

Sockets

Principle

General information

The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts.

Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors.

Safety information

Warning

Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags such as portable navigation devices can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's interior while unfolding. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Make sure that devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.

Warning

Battery chargers that charge the vehicle battery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V electrical system. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the jump-start terminals in the engine compartment.

Warning

If metal objects fall or are plugged into electronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports, these objects can cause a short circuit and destroy the interface. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Make sure to prevent metal objects from falling or being plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

Front center console

1. Press on the cover.

1. A socket is located between the cup holders. Detach the cover.

USB port

Principle

The USB port is an interface used to connect mobile devices to the vehicle via USB cable. Data can then be sent or the mobile device can be charged.

General information

The available functions of the USB port are indicated by an icon,

Icon Meaning

Compatible mobile devices are supplied with charging current.

USB sticks, for example, can be connected to USB ports that support data transfer in order to play audio or to update navigation data. Compatible mobile devices are supplied with charging current.

The following mobile devices can be connected to the USB port with data transmission: ▷ Mobile phones.

Audio device.

▶ USB storage devices.

Additional information:

USB audio or map update, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication, refer to page 6.

Safety information

Warning

If metal objects fall or are plugged into electronic interfaces, e.g., sockets or USB ports, these objects can cause a short circuit and destroy the Interface. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Make sure to prevent metal objects from falling or being plugged into electronic interfaces. Insert the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket.

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

In the center armrest

A USB port is located in the center armrest.

Properties:

▶ USB port Type C.
▶ For charging mobile devices.
▶ Charge current: max. 3 A.

In the front center console

NOTICE

Objects in the storage compartment, e.g., large USB connectors, may block or damage the cover when it is being opened or closed. There is a risk of property damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the cover is clear while opening and closing it.

if necessary, push on the cover.

A USB port is located in the center console.

Properties:

▶ USB port Type A.
▶ For charging mobile devices and for data transfer.

Charge current: max. 1.5 A.

Functional requirement

The mobile device must support the maximum charging current of the USB port.
The mobile device must support Mass Storage Class mode.

Compatible device with USB port.
A compatible file system is installed on the mobile device. FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended formats.

Connecting the device

Connect the USB device using a suitable
adapter cable to a USB port.
Follow the following when connecting:
Do not use force when plugging the connector into the USB port.
- Use a flexible adapter cable.
- Protect the USB device against mechanical damage.
▶ Due to the large number of USB devices

temperatures, refer to the operating instructions of the device.

Due to the many different compression techniques, proper playback of the media stored on the USB device cannot be guaranteed in all cases.
To ensure that saved data is transferred properly, do not charge the USB device from the 12V socket if the USB device is connected to a USB port.
It may be necessary to configure the device settings in order to enable data transferring.

The connected USB device is shown in the device list on the control display.

Non-compatible USB devices

USB hard drives.
USB hubs.
USB memory card readers with multiple slots.
HFS-formatted USB devices.
Devices such as fans or bulbs.
Devices with a power consumption of more than 1.5 A or 3 A at 5 V, depending on the type of USB port.

Wireless charging tray

Principle

The wireless charging tray is used to wirelessly charge Qi-certified smartphones.

General information

When inserting the smartphone to be charged, make sure that there is nothing between the

Safety information

Warning

When charging a QI-compatible device in the wireless charging tray, metal objects on the tray with the device can become very hot. Storage media or electronic cards, e.g., chip cords, cards with magnetic strips, or cards for transmitting signals, may not function correctly when placed together on the tray with the device. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. When charging mobile devices, make sure there are no objects on the tray with the device.

NOTICE

The tray is intended for mobile phones up to a particular size. Forceful inserting of the mobile phone into the tray can damage the tray or the mobile phone. There is a risk of property damage. Observe the maximum dimensions for mobile phones. Do not force the mobile phone into the tray.

Overview

Wireless charging tray in center console:

1LED

CONTROLS

Interior equipment

1 Car mount

2 LED

Functional requirements

The following functional requirements apply for the wireless charging tray:

The smartphone being charged must be Qi-certified.

Standby state is switched on.

▶ Protective sleeves and covers must be suitable for wireless charging.

Wireless charging tray in center console:

Smartphone must not exceed maximum dimensions of approx. 6.0 x 3.1 x 0.7 in/154.5 x 80 x 18 mm.

The smartphone being charged has been placed in the center of the wireless charging tray. The smartphone display is facing up.

Wireless charging tray in center armrest:

The mobile phone must not exceed a maximum size of approx. 5.9 x 3.6 x 0.62 in/150 x 91.5 x 16 mm.

The smartphone being charged has been placed in the center of the wireless charging tray. The smartphone display is facing the holder.

Inserting a smartphone

Wireless charging tray in center console

1. If necessary, open the tray cover.

2. Place the smartphone in the center of the wireless charging tray, with the display facing up.

3. To avoid distraction from the smartphone display, close the tray cover as necessary.

Wireless charging tray in center arm-rest

1. Open the center armrest.

2. Depending on the thickness of the smartphone, pull the holder out from the bottom, arrow 1. If necessary, swivel out the upper edge, arrow 2.

1. Slide the smartphone into the tray with the display facing the phone holder.

Interior equipment

CONTROLS

LED displays

Color Meaning

Blue Smartphone is charging.

The blue LED continues to illuminate when the QI-capable smartphone is fully charged.

Or- ang

Smartphone is not charging. Temperature on the smartphone may be too high, or foreign object may be in charging tray.

Red Smartphone is not charging.

Contact on authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

▶ If storage media or electronic cards, e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic stripes, or cards for signal transmission, are located between the smartphone and wireless charging tray.

▶ Due to protective sleeves and covers that exceed a thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm.

Due to protective sleeves and covers made of unsuitable material, e.g., with magnetic parts.

▶ Due to add-on parts for the smartphone, e.g., holders.

By configuring the smartphone settings, e.g., for charging. Follow the instructions given on the control display and smartphone, as applicable.

Forgotten warning

General information

A warning may be issued if a QI-certified smartphone was forgotten in the wireless charging tray when leaving the vehicle.

The forgotten warning is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Enable/Disable Forgotten Warning

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "System settings"

4. "Wireless charging tray"

5. "Mobile phone reminder"

System limits

The charge current may be reduced or charging may be temporarily interrupted in the wireless charging tray in the following situations:

CONTROLS

Storage compartments

Storage compartments

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Safety information

Warning

When driving, loose items or devices connected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile phones, may be thrown around the vehicle, e.g., in the event of an accident or when braking or performing evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Secure loose objects or devices that are connected to the vehicle via a cable.

Warning

Breakable objects such as glass bottles or glasses can break in the event of an accident, braking or an evasive maneuver. Broken gloss can be scattered in the cor's interior. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Do not use any breakable objects while driving. Only slow breakable objects in closed storage compartments.

deploy. In addition, objects in the open storage compartment can be thrown into the vehicle interior during the trip, for instance, in the event of an accident or when braking or making an evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Always close storage compartments immediately after use.

Warning

Anti-slip pods such as anti-slip mats can damage the dashboard. Attached objects could come loose. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Do not use anti-slip pods.

Glove compartment

Opening the glove compartment

Pull the handle.

Closing the glove compartment Fold the lid closed.

Storage compartments

CONTROLS

After the glove compartment has been locked, the vehicle key can be given to someone without the integrated key, for example, when the car is being parked by a parking attendant.

Additional information: Integrated key, refer to page 63.

Fold-out compartment

Opening the fold-out compartment

Press the button and open the cover.

Storage tray in center console

Opening the storage compartment

Press on the cover.

Front center armrest

General information

A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the seats.

Opening the center armrest

Press the button.

Closing the center armrest Press the lid down until it engages.

Front cup holder

Safety information

Warning

Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may damage the cup holders or be thrown about the car's interior in the event of an accident, on evasive maneuver, or forceful broking. Spilled liquids can distract from the surrounding traffic conditions, lead to an accident and damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or lead to scolding. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Do not force objects Into the cup

CONTROLS

Storage compartments

ers. Clean up spilled liquids immediately. Do not transport hot beverages.

Opening the cup holder

Press on the cover.

Two cup holders are located in the center console.

Closing the cup holder

Pull the cover on the handle back.

Coat hooks

General information

The cool hooks are located in the grab handles In the rear.

Safety information

Warning

Clothing articles on the coat hooks can obstruct the view while driving. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. When suspending clothing articles from the coat hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the driver's view.

Warning

Improper use of the coat hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Only hang lightweight objects, for instance clothing articles, from the coat hooks.

Cargo area

CONTROLS

Cargo area

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Loading

Safety information

Warning

High gross vehicle weight can overheat the tires, damage them internally and cause a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving characteristics may be negatively impacted, reducing directional stability, lengthening the broking distances and changing the steering response. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Pay attention to the permitted load-carrying capacity of the tires and never exceed the permitted gross vehicle weight.

Warning

When driving, loose items or devices connected to the vehicle with a cable, i.e., mobile phones, may be thrown around the vehicle, e.g., in the event of an accident or when braking or performing evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage

Warning

Improperly stowed objects can slip and be thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or on evasive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit and injured. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Slow and secure objects and cargo properly.

NOTICE

Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage. There is a risk of property damage. Make sure that no fluids look in the cargo area.

Steps for determining correct load limit

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs" on the vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in the vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in the vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 [5 x 150] = 650 lbs).

CONTROLS

Cargo area

available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

1. If the vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to the vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of the vehicle.

Payload

The maximum payload is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo.

The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported.

Stowing and securing cargo

▶ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo.
Do not stack cargo above the upper edge of the backrests.
▶ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to stow large cargo.
▶ Fosten the olds for securing the load to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
▶ Small and light cargo; secure with tension-ing straps or tension bonds or with a cargo net.
▶ Larger and heavy cargo secure with cargo straps.

of the rear seat backrests. When the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer seat belts in the opposite buckle.

Lashing eyes in the cargo area

General information

Attach auxiliary materials to secure the cargo such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw straps, or cargo nets to the lashing eyes.

Overview

The lashing eyes are located in the cargo area.

Multifunction hook

General information

Cargo area

CONTROLS

Safety information

Warning

Improper use of the multifunction hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about, e.g., during broking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Only hang lightweight objects from the multifunction hooks. Heavy luggage in the cargo area must be properly secured.

Net

Smaller items can be stowed behind the net on the left side.

Storage compartment on the right side

A storage compartment is available on the right side of the cargo area.

Storage compartment on the left side

A storage compartment is located on the left side in the cargo area.

Through-loading system

Principle

The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrests.

rately. The left rear seat backrest can be folded down together with the center section.

The rear seat backrests can be folded down from the cargo area. The center section can be separately folded down from the rear.

Safety information

Warning

Vehicle parts can be damaged or body parts jammed when folding down the rear seat backrest. There is a risk of injury or risk of property damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the rear seat backrest including head restraint is clear when folding down.

Warning

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unsecured cargo can be thrown about the car's interior; for instance, in the event of an accident, braking or on evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest is locked after folding it back.

Warning

The stability of the child restraint system is limited or compromised with incorrect seat setting or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the height of the head restrolints or remove them.

CONTROLS

Cargo area

Folding down the rear seat backrest

From the cargo area

Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area to release the rear seat backrest.
▶ Left lever: fold down the left and middle rear seat backrest.
▶ Right lever: fold down the right rear seat backrest.

Folding back the rear seat backrest Return the rear seat backrest to the seat position and engage it.

Folding down middle section

Pull lever and fold the center section forward.

Cargo area

CONTROLS

DRIVING TIPS

BMW M4 technology

BMW M4 technology

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

High-performance engine

General information

The power and torque values of the high-performance engine with a displacement of 3 liters are as follows:

BMW M4 Power and torque values

Standard equipment	473 hp/406 lb-ft/550 Nm
Competition model	503 hp/479 lb-ft/650 Nm
Competition model xDrive	523 hp/479 lb-ft/650 Nm
CS 544 hp/479 lb-ft/650 Nm

With its spontaneous response characteristics, a very wide usable rotational speed range results. The maximum RPM is 7,200 rpm and is electronically controlled. Because of the high engine dynamics, the maximum RPM with the vehicle stationary is reduced.

Warm-up

During the engine warm-up phase, the cold start occurs at an increased idle speed, which leads to increased acoustics of the exhaust system.

Additional information:

Tachometer, refer to page 139.

Engine oil temperature, refer to page 140.

Compound brake

General information

The high-performance brake system has performed compound brake disks.

Due to the specific design, temporary function-related noise may occur after an extended minor load.

The function-related noises have no effect on the performance, operational reliability, and durability of the brake.

Correct braking

To prevent function-related noises, depress the brakes hard a few times in regular intervals. Ensure that the traffic situation permits the braking.

With moisture on the brake disks, the brake system may be operated dry to prevent noise.

M carbon ceramic brake

General information

The high-performance brake system has per-

BMW M4 technology

DRIVING TIPS ⓘ

minor brake load or in wet conditions, just before the vehicle comes to a standstill.

The function-related noises have no effect on the performance, operational reliability, and durability of the brake.

The effects of moisture and rood salt from using a car wash, dew formation overnight, driving in rain, etc., may render the braking effect comparable to that of a conventional brake system. If necessary, this reduced braking effect can be compensated for by depressing the brake with greater pedal force.

Correct braking and washing

To prevent function-related noises, depress the brakes hard a few times in regular intervals. Ensure that the traffic situation permits the braking.

With moisture on the brake disks, the brake system may be operated dry to prevent noise. First clean brake disks and callpers with a steam cleaner or high pressure cleaner before washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash. This prevents soft crystals, for instance, from causing crusty deposits or buildup to form if the vehicle then remains stationary for a period of time. The cleaning effect of automatic car washes is usually not adequate for this in the area around the wheels.

Drivetrain

With this vehicle, particular value was placed on the direct connection from engine to the drivetrain. Due to the torsionally rigid design of the drivetrain, as is typical in a sports car, the transmission of the torque also gives acoustic feedback.

10/2023 these are lead shampoed this year.

The M xDrive all-wheel-drive system establishes variable torque distribution to the front and rear axles. The combination of M xDrive, active M differential, and on Adaptive M chassis in this vehicle ensures a high degree of driving dynamics that is typical of BMW M.

DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving

Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Break-in procedures

General information

Moving parts need to work together smoothly. The following instructions will help you to achieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency.

During break-in, do not use the Launch Control.

Safety information

Warning

Due to new ports and components, safety and driver assistance systems can react with a delay. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. After installing new ports or with a new vehicle, drive conservatively and intervene early if necessary. Observe the break-in procedures of the respective ports and components.

Engine, transmission, and final drive unit

Avoid full throttle or kickdown under all circumstances.

From 600 miles/1,000 km to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Drive at varying engine speeds and vehicle speeds, but do not exceed 6,000 rpm and 130 mph/210 km/h.

Avoid full load in gears 1 to 3.

At 1,200 miles/2,000 km

Have break-in service maintenance performed.

Tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing circumstances when tires are brand new. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system

Brake disks and brake pads must be broken in to avoid possible brake noise. Drive cautiously for the first approx. 300 miles/500 km.

For M carbon ceramic broke:

Drive cautiously for the first approx. 600 miles/1000 km.

Clutch

The function of the clutch reaches its optimal level only after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement

General driving notes

Closing the trunk lid

Safety Information

Warning

An open trunk lid protrudes from the vehicle and can endanger occupants and other road users or damage the vehicle in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust gas or water may enter the vehicle interior. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Do not drive with the trunk lid open.

Driving with the trunk lid open

If the vehicle still needs to be driven with the trunk lid open:

Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
Greatly increase the blower output.
Drive moderately.
Secure the trunk lid, e.g., with a tensioning bell.

Ground clearance

NOTICE

If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g., underground garage entrances, speed bumps, or curbs, the ground may come into contact with vehicle ports, e.g., spoiler, and the underbody. There is a risk of property damage. Ensure that there is sufficient ground clearance available. Adjust your driving style to the respective conditions.

Driving at high speeds

Warning

Damage to vehicle components can negatively impact handling at high speeds. This includes, among other things, tires, underbody and parts for improving aerodynamics. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Have damage corrected by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Do not drive at high speeds until the damage is corrected.

Hot exhaust system

Warning

High temperatures can occur underneath the body, for instance caused by the exhaust system, while driving. Contact with the exhaust system can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the exhaust system, including the exhaust pipe, when hot.

Warning

If combustible materials such as leaves or grass come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, these materials can ignite. There is a risk of fire and an injury hazard. Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no combustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts while driving, in Neutral or during parking.

Exhaust gas particulate filter

DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving

temperatures to clean the exhaust gas particulate filter as necessary.

General information

Depending on vehicle equipment and national-market version, the vehicle is equipped with an exhaust particulate filter. For more information on the exhaust particulate filter, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

The following may occur when cleaning for several minutes:

The combustion engine may not run as smoothly for a short time.
▶ A somewhat higher RPM is necessary to reach usual power development.
▶ Fuel consumption may be higher. The higher fuel consumption is included as mean value in the display for the current consumption.
The exhaust system is emitting a small amount of smoke, even after the engine is shut off.
There is audible noise, e.g., radiator fan is running, even several minutes after the engine is shut off.

Overrun of the radiator fan for several minutes is normal even after short trips.

Condensation in drive system

Various driving profiles ensure that the drive system functions properly. A driving style with consistently low loads can negatively affect overall functionality, e.g., condensation forming in the drive system. Occasionally running the engine longer with higher loads can counteract this.

Driving through water

▶ Only drive through when the combustion engine is running.
To prevent the combustion engine from switching off, deactivate the Auto Start/Stop function, e.g., engage selector lever position S.
The combustion engine also does not shut off in selector lever position R.
▶ Drive through calm water only.
▶ Drive through water only up to a maximum height of 9.8 inches/25 cm.
▶ Drive through water at a maximum of walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.

Additional information:

Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 110.

Safety Information

NOTICE

When driving too quickly through deep water, the water can penetrate the engine compartment, the electrical system, or the transmission. There is a risk of property damage. When driving through water, do not exceed the maximum indicated water level and the maximum speed for driving through water.

Braking safely

General information

The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Braking System as a standard feature.

Perform full braking when appropriate. To achieve the best possible braking assistance, do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during full braking. Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a mini-

Things to remember when driving

DRIVING TIPS i

In certain braking situations, the perforated broke disks can emit function-related noises. However, function-related noises have no effect on the performance and operational reliability of the brake.

Objects in the travel path of the pedals

Warning

Objects in the driver's footwell can limit the pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Slow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's footwell. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning.

Pedal feel when driving off

After turning on drive-ready state from idle state, the pedal may feel unusual, e.g., the pedal travel path may feel short or long. After the broke pedal has been fully released, the pedal will feel as usual again.

Driving in wet conditions

In case of wet roads, exposure to road salt or in heavy rain, gently depress the broke pedal every few kilometers. Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users.

The heat generated while braking dries brake disks and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

Hills

General Information

Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the brake system may overheat and reduce braking effect.

You can increase the engine braking effect by downshifting, going all the way to first gear, if needed.

Safety Information

Warning

Light but constant pressure on the brake pedal can lead to high temperatures, brake wear, and even failure of the brake system. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Avoid placing excessive load on the brake system.

Warning

In Neutral or with drive-ready state switched off, safety functions, for instance engine braking effect, braking assistance and steering assistance, may be restricted or not available. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Do not attempt to drive in Neutral or with drive-ready state switched off.

Brake disk corrosion

Corrosion on the broke disks and contamination on the brake pods are increased by the following circumstances:

Low mileage.

Extended stationary periods.

DRIVING TIPS

Things to remember when driving

Corrosion buildup on the brake disks will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes when braking slowly - generally this cannot be corrected.

Condensation water under the parked vehicle

Condensation may form in the vehicle air-conditioning system.

Condensation leaking under the vehicle is due to technical reasons and does not constitute a malfunction.

Driving on racetracks

General information

Before and after driving on a racetrack, have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Higher mechanical and thermal foods during racetrack operation lead to increased wear. Use of the vehicle in M Sport or motor sport type competition is an improper use of the vehicle and may affect your warranty coverage. Please consult the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Booklet for further information on warranty matters.

The standard broke pads and the wear indicators are not designed for racetrack operation.

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport or motorsport-like competition. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Do not use the vehicle for motorsport or motor-

Sport tires

The vehicle manufacturer recommends using special sport tires, e.g., high-performance tires. Sports tires are matched to the special requirements of a sporty driving style. For more information on sport tires, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Slowly increasing the load

When driving on a racetrack, increase the duration of the load slowly.

Roof bars

General information

Roof racks are available as optional accessories.

Safety information

Warning

When driving with a roof load, e.g., roof bars, the vehicle's center of gravity is higher. This increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situations. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Drive with roof load only with activated Dynamic Stability Control.

Roof strip with flaps

The mounting points are located in the roof strip above the doors.

Things to remember when driving

DRIVING TIPS i

Fold the cover outward.

Installation

Follow the assembly instructions for the roof bars.

Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof.

Loading

Because luggage racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response.

When loading and driving, note the following:

Do not exceed the approved roof/axle weights and the approved gross vehicle weight.
Distribute the roof load uniformly.
The roof load should not extend past the loading area.
Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom.
Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance using luggage straps.
Do not let objects project into the swiveling range of the trunk lid.
Drive carefully. Do not drive off or broke suddenly or take corners at speed.

DRIVING TIPS

Saving fuel

Saving fuel

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Reducing fuel consumption

Principle

The vehicle contains advanced technologies for the reduction of consumption and emission values.

There are some actions you can take to change your fuel consumption and environmental impact:

▶ Select drive program "EFFICIENT". Drive system, refer to page 125.
▶ Select Drivelogic program D1.
Remove unnecessary cargo from the vehicle.
▶ Remove add-on parts, e.g., a rear carrier, after use.
▶ Close the windows and glass sunroof while driving.
▶ Check the tire pressure regularly and increase it as necessary.
▶ Shut off the engine if the vehicle is to remain stationary for a longer period.
▶ Practice anticipatory driving and let the ve-

Saving fuel

DRIVING TIPS ⓘ

MOBILITY

Refueling

Refueling

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Follow the following when refueling

General information

Follow the fuel recommendation prior to refueling.

When refueling, hook the fuel pump nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel pump nozzle while refueling causes:

▶ Premature switching off.

▶ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.

The fuel tank is full when the fuel pump nozzle clicks off the first time.

Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly after refueling, otherwise the emissions warning light may illuminate.

Follow safety regulations posted at the filling station.

Additional information:

Fuel quality, refer to page 322.

Safety information

NOTICE

With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not ensured anymore. There is a risk of property damage. Refuel promptly.

NOTICE

Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Pointed surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There is a risk of property damage. Avoid overfilling.

Fuel filler cap

General information

If the fuel filler cap is not fitted correctly, the emissions indicator light illuminates on the instrument cluster.

Additional information:

Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 131.

Safety information

Warning

The fuel filler cap's retaining strap can become pinched and crushed when the cap is

Refueling

MOBILITY

retaining strap does not become pinched or crushed when closing the fuel filler cap.

Opening

1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens.

1. Open the fuel filler cap counterclockwise.

1. Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket on the fuel filler flap.

Emergency unlocking

It may be necessary in certain situations to unlock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance with an electrical malfunction.

In this case, have the fuel filler flap unlocked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Tire pressure

General information

The tire condition and tire pressure influence the following:

The service life of the tires.
▶ Driving safety.
▶ Driving comfort.
▶ Fuel consumption.

Safety information

Warning

A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure may heat up significantly and sustain damage. This will have a negative impact on aspects of handling such as steering and braking response. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Regularly check the tire pressure, and correct it as needed, for instance twice a month and before a long trip.

at ambient temperature. The tire Inflation pressure specifications apply to the tire sizes approved by the vehicle manufacturer for the corresponding vehicle types.
To identify the correct tire pressure, please note the following:
▶ Tire sizes of the vehicle.

Maximum speed for driving.

On the control display

The current the pressure values for the

mounted tires can be displayed on the control display.

The current tire inflation pressure value is located on each tire.

Checking the tire pressure

General information

The tires heat up while driving. The tire pressure increases with the tire temperature.
Tires have a natural, consistent tire pressure loss.
The displays of inflation devices may under-read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.

Checking via tire inflation pressure

specifications in tire pressure table

1. Determine the intended tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted tires.
2. Check the tire pressure in all four tires, e.g., using a pressure gage.
3. Correct the tire pressure if the current tire pressure deviates from the target tire pres-

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

tires or tires at the same temperature as the ambient temperature.

Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when the tires are cold, i.e.:

▶ A distance traveled of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded.
▶ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least two hours after a trip.

If equipped with an emergency wheel: check the tire pressure of the emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly and correct if necessary.

Checking using the tire inflation pressure specifications on the control display

1. 4ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
5. Check whether the current tire inflation pressure levels deviate from the intended tire pressure value.
6. Correct the tire pressure if the current tire pressure deviates from the target tire pressure.

The display of current tire pressure on the control display may be restricted when the vehicle is stationary. After a short drive, the tire pressure is updated.

After correcting the tire pressure

If equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor, the corrected tire pressures are applied automatically. Make sure that the tire settings are correct. With tires that cannot be found in the tire pressure values on the control display, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM).

1. a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, l, m, n, o, p, q, r, s, t, u, v, w, x, y, z

Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/160 km/h

For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, follow the tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire pressure table and adjust as necessary.

The tire inflation pressure specifications can also be found on the tire pressure label on the driver's door pillar.

Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.

Tire pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h

M4, M4 Competition

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

275/35 R19 100 2.3 / 33 2.3 / 33 V XL M+S

Front: 275/40 2.2 / 32 - ZR 18 103 Y XL

Rear: 285/35 ZR - 2.2 / 32

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

Tire size Pressure specifications In bar/PSI

Recr: 205/30 ZR - 2.2 / 3220 99 Y XL
Front: 205/30ZR 20 99 Y XL	2.2 / 32 -
Recr: 295/25 ZR - 2.5 / 3621 96 Y XL
F: 275/35 R 19100 V XL M+S	2.3 / 33 -
R: 205/30 R 2099 V XL M+S	2.3 / 33

M4 Competition M xDrive

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bor/PSI with cold tires
275/35 R 19 100 V XL M+S	2.3 / 33 2.3 / 33
Front: 275/35ZR 19 100 Y XL	2.2 / 32 -
Reor: 285/30ZR 20 99 Y XL	-2.2 / 32
Front: 285/30ZR 20 99 Y XL	2.3 / 33 -
Reor: 295/25 ZR21 96 Y XL	-2.5 / 36
F: 275/35 R 19100 V XL M+S	2.3 / 33 -

M4CS

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

275/35 R 19 100 2.3 / 33 2.3 / 33 V XL M+S
Front 275/35 2.2/32- ZR 19 100 Y XL Rear 205/30 -2.4/35
ZR 20 59 Y XL F: 275/35 R 19 2.3 / 33 - 100 V X L M+S R: 285/30 R 20 -2.3 / 33 99 V X L M+S

Tire pressures over 100 mph/160 km/h

Warning

When driving at speeds greater than 100 mph/160 km/h, incorrect tire pressures can negatively affect vehicle handling, e.g., safety or comfort while driving. The tires can become damaged, which may cause on accident. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. To drive at maximum speeds, note the specified tire pressure for driving above 100 mph/160 km/h in the tire inflation pressure table, and adjust as necessary.

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

Tire size Pressure specifications In bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

275/35 R19 100	2.4 / 35 2.7 / 39
VXL M+S

Front: 275/40	2.2 / 32
ZR 18 103 Y XL

Rear: 205/35 ZR - 2.3 / 3319 103 Y XL

Front: 275/35 ZR 2.3 / 3319 100 Y XL

Reor: 285/30 ZR -2.6/3820 99 Y XL

Front: 285/30	2.6/38-
ZR 20 99 YXL

Rear: 295/25 ZR - 2.9 / 42

21 96 Y XL

F: 275/35 R19	2.4/35 -
100 VXL M+S
R: 285/30 R20	-2.7/39
99 VXL M+S

With M Driver's Package:

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

275/35 R19 100

2.4/35 2.7/39

Tire size Pressure specifications In bar/PSI

Reer: 205/35 ZR - 2.5 / 3619 103 Y XL

Front: 275/35 ZR 2.6/38 - 19 100 Y XL

Reer: 205/30 ZR - 2.9 / 42

20 99 Y XL

Front: 285/30	2.9 / 42 -
ZR 20 99 Y XL

Recr: 295/25 ZR - 3.3 / 402196 Y XL

F: 275/35 R 19	2.4/35 -
100 V XL M+5

R: 285/30 R 20	-2.7/39
99 V XL M+S

M4 Competition M xDrive

Without M Driver's Package:

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

275/35 R 19 100	2.6 / 30 2.7 / 39
V XL M+S

Front: 275/35	2.4/35 -
ZR 19 100 Y XL

Reer: 205/30	- 2.6 / 30
ZR 20 99 Y XL

Front: 285/30	2.6/38-
ZR 20 99 Y XL

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

F: 275/35 R 19	2.6 / 30 -
100 V XL M+S
R: 285/30 R 20	-2.7 / 39
99 V XL M+S

With M Driver's Package:

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

275/35 R 19 100 2.6 / 38 2.7 / 39 VXL M+5

Front: 275/35 2.7/39 - ZR 19 100 Y XL

Reer: 205/30 - 3.0 / 44 ZR 20 99 Y XL

Front: 285/30 3.0 / 44 ZR 20 99 Y XL

Repr: 295/25 ZR - 3.3 / 48 2196 Y XL

F:275/35 R19 2.6/38- 100 V XL M+S

R: 285/30 R 20 - 2.7/39 99 V XL M+5

M4CS

Without M Driver's Package:

Tire size

Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires

275/35 R 19 100 2.6/38 2.8/41 VXL M+S

Front: 275/35 2.5/36 ZR 19 100 Y XL

Reon: 205/30 -2.7/39 ZR 20 99 Y XL

F:275/35 R19 2.6/30 100 VXL M+S

R: 285/30 R 20 -2.9 /42 99 V XL M+S

With M Driver's Package:

Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI

Specifications in bor/PSI with cold tires

275/35 R19 100 2.6/30 2.8/41 VXL M+S

Front: 275/35 3.1/45- ZR 19 100 Y XL

Reer 205/30 -3.4/49 ZR 20 99 Y XL

F:275/35 R19 2.6/38 - 100 VXL M+S

R:285/30 R 20 -2.9/42

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

Tire marking

Tire size

245/45 R18 96 Y

245; nominal width in mm

45: tire aspect ratio in %

R: radial tire code

18: rim diameter in inches

96: load index

Y: speed code letter

ZR tires: reinforced radial tire for speeds exceeding 150 mph/240 km/h

Maximum tire load

Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved.

Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating - GAWR - on the certification label on the driver door B-pillor. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the vehicle's Cross Axle Weight Rating - GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively.

Speed letter

Designation Maximum speed

Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h

R up to 106 mph/170 km/h

S up to 112 mph/180 km/h

T up to 118 mph/190 km/h

H up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V up to 150 mph/240 km/h

Tire Identification Number

DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 0125

xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand

xxx: tire size and tire design

0125: the age

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of

the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Tire age

Recommendation

Regardless of the tire tread depth, replace tires

at least every 6 years

Production date

The tire's production date is found on the tire sidewall.

Designation Production date

DOT ... 0125 1st week 2025

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades

Treadwear

Traction AA ABC

Temperature A B C

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

T

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

tire graded 150 would wear one and one half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.

Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop an wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified Indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Bond A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. There is a risk of accident, injury and a risk of damage to property.

M+S

Winter tires, as well as all-season tires with better winter performance than summer tires, are indicated by the letters "M+S" on the tire sidewall.

Tire tread depth

Safety information

Warning

If the tire tread depth is too low, driving safety may be impaired in critical situations. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Follow applicable legal requirements for minimum tread depth.

Minimum tread depth

Generally speaking, the legal minimum tread depths may differ for summer tires, winter tires, and all-season tires. To ensure optimum handling, e.g., in wet or snowy conditions, it may be useful to change a tire before it reaches the legal minimum tread depth. For more information, contact an authorized serv-

Wear indicators

The tire manufacturer's wear indicators are distributed around the tire circumference and have a height of at least 0.06 in/1.6 mm.

The wear indicators serve as indicators for the wear of the tire tread.

The locations of the wear indicators are indicated by the letters "TWI" (tread wear indicator) on the tire sidewall.

Tire damage

General information

Check your tires regularly for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Indications of tire damage or another vehicle malfunction:

Unusual vibrations. Unusual tire or runn

Unusual vehicle handling such as a strong tendency to pull to the left or right.

Uneven wear pattern, e.g., increased wear in the area of the tire shoulder.

Damage can be caused by the following situations, for instance:

Driving over curbs.

Safety information

Warning

Damaged tires can lose the pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. If the damage is suspected while driving, immediately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. Drive carefully to an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Have the vehicle towed or transported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires, but have them replaced.

Warning

The wheels, tires and chassis components can become damaged when driving over curbs, road damage, or other obstacles. Larger wheels have a smaller tire cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-section, the higher the risk of tire damage. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. If possible, avoid driving over curbs, road damage or other obstacles, or drive over them slowly and carefully.

Exchanging wheels and tires

Mounting and wheel balancing

Have the wheel mounted and balanced by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Suitable wheels and tires

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

vehicle manufacturer determines wheel/dire combinations on the basis of the following criteria:

▶ Tire size, e.g., tire width, aspect ratio.

▶ Wheel size, e.g., rim diameter, offset.

For more information on wheel/tire combinations and special equipment, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

Wheels and tires that are not suitable for the vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you use only wheels and tires that have been recommended for the vehicle type.

Warning

Mounted steel wheels can cause technical problems, for instance unexpected loosening of the lug bolts and damage to the broke disks. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Do not mount steel wheels.

Warning

Wheel/tire combinations that are not suitable for the vehicle can affect vehicle handling and a number of system functions, e.g., the Antlock Broking System or Dynamic Stability Control. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. The manufacturer of

wheel/tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Recommended tire brands

Tire types are developed for each vehicle and optimized specifically for the individual requirements of that vehicle, e.g.:

▶ Vehicle handling.

▷ Comfort.

▷ Noise characteristics.

Specially developed tires are indicated by a star on the tire sidewall. After replacing wheels and tires, the vehicle manufacturer recommends using star-marked tires again. The vehicle manufacturer recommends using tires of the same make and tire tread.

New tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing circumstances when tires are brand new. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km.

Retreaded tires

Warning

Retreated tires can have different tire casing

Wheels and tires

turer of the vehicle does not recommend the use of retreaded tires.

Maximum speed

Safety Information

Warning

If the maximum permissible speed of your mounted tires is exceeded, the tires may be damaged. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of the tires.

Maximum speed of winter tires

If the vehicle's maximum speed is higher than the maximum permissible speed of the winter tires, place a sign indicating the maximum permissible speed in the driver's field of vision. The info label is available from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Winter tires

Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads.

Winter tires are indicated by the mountain/snowflake icon and the letters "M+S" on

As a rule, all-season tires do not perform the same as winter tires.

Wheel change between axles

Warning

A wheel change between the axles on vehicles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front and rear axles can cause damage to the tires and the vehicle. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Do not rotate the tires between the axles on vehicles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front and rear axles.

Storing tires

Tire pressure

Do not exceed the maximum tire pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

Storage

Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark place.
▶ Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease, and solvents.
Do not leave the tires in plastic bags.
▶ Remove dirt from wheels or tires.

Track tires

General information

The vehicle can be fitted with sport tires, which have been optimized for use on a racetrack in dry conditions.

These track tires are made from an optimized

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

driving dynamics such as steering behavior, precision, or road grip.

Additional information:

• At an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.
  On the website of the respective tire manufacturer.

Safety information

Warning

Track tires can become damaged, e.g., torn and broken, at temperatures below 32°F/0°C. There is a risk of accidents and risk of property damage. Do not move, mount, or drive on track tires at temperatures below 32°F/0°C.

Warning

When driving with track tires on wet roads or racetracks, driving safety may be jeopardized in critical situations, e.g., aquaplaning. There is a risk of accident. Drive at a suitable speed and with driving stability control systems enabled, e.g., Dynamic Stability Control.

Warning

When driving with track tires, driving safety may be jeopardized, e.g., sudden loss of cohesion, at temperatures below 59°F/15°C. There is a risk of accident. At temperatures below 59°F/15°C, drive at a suitable speed and with driving stability control systems enabled, e.g., Dynamic Stability Control.

Store removed wheels or track tires in a clean, dry, and dark place at temperatures above 32°F/0°C.

Use on the road

The track tires meet the legal requirements for use on public roads.

After being used on a racetrack, the track tires may no longer be suitable for road use. Therefore, after using them on a racetrack, check the track tires with respect to legal requirements for use on public roads, e.g., minimum tread depth.

Use on a racetrack

General Information

Always check the track tires for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and wear before using them on a rocetrock.

Check the tire pressures when the tires are cold.

Bring the track tires to temperature with a moderate, modified driving style when using them on the racetrack.

Intensive use

Track tires may become damaged after being used for rigorous racetrack driving for some time, being driven over curbs, or being driven off-road.

Check track tires for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and wear. The wheel must be removed in order to check the outside and inside of the track tires. Have track tires checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Tire pressure

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

for use on the road or a racetrack into account. The tires heat up while driving. The tire pressure increases with the tire temperature.

Tire pressure specifications

The tire pressure table contains all tire inflation pressure specifications for given tire sizes at ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure specifications apply to the tire sizes approved by the vehicle manufacturer for the corresponding model variants.

To identify the correct tire pressure, please note the following:

Tire sizes of the vehicle.
Maximum speed at which the vehicle is driven.

Snow chains

Safety information

Warning

Mounting snow chains on unsuitable tires can cause the snow chains to come into contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Only fit snow chains on tires recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for use with snow chains.

Warning

Insufficiently tight snow chains may damage tires and vehicle components. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed ac-

Fine-link snow chains

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends the use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended as road-safe and suitable.
For information on suitable snow chains, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Use

Use is only permitted in pairs on rear wheels equipped with the tires of the following wheel/tire sizes:

Tire size Wheel size Rim offset (IS)

275/35 R19 9.5J × 19 20

Information on the wheel size and rim offset is located on the inside of the wheel.

The list can also include wheel/tire sizes that are only suitable for certain models.

Information on wheels and tires approved for the vehicle can be requested from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instructions.

If vehicle is equipped with Tire Pressure Monitor: When using snow chains, do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, otherwise, Incorrect values may be displayed.

If vehicle is equipped with flat tire monitor: When using snow chains, do not initialize the flat tire monitor, otherwise, incorrect values may be displayed.

When driving with snow chains, if needed, briefly activate M Dynamic Mode.

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

Tire Pressure Monitor

Principle

The Tire Pressure Monitor monitors the tire pressure and issues a warning if the tire pressure has dropped.

General information

Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure and tire temperature.

Depending on the tire entered or detected, the system automatically compares the specified nominal pressures with the current tire pressures.

If tires are being used that are not specified in the tire inflation pressure details on the vehicle such as tires with special approval, the system needs to be actively reset. The system will then take over the current tire pressures as the target pressures.

When operating the system, also note the information found in the Tire Inflation pressure chapter.

Additional information:

Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 290.

Safety information

Warning

Incorrect entries in the tire settings can lead to incorrect target tire inflation pressure values. In this case, it cannot be guaranteed that the notification of a tire pressure loss will be reliable. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Make sure that the sizes of your mounted tires are displayed correctly and match the information on the tires and

Functional requirements

The following prerequisites must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable notification of a tire pressure loss is not assured:

▶ Every time a tire or wheel is changed, the correct details on the mounted tires must be entered in the tire settings.

The Tire Pressure Monitor does not activate until after driving for a few minutes;

▶ After a tire or wheel change.

▶ After a reset, when using tires with special approval.

▶ After changing the tire setting.

▶ For tires with special approval;

▶ After a tire or wheel change, a reset was performed with the correct tire inflation pressure.

▶ After the tire inflation pressure was adjusted to a new value, a reset was performed.

▶ Wheels with air pressure sensor.

Tire settings

General information

The tire sizes of the mounted tires can be gathered from the tire inflation pressure details on the vehicle or directly on the tires.

The tire details do not need to be re-entered when the tire pressure is corrected.

For summer and winter tires, the tire details entered last are stored. After a tire or wheel change, the settings of the tire sets used last can be selected.

Adjusting the tires

1. Apps menu

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

1. "Tire selection"

2. "Manual"

3. "Tire type"

4. Select the tire size for the rear axle. For tires with special approval: "Other tires/roce track"

5. Select the maximum speed to be driven.

6. "Save tire settings"

The measurement of the current tire inflation pressure is started. The measurement progress is displayed.

Status display

Current status

The system status can be displayed on the control display, e.g., whether or not the system is active.

1. 4ps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Vehicle status"

4. "Tire Pressure Monitor"

The current status is displayed.

Current tire pressure

The current tire pressure is displayed for each tire.

The current tire inflation pressures may change while driving or depending on the outside temperature.

Current tire temperature

The current tire temperatures are displayed. The current tire temperatures may change while driving or due to the outside temperature.

Tire conditions

General information

Tire and system status are indicated by the color of the wheels and a text message on the control display.

Any existing messages may not be deleted if the nominal pressure is not reached after the tire inflation pressure is corrected.

All wheels green

The system is active and bases warnings on the target pressures.

For tires with special approval: the system is active and bases warnings on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

One to four yellow wheels

A flat tire or major tire pressure loss has occurred in the indicated tires.

Gray wheels

It may not be possible to identify tire pressure losses.

Possible causes:

Malfunction.

▶ During tire inflation pressure measurement, after confirmation of the tire settings.

For tires with special approval: a reset is performed for the system.

For tires with special approval: performing a reset

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Vehicle status"

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

1. Turn on drive-ready state and do not drive off.

2. "Perform reset"

3. Drive off.

The wheels are shown in gray and the tire pressure is reset.

After a travel time of several minutes, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as the predefined tire inflation pressures. The reset is completed automatically while driving.

Once the reset is complete, the wheels on the control display are shown in green. A message is displayed.

You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue driving the reset resumes automatically.

Messages: for tires without special approval

General information

When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Stability Control may be turned on.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or no tire inflation pressure impacts handling such as steering and braking response. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Do not continue driving. Repair the flat tire or replace the wheel.

If a tire inflation pressure check is required

Icon Possible cause

Leak detected on the tire.

Inflation was not carried out according to specifications, for instance when the tire has not been sufficiently inflated or in the case of a natural steady tire pressure loss.

Measure

Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.

If the tire inflation pressure is too low

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, an Icon with a Check Control message appears on the control display.

Icon Possible cause

There is a tire pressure loss.

Measure

1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.

2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a filling station, check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires and correct if necessary.

If there is a significant tire pressure loss

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

Icon Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major tire pressure loss.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Read the description on what to do in case of a flat tire. Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to page 306.

Messages: for tires with special approval

General information

When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Stability Control may be turned on.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or no tire inflation pressure impacts handling such as steering and braking response. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Do not continue driving. Repair the flat tire or replace the wheel.

If a tire inflation pressure check is required

Message

An icon with a Check Control message appears on the control display.

Icon Possible cause

Inflation was not carried out according to specifications, e.g., the tire has not been sufficiently inflated.

The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset was done. The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last reset.

No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure

1. Check the tire pressure and correct as needed.
2. Perform a system reset.

If the tire inflation pressure is too low

Message

A yellow warming light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, an icon with a Check Control message appears on the control display.

Icon Possible cause

There is a tire pressure loss. No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

Measure

1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a filling station, check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires and correct if necessary.
3. Perform a system reset.

If there is a significant tire pressure loss

Message

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

In addition, an Icon with the affected tire appears in a Check Control message on the control display.

Icon Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major tire pressure loss. No reset was performed for the system. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Read the description on what to do in case of a flat tire. Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to page 306.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

For tires with special approval: when the tire pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset. If no tire damage can be identified, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

1. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel. Use of sealing compound, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the wheel electronics. Have the electronics replaced at the next opportunity.

System limits

Temperature

The tire pressure depends on the tire's temperature.

Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire temperature, thus increasing the tire inflation pressure.

The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again.

These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply.

Sudden tire pressure loss

The system cannot indicate sudden and serious tire damage caused by external circumstances.

Failure performing a reset

For tires with special approval: this system will not function correctly if it has not been reset. For example, a flat tire is being reported despite the tires having the correct pressure.

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

Malfunction

Message

The yellow warning light flashes and is then illuminated continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. It may not be possible to identify tire pressure losses.

Measure

A wheel without air pressure sensor is mounted: Have the wheels checked as needed.

Fault caused by systems or devices with the same transmission frequency: The system automatically reactivates after leaving the area of the Interference.
For tires with special approval: the system was unable to complete the reset. Perform a system reset again.
If the Tire Pressure Monitor malfunctions: Have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Declaration according to NHTSA/FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or the inflation pressure label. (If the vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or the inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, the vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure

tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-Inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. The vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on the vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Flat tire monitor

Principle

The flat tire monitor detects a tire pressure loss while driving and issues a warning if the tire pressure has dropped.

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

General information

The system detects tire pressure loss on the basis of rotation speed differences between the individual wheels while driving.

In the event of a tire pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rate of rotation of the corresponding wheel changes. The difference will be detected and reported as a flat tire.

The system does not measure the actual inflation pressure in the tires.

Functional requirements

The following prerequisites must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable notification of a tire pressure loss is not assured:

▶ After a tire or wheel change, on initialization was carried out at the correct tire pressure.
▶ After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new value, an initialization was performed.

Status display

The current status of the flat tire monitor can be displayed, e.g., whether the flat tire monitor is active.

1. Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "FLAT TIRE MONITOR"

The status is displayed.

Initialization required

An initialization must be performed in the following situations:

▶ After the tire inflation pressure has been adjusted.
▶ After a tire or wheel change.

flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire inflation pressures.

Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains.

1. 4-ps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "FLAT TIRE MONITOR"
5. Turn on drive-ready state and do not drive off.
6. "Perform reset"
7. Drive off.
   The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time.
   The initialization automatically continues when driving continues.

Messages

General information

When a flat tire is indicated, the Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is turned on, if needed.

Safety information

Warning

A damaged regular tire with low or no tire inflation pressure impacts handling such as steering and braking response. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Do not continue driving. Repair the flat tire or replace the wheel.

Indication of a flat tire

A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

Icon Possible cause

There is a flat tire or a major tire pressure loss.

Measure

1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers.
2. Read the description on what to do in case of a flat tire.

Actions in the event of a flat tire

1. Identify the damaged tire.

To do this, check the tire pressure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure display of a flat tire kit.

When the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the flat tire monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system.

if tire damage cannot be identified, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

1. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel.

System limits

The system may be delayed or malfunction in the following situations:

A natural, even tire pressure loss in all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
Sudden and serious tire damage caused by external circumstances cannot be recognized in advance.

The system has not been initialized.

Repairing a flat tire

Safety precautions

Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground at a safe distance from road traffic.
▶ Turn on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▶ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock.
As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have all vehicle occupants get out and make sure that they remain outside the hazardous area such as behind a guardrail.
▶ If necessary, set up the hazard triangle or hazard warning lights at an appropriate distance.

Tire repair set

Principle

The tire repair set is used to temporarily seal minor tire damage so that it is possible to continue driving.

General information

The filled in tire sealant closes the damage from the inside when it hardens.
▶ Follow the instructions for using the dire repair set, which are provided on the compressor and coolant bottle.
The tire repair set may be insufficient if the tire damage measures more than approx. 0.16 in/4 mm.
Do not remove foreign objects that have penetrated the tire. Remove foreign objects

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

Overview

Storage

Depending on vehicle equipment, the tire repair set is stored as follows:

▶ In the cargo area under the cargo area floor.
In the cargo area on the left or right side.
In the cargo area behind a side trim panel.

Sealant bottle and filler hose

1 Seplant bottle
2 Sealant bottle outlet
3 Filler hose
4 Sealant bottle connection
5 Wheel valve connection

5 Connector for socket
6 Power switch

Safety precautions

▶ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Turn on the hazard warning system.
▷ Set the parking brake.
▶ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock.
As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have all vehicle occupants get out and make sure that they remain outside the hazardous area such as behind a guardrail.
▶ If necessary, set up the hazard triangle or hazard warning lights at an appropriate distance.
Remove the warning label for the maximum permissible speed from the sealant bottle and attach it in the visible area in the vehicle interior.

Compressor

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

Preparing the tire repair set

1. Insert the sealant bottle into the mount on the compressor housing.

1. Turn the sealant bottle clockwise by 90° to the stop.

1. Connect the filler hose to the outlet of the sealant bottle and turn clockwise by 90° to the stop.

1. Unscrew the valve cap on the wheel.

2. Screw the filler hose connector clockwise onto the valve.

1. With the compressor switched off, insert the connector into the power socket in the vehicle Interior.

Filling the tire with sealing compound

Safety information

DANGER

If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollutants which are colorless and odorless. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient ventilation.

NOTICE

The compressor can overheat during extended operation. There is a risk of property damage. Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes.

Filling the tire with cooling compound

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill in the tire sealant and reach a tire pressure of 2.5 bar/36 psi.

While the tire is being filled with tire sealant, the tire pressure can briefly reach approx. 6 bar/87 psI. Do not turn off the compressor in this phase.

1. Turn off the compressor on the device.

Checking the tire pressure

Read the tire pressure on the tire pressure display of the compressor. The tire pressure must be at least 2.5 bar/36 psi.

Tire pressure too high

If the tire pressure is too high, reduce the tire pressure with the pressure reducing valve on the compressor.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is not reached

Do not continue driving unless a minimum tire pressure of 2.5 bar/36 psi is reached. Contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached

1. Pull the connector out of the socket in the vehicle interior.

2. Disconnect the filler hose from the sealant bottle and the valve on the wheel.

3. Screw the valve cap onto the valve,

4. Stow the tire repair set in the cargo area.

5. Immediately drive 6 miles/10 km to ensure that the tire sealant is evenly distributed in the tire.

Do not exceed the speed limit of

Tire sealant may spray from the damaged area during the initial wheel rotations.

Adjusting the tire pressure

1. Stop at a suitable location.

2. Connect the filler hose directly to the compressor, then turn it clockwise 90° in the mount until it engages audibly.

3. Unscrew the volve cap on the wheel.
4. Screw the filler hose connector onto the valve.

1. Insert the connector into the socket in the vehicle interior.
2. Read the tire pressure on the tire pressure display of the compressor.

Do not continue driving unless a minimum tire pressure of 1.3 bar/19 psi is displayed. Contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

1. Correct the tire pressure to 2.5 bar/36 psi.

▶ Increase tire pressure: with standby or drive-ready state turned on, turn on the compressor and let it run for a maximum of 10 minutes.
- Reduce tire pressure: Press the pressure reducing valve button on the compressor.

Removing and stowing the tire re-

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

1. Disconnect the filler hose from the compressor and the valve on the wheel.
2. Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
3. Stow the tire repair set together with the filler hose in the cargo area.

Continuing the trip

Continue driving immediately once finished with the tire repair set.

Do not exceed the speed limit of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Do not exceed a maximum distance traveled of 125 miles/200 km.

Re-initialize the flat tire monitor or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.

Replace the faulty tire and the sealant bottle from the tire repair set as soon as possible.

Additional information:

▶ Flat tire monitor, refer to page 307.
▶ Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 302.

System limits

If the tire cannot be made drivable, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

With Tire Pressure Monitor: Using sealant can damage the air pressure sensor. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity.

Emergency wheel

Principle

In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel can be used in place of the wheel with the faulty tire. The emergency wheel is only

Also check the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and correct it as needed.

Safety information

Warning

The emergency wheel has particular dimensions. When driving with an emergency wheel, changed driving properties may occur, for instance reduced directional stability when braking, longer braking distance, and changed self-steering properties in the limit range. There is a risk of accident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Overview

The emergency wheel and wheel change set are located in a bag in the cargo area.

Removing the emergency wheel

1. Loosen the strap at the buckles.
2. Detach the tensioning belts' snap hooks from the lashing eyes.
3. Remove the bag containing the emergency spare wheel and wheel change set from the cargo area.
4. Open the bag, then remove the spare wheel and wheel change set.

Inserting the emergency wheel

1. Stow the emergency spare wheel and wheel change set in the bag.
2. Place the bag in the cargo area.
3. Attach the snap hooks of the tensioning strands at the inshino eyes.

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

Changing wheels/tires

General information

When a flat tire kit is used, an immediate wheel change when there is a tire pressure loss in the event of a breakdown is not always necessary. If necessary, a suitable wheel change tool, e.g., a jack, is available as an accessory from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

The jack is only provided for short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if all safety precautions are observed, there is a risk of the raised vehicle falling if the jack tips over. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. When the vehicle is raised with the jack, do not lie under the vehicle and do not switch on the drive-ready state.

Warning

Placing supports, e.g., wooden blocks or similar, under the jack may reduce its ability to bear weight because of the limited height. The load-carrying capacity of the wooden blocks may be exceeded and the vehicle may tip over. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. Do not piece supports under the jack.

Warning

The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is provided in order to perform a wheel shape in the case of a helicopter. The

jack to change on emergency or spare wheel in the event of a breakdown.

Warning

The jack may slip on soft, uneven, or slippery ground, e.g., snow, ice, tiles, etc. There is a risk of injury. If possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid, slip-resistant surface.

Warning

The jack is optimized for lifting the vehicle and for the jacking points on the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using the jack.

Warning

When the jack is not inserted into the jacking point provided for this purpose, the vehicle may be damaged or the jack may slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. When cranking up the jack, ensure that it is inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel well.

Warning

A vehicle that is raised on a jack may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. While the vehicle is raised, do not exert lateral effort on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

NOTICE

Using an Impact wrench to loosen or tighten the wheel lock bolt can damage the wheel lock bolt. There is a risk of property damage. Only use a lug wrench to loosen and tighten the lug bolt lock.

Securing the vehicle against rolling away

General information

The vehicle manufacturer recommends to additionally secure the vehicle against rolling away when changing a wheel.

On a level surface

Place checks or other suitable objects in front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to the wheel being changed.

On a slight downhill gradient

Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects, e.g., rocks, under the wheels of the front axle and rear axle, opposite the rolling direction.

Lug bolt lock

Principle

The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The lug bolts can only be released with the adapter which matches the coding.

Overview

Depending on vehicle equipment, store the lug bolt lock adapter as follows:

▶ In the cargo area under the cargo area floor.
▶ In the cargo area on the left or right side.

In the cargo area behind a side trim panel.

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

Unscrewing

1. Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug lock bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug bolt.

Screwing on

1. Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt. Turn the adapter until it fits onto the wheel lock bolt.
2. Screw on the lug lock bolt. The tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screwing on the lug bolt.

Safety precautions

- Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground at a safe distance from road traffic.

▶ Turn on the hazard warning system.

▷ Set the parking brake.

▶ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock.

Engage a gear or move the selector lever to position P.

As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have all vehicle occupants get out and make sure that they remain outside the hazardous area such as behind a guardrail.

▶ If necessary, set up the hazard triangle or hazard warning lights at an appropriate distance.

▶ Depending on vehicle equipment, remove the wheel change set and, if necessary, the emergency wheel from the vehicle.

▶ Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling away.

Jacking points

The jacking points are located at the indicated positions.

Jacking up the vehicle

Warning

Hands and fingers can be jammed when using the jack. There is a risk of injury. Comply with the described hand position and do not change this position while using the jack.

Wheels and tires

MOBILITY

1. Hold the jack with one hand, arrow 1. With the other hand, grip the jack crank handle or the lever, arrow 2.

1. Insert the Jack Into the rectangular recess of the jacking point closest to the wheel to be changed.

1. Extend the jack by turning the jack crank handle or lever clockwise.

1. Take your hand away from the jack as soon as the jack is under load and continue turning the jack crank handle or lever with one

2. Make sure that the car jack foot extends vertically and is at a right angle beneath the jacking point.

1. Crank the vehicle up until the entire jack surface is on the ground and the corresponding wheel is lifted max. 1.2 inches/3 cm above the ground.

Mounting a wheel

Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.

1. Unscrew the lug bolts.
2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on and screw in at least two lug bolts in a crosswise pattern until hand-tight.

When non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the accompanying lug bolts may have to be used as well.

1. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pattern.
2. Turn the jack crank handle counterclockwise to retract the jack and lower the vehicle.
3. Remove the jack and slow it securely.

After the wheel change

MOBILITY

Wheels and tires

1. Check tire inflation pressure at the next opportunity and correct as needed.
2. Re-initialize the flat tire monitor or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
3. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench.
4. Drive to the nearest authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop, then have the damaged the replaced.

Engine compartment

MOBILITY

Engine compartment

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently

available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle. Additional information: Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Overview

1 Filler neck for washer fluid
2 jump-starting, positive battery terminal
3 Engine coolant
4 Oil filler neck

5 Coolant, auxiliary cooling
6 Vehicle identification number
7 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal

MOBILITY

Engine comportment

Hood

Safety information

Warning

Improperly executed work in the engine compartment can damage components and lead to a safety hazard. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. The vehicle manufacturer recommends having work in the engine compartment performed by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Warning

The engine compartment accommodates moving components. Certain components in the engine compartment can also move with the vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

Warning

There are protruding ports, for instance looking hooks, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to protruding ports and keep clear of these areas.

Warning

An Incorrectly locked hood can open while driving and restrict visibility. There is a risk of accident, Injury, and property damage. Stop immediately and seriously close the head

Warning

Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the travel path of the hood is clear while opening and closing.

NOTICE

Folded-out wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of property damage. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

NOTICE

When the hood is closed, it must engage on both sides. Pressing again can damage the hood. There is a risk of property damage. Open the hood again and then close it energetically. Avoid pressing again.

Opening hood

1. Pull the lever, arrow 1.

Hood is unlocked.

An acoustic signal and a notice in the instrument cluster indicate that the hood is open.

Engine compartment

Closing the hood

Energetically close the hood from approx. 20 in/50 cm.

The hood must engage on both sides.

MOBILITY

Operating fluids

Operating fluids

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Fuel recommendation

General information

Depending on the region, many filling stations sell fuel that has been customized to winter or summer conditions. Fuel that is available in winter, for instance helps make a cold start easier.

Gasoline

General information

For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content.

Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as containing metal must not be used.

Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %, i.e., E10, may be used for refueling.

The power and consumption specifications refer to operating with RON 98 E10 fuel.

Knocking noises, strange sounds, and driving issues may occur when using fuel with an ethanol content of 10% to max. 15%. These have no effect on the engine service life.

Safety Information

Caution

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Additionally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude, may occur.

If drivability problems are encountered, we recommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI number — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for additional maintenance.

Warning

Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel system and engine. Furthermore, the catalytic converter can be permanently damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Do not refuel or add the following in the case of gasoline engines:

Leaded gasoline.

Metallic additives, for instance manganese or iron.

Do not turn on standby after refueling with the wrong fuel. Contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Operating fluids

MOBILITY

NOTICE

87 AKI fuel or lower can cause the engine to malfunction or become damaged. There is a risk of property damage. Do not refuel with 87 AKI fuel or lower.

NOTICE

Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and the engine. There is a risk of property damage. Do not use fuels with a higher ethanol content than recommended. Do not refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5 to M100.

Recommended gas quality 93 AKI.

Minimum fuel grade 91 AKI.

Using fuel with this minimum AKI rating may result in driving issues and strange sounds. Knocking noises may occur, especially when starting the engine at high temperatures. This has no effect on engine service life.

Engine oil

General information

The engine oil consumption and engine oil properties depend on the driving style and operating conditions.

Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling by taking a detailed measurement.

▶ Idle operation of the engine.
▶ With use of engine oil types that are not recommended.
Different Check Control messages are shown on the control display depending on the engine oil level and engine oil properties.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends having the engine oil changed by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. The suitable viscosity grade is indicated on a sign in the engine compartment.

Safety information

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of property damage. Immediately odd engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of property damage. Do not add too much engine oil. If there is excess engine oil, have the engine oil level corrected by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

NOTICE

Engine all that is not changed in timely fashion can cause increased engine wear and thus engine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. It is recommended that you do not exceed the service interval's indicated in the vehicle.

MOBILITY

Operating fluids

Electronic oil measurement

General information

The electronic oil measurement has two measuring principles:

▶ Monitoring.

▶ Detailed measurement.

When making frequent short-distance trips or using a sporty driving style, for instance when cornering aggressively, regularly perform a detailed measurement.

Monitoring

Principle

The engine oil level is monitored electronically while driving and can be shown on the control display.

If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed.

Functional requirements

A current measured value is available after approx. 30 minutes of normal driving.

Displaying the engine oil level

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Vehicle status"

4. "Engine oil level"

The engine all level is displayed.

System limits

When making frequent short-distance trips or using a sporty driving style, it may not be possible to calculate a measured value. In this

Detailed measurement

Principle

The engine all level is checked when the vehicle is stationary and displayed via a scale.

If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed.

General Information

During the measurement, the idle speed is increased somewhat.

Functional requirements

▶ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position.

▶ Drive-ready slate is turned on by pressing the Start/Stop button.

The engine is at operating temperature.

▶ Selector lever in selector lever position N or P and accelerator pedal not depressed.

Performing a detailed measurement

1. Apps menu

2. "Vehicle"

3. "Vehicle status"

4. "Engine oil level"

5. "Oil level measurement"

6. "Start measurement"

The engine all level is checked and displayed via a scale.

Adding engine oil

General information

Only add engine oil when the message is displayed in the instrument cluster. The top-up quantity is indicated in the message shown on

Operating fluids

MOBILITY

Take care not to add too much engine oil.

Safety Information

Warning

Operating fluids, e.g., oil, grease, coolant, fuel, may contain harmful ingredients. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. Follow the instructions on the containers. Do not allow operating fluids to come into contact with your clothing, skin, or eyes. Do not fill operating fluids into different bottles. Store operating fluids out of reach of children.

NOTICE

An engine oil level that is too low causes engine damage. There is a risk of property damage. Immediately add engine oil.

NOTICE

Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of property damage. Do not add too much engine oil. If there is excess engine oil, have the engine oil level corrected by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Overview

The oil filler neck is located in the engine compartment.

Additional information:

For an overview, refer to page 319.

Adding engine oil

Opening, refer to page 320.

1. Open the lid counterclockwise.

1. Add engine oil.

2. Close the lid.

Engine oil types to add

General information

The engine oil grade is critical for the service life of the engine.

Only add with the types of engine oil which are listed.

Safety information

NOTICE

Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of property damage. Do not use oil additives.

NOTICE

Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk of property damage. When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil specification.

MOBILITY

Operating fluids

Gasoline engine

BMW Longlife-01 FE.

Alternative engine oil types

If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the following oil rating can be added:

Oil specification

API SL.

API SM.

API SN.

Viscosity grades

When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil has a suitable viscosity grade. The suitable viscosity grade is indicated on a sign in the engine compartment.

More information about suitable oil specifications and engine oil viscosity grades can be requested from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

BMW recommends Original BMW Engine Oil.

Coolant

General information

the BMW LC-18 specification. Do not mix coolant additives of different colors. Use a 50:50 mixing ratio of water to coolant additive. Information on suitable coolant additives can be provided by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

With the engine hot and the cooling system open, coolant can escape and lead to scolding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system with the engine cooled down.

Warning

Additives are harmful to health. Using the wrong additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Do not allow additives to come into contact with skin, eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives only.

NOTICE

Too much water reduces the coolant's frost protection and corrosion protection. There is a risk of property damage. Use a 50:50 mixing ratio of water to coolant additive.

Coolant level

General information

Depending on the drive variant, there are up to two coolant reservoirs in the engine compartment. Check and add the coolant levels on a regular basis.

The specified coolant level is achieved with longer operating periods.

The nominal coolant level is indicated by the maximum mark in the filler neck of the coolant reservoir.

Additional Information:

For an overview, refer to page 319.

Checking the coolant level

1. Let the engine cool down.
2. Turn off the climate control system. Climate control, refer to page 249.
3. Opening the hood. Opening, refer to page 320.
4. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.
5. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
6. The coolant level is correct when it is just below the max. level mark on the filler neck. This can be found on the filler neck or on the outside of transparent coolant tanks.
7. Close the coolant reservoir cap.

Adding coolant

1. Let the engine cool down.
2. Turn off the climate control system. Climate control, refer to page 249.
3. Opening the hood. Opening, refer to page 320.
4. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pressure to dissipate, then open it.
5. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
6. If necessary, slowly add coolant up to the

Disposal

Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant additives.

Washer fluid

General information

All spray nozzles are supplied from one tank. Use a mixture of top water and windshield washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be used.

Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.4 US gal/2 liters.

Safety information

Warning

Some types of antifreeze can contain harmful substances and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and an injury hazard. Follow the instructions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do not fill operating fluids into different bottles. Store operating fluids out of reach of children.

United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container.

Use of BMW's Windshield Washer Concentrate or the equivalent is recommended.

MOBILITY

Operating fluids

Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid reservoir.

NOTICE

Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid for the water repelling effect on the windows can lead to damage to the car wash. There is a risk of property damage. Do not add silicon-containing additives to the washer fluid.

NOTICE

Mixing different windshield washer fluid concentrates or antifreeze can damage the washer system. There is a risk of property damage. Do not mix different windshield washer fluid concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the information and mixture ratios provided on the containers.

Overview

The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment.

Malfunction

The use of undiluted windshield washer fluid

Maintenance

Maintenance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information: Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Maintenance system

Principle

The maintenance system provides service notifications and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the operational reliability of the vehicle.

General information

In some cases, scopes and intervals of the maintenance system may vary according to the country version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated separately. Further information is available from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Condition Based Service

Principle

Condition Based Service determines the main tenance recommendation using sensors and special algorithms that take into account the

General information

Service notifications can be displayed on the control display. Additional Information: Service notifications, refer to page 147.

Service data in the vehicle key

Information on the service notifications is continuously stored in the vehicle key. An authorized service center can read this data out and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehicle.

Stationary periods

Stationary periods during which the vehicle battery was disconnected are token into account.

Have any time-dependent maintenance measures, e.g., replacing operating fluids, performed by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Maintenance Booklet for US Models

Please consult your Maintenance Booklet for additional information on the performance of service and maintenance work.

The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that maintenance and repair be performed by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance and repair work should be retained.

MOBILITY

Maintenance

Diagnostic socket

General information

Disconnect devices from the diagnostic socket before locking the vehicle or starting a Remote Software Upgrade.

Additional information:

Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 131.

Safety information

NOTICE

The diagnostic socket is an intricate component intended to be used in conjunction with specialized equipment to check the vehicle's primary emissions system. Improper use of the diagnostic socket, or contact with the diagnostic socket for other than its intended purpose, can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates risks of personal and property damage. Given the foregoing, it is strongly recommended that access to the diagnostic socket is limited to an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equipment for purposes of properly utilizing the diagnostic socket.

Overview

Exhaust emissions

The warning light illuminates:

The exhaust gas quality is declining, e.g., because the fuel filler cap is fitted incorrectly. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.

The warning light flashes under certain circumstances:

This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine.

Reduce the vehicle speed and have the vehicle checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period con seriously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter.

Have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Taking the vehicle out of service

When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, special measures must be taken. For more information, contact on authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Additional Information:

Deep sleep mode, refer to page 41.

Replacing components

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Onboard vehicle tool kit

The on-board toolkit is located in the left storage compartment in the cargo area, under a cover.

Wiper blades

Safety information

NOTICE

The window may sustain damage if the wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade installed. There is a risk of property damage. Hold the wiper firmly when channing the wiper blade.

NOTICE

Folded-out wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of property damage. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood.

Replacing the wiper blades

1. To change the wiper blades, bring wipers into fold-out position.
   Fold-out position of the wipers, refer to page 159.
2. Fold out the wiper arm and hold it firmly.
3. Squeeze the retaining spring, arrows 1, and fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.

1. Remove the wiper blade forward from the detent.
2. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order of removal until it locks in place.
3. Fold in the wipers.

Lights and bulbs

MOBILITY

Replacing components

All headlights and lights are designed using LED technology at least.

In the event that they are no longer operating properly, have the headlights and lights checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

Focused laser light can irritate or permanently damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. The vehicle manufacturer recommends having work on the lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Warning

Intense brightness can irritate or damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not look directly into the headlights or other light sources. Do not remove the LED covers.

Headlight glass

The inside of the headlight glass can fog up in cool or humid weather. When driving with the lights switched on, the condensation evaporates after a short time. The headlight glass does not need to be changed.

If, despite driving with the headlights switched on, moisture such as water droplets increasingly forms in the light, have the headlights checked.

Vehicle battery

In the event of a malfunction, the vehicle manufacturer recommends having any corresponding work, e.g., replacing the vehicle battery, performed by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. More information on the vehicle battery can be requested from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

DANGER

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.

Warning

Vehicle batteries that are not recommended can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Only use vehicle batteries recommended by the vehicle manufacturer. For information on suitable vehicle batteries, contact an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Registering the vehicle battery in the vehicle

The vehicle manufacturer recommends having an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has been changed. Once the battery has been registered again, all comfort features will be available without limitation and any Check

Replacing components

MOBILITY

Hazard icons

The following hazard icons can be found on the vehicle battery:

Icon Meaning

	No smoking, no open flames, no sparks.
	Wear safety goggles.
	Keep away from children.
	Risk of chemical burn: wear gloves, do not tilt battery.
	Flush acid splashes with water immediately. In the event of contact with the eyes or swallowing, seek a physician immediately.
	No direct daylight, no frost.
	Follow the operating instructions.
	Explosive gas mixture. Do not close any openings of the battery.

Charging the vehicle battery

General information

Make sure that the vehicle battery is always sufficiently charged to ensure that the vehicle battery can be used for its entire service life.

The maximum charging voltage is 14.4 volts. The following circumstances can negatively affect the vehicle battery's performance; - Frequent short-distance drives. - Stationary periods of more than one month.

Safety Information

NOTICE

Non-compatible external battery chargers can damage the vehicle. There is a risk of property damage. Only use battery chargers recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for the vehicle type. Oserve the maximum charging voltage. Information on suitable battery chargers can be provided by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Warning

Battery chargers that charge the vehicle battery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V electrical system. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the jump-start terminals in the engine compartment.

Charging the vehicle battery

To charge the vehicle battery, first switch off the combustion engine, then use the jump-start terminals in the engine compartment. Additional information:

Jump-start terminals, refer to page 337.

MOBILITY

Replacing components

If the vehicle is stationary for a longer period, charge the vehicle battery every 6 weeks to avoid excessive discharge.

Low battery charge

If the battery charge is very low, the vehicle battery is automatically disconnected from the vehicle electrical system.

If the vehicle battery is discharged, all electrical components are deactivated. The vehicle can no longer be operated.

To reactivate, charge the vehicle battery via the jump start terminals.

Deeply discharged vehicle battery

If the vehicle battery is not charged in time, it will be deeply discharged. The battery can then no longer be charged.

Power interruption

After a power interruption, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual settings updated, for example:

▶ Parking broke, refer to page 123.
▶ With Memory function: store the positions again.
▶ Time: update.
Date: update.
▷ Glass sunroof: Initialize the system.

Deep sleep mode

Use deep sleep mode for long stationary periods.

Additional information:

Deep sleep mode, refer to page 41.

Disposing of old batteries

Transport and store full vehicle batteries in an upright position. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport.

Batteries contain harmful chemicals. Disposing of batteries with household waste is prohibited by law.

Fuses

General information

The fuses are located at different places in the vehicle.

Information on the fuse layout and the positions of the fuse boxes is available on the Internet; fusecard.bmw.com.

Safety information

Warning

Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload electrical lines and components. There is a risk of fire, Injury and a risk of damage to property damage. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating.

Replacing fuses

The vehicle manufacturer recommends having the fuses replaced by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Breakdown Assistance

MOBILITY

Breakdown Assistance

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information: Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Hazard warning system

Hazard warning system button

The red light in the button flashes when the hazard warning system is turned on.

Warning triangle

Press on the release, arrow 1, and swivel the cover down, arrow 2.

First-aid kit

General information

Depending on the vehicle equipment and national-market version, the vehicle is equipped with a first-aid kit.

Some of the articles have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly.

Storage

Storage for the first-old kit is provided in the right storage compartment of the cargo area.

Emergency Call

Principle

In case of an emergency, an emergency cell can be triggered automatically by the system or manually.

MOBILITY

Breakdown Assistance

The Intelligent Assist system establishes a connection with the BMW Response Center. Intelligent emergency calls are made using a SIM card that is integrated into the vehicle.

The BMW Response Center then makes contact with the occupants of the vehicle and initiates further steps to help.

If an intelligent emergency call is made, the data used to determine necessary rescue measures, e.g., the vehicle's current location. If it can be determined, is sent to the BMW Response Center.

Even if the driver is unable to respond, the BMW Response Center can, under certain circumstances, initiate steps to provide further assistance.

Even if the BMW Response Center is no longer heard through the loudspeakers, the BMW Response Center may still be able to hear the occupants of the vehicle.

The BMW Response Center ends the emergency call.

General information

Only press the SOS button in the headliner in an emergency.

For technical reasons, the emergency call cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable conditions.

The Head-up display may turn off while an emergency call is ongoing.

Overview

The SOS button is located in the head liner.

Functional requirements

To use the emergency call, the following functional requirements must be met:

Standby state is switched on.

The Emergency Call system is functioning correctly.

The integrated SIM cord in the vehicle has been activated.

Automatic triggering

Under certain conditions, for example if the airbags are deployed, an emergency call is automatically triggered immediately after an accident of corresponding severity. Automatic Collision Notification is not affected by pressing the SOS button.

If an emergency call is placed, all other signal tones and audio sources such as the Pork Distance Control are muted.

Manual triggering

To initiate an emergency call manually, proceed as follows:

1. Top the cover flap.

2. Press and hold the SOS button in the head liner until the LED near the button illuminates green.

The LED is illuminated green when on Emergency Call has been initiated.

If a cancel prompt appears on the control display, the emergency call can be aborted. If the situation allows, wait in the vehicle until the voice connection has been established.

Malfunction

The function of the emergency call may be impaired.

The LED near the SOS button flashes for approximately 30 seconds. A Check Control message is displayed.

An emergency cell may be disrupted in the following circumstances, among others:

Extended vehicle idle times.

Intense sunlight on vehicle roof.

Have the vehicle checked by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Jump-starting

General information

If the battery is discharged, the combustion engine can be started using the battery on another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles.

Safety information

DANGER

Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage.

Warning

If the jumper cables are connected in the incorrect order, spark formation may occur. There is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the

Warning

In the case of body contact between the two vehicles, a short circuit can occur while jump-starting. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. Make sure that no body contact occurs.

Preparation

1. Check whether the battery of the other vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
3. Switch off any electrical components in both vehicles.

Jump-start terminals

The jump-start terminals are located in the engine compartment.

Additional information:

For an overview, refer to page 319.

Open the covers of the jump-start terminals.

Connecting jumper cables

Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary electronic systems/components such as the radio on the assisting and receiving vehicles.

1. Open the lid of the jump-start terminal.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive battery terminal, or to the corresponding jump-start terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive battery terminal, or to the corresponding jump-start terminal

MOBILITY

Breakdown Assistance

nal, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle.

1. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative battery terminal, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting the engine

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.

1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed.
   If the vehicle to be started has a diesel engine; let the engine of the assisting vehicle run for approx. 10 minutes.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be started in the usual way.

If the first attempt to start the engine is not successful, wait a few minutes before making another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

1. Let both engines run for several minutes.
2. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order.

Check the battery and recharge, if needed.

Tow-starting/towing

Safety information

Warning

When towing while safety systems or driver assistance systems are activated, the behavior of the individual systems may lead to an accident, e.g., due to automatic braking or acceleration. There is a risk of accident, in-

Pushing the vehicle

To remove a broken-down vehicle from the hazard area, it can be pushed for distances of approx. 328 ft/100 m at a speed of max. 6 mph/10 km/h.

Additional information:

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 116.

Manual transmission

Safety information

Warning

The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.

Only lift the vehicle using a suitable device.

Do not lift or secure the vehicle on the towing eye, rims, body components, or chassis components.
For transport, secure the vehicle by placing special tire straps over the tire trend surfaces in the vehicle's longitudinal direction.

Towing or pushing the vehicle

A broken-down vehicle can be towed or pushed.
Follow the following instructions:

Make sure that the standby state is switched on; otherwise, the low-beam headlights, toll lights, turn signals, and wipers may be unavailable.
Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle, tilted, as the front wheels could turn

Larger steering wheel movements are required.
The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control vehicle handling.
Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h.
Do not exceed a towing distance of 30 miles/50 km.

Additional Information:

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 114.

Tow truck

The vehicle should be transported with a tow truck with a so-called spectacle lift or on a loading platform.

When using a tow dolly, make sure that none of the wheels touch the ground. This method should be used for distances of 124 miles/200 km. Note the loads and speeds specified by the tow dolly manufacturer.

M Steptronic Sport transmission: Transporting the vehicle

General information

The vehicle must be transported on a loading platform or raw daily.

Safety Information

NOTICE

The vehicle can be damaged when towing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of property damage. Have vehicle transported on a loading platform or use a tow dolly. Tow dolles must be used under the rear wheels only. Also make sure that no wheel is touching the ground.

Warning

The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage.

▶ Only lift the vehicle using a suitable device.
Do not lift or secure the vehicle on the towing eye, rims, body components, or chassis components.
For transport, secure the vehicle by placing special tire straps over the tire tread surfaces in the vehicle's longitudinal direction.

Tow truck

Have vehicle transported on a loading platform

MOBILITY

Breakdown Assistance

well as specified loads and speeds, given by the low dolly manufacturer.

Towing other vehicles

Principle

Switch on the hazard warning system, depending on local regulations.

If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear window.

Safety information

Warning

If the approved gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be towed, the towing eye can tear off or it will not be possible to control vehicle handling. There is a risk of accident, injury, and property damage. Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed.

NOTICE

If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incorrectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur. There is a risk of property damage. Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the towing eye.

Tow bar

The towing eyes used should be on the same side on both vehicles.

If it is impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an inclination, note the following:

Tow rope

Observe the following notes when using the tow rope:

▶ Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the vehicle to be towed without jerking.

▶ Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when fastening.

▶ Check the attachment of the towing eye and tow rope in regular intervals.

Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h.

Do not exceed a towing distance of 3 miles/5 km.

When driving off to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is tout.

Towing eye

Principle

The towing eye is a device that can be screwed onto the vehicle in order to, e.g., secure tow cables or tow rods.

General information

The screw-in towing eye should always be carried in the vehicle.

The towing eye can be screwed in at the front or rear of the vehicle.

Safety Information

NOTICE

If the towing eye is not used as intended, there may be damage to the vehicle or to the towing eye. There is a risk of property damage. Follow the notes on using the towing eye.

Storage

Depending on vehicle equipment, the towing eye may be stored in a bag as follows:

In the cargo area under the cargo area floor.
In the cargo area on the left or right side.
In the cargo area behind a side trim panel.

Using the towing eye

When using the towing eye, note the following:

Use only the towing eye provided with the vehicle.
Turn the towing eye at least 5 turns clockwise and screw it in as far as it will go. If necessary, tighten with a suitable object.
After use, unscrew the towing eye counterclockwise.
Use the towing eye for towing on paved roods only.
Avoid lateral loading of the towing eye, for instance do not lift the vehicle by the towing eye.
Check the attachment of the towing eye in regular intervals.

Towing eye thread

The towing eye thread is located behind a cover on the front and rear bumper.

To remove the cover, press the mark on the edge of the cover. To make removal easier, simultaneously pull on the opposite side of the cover.

Tow-starting

Do not tow-start the vehicle.

Start the engine by jump-starting, if possible.

Have the cause of starting issues corrected by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Additional information:

Jump-starting, refer to page 337.

MOBILITY

Vehicle core

Vehicle care

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

Washing the vehicle

General information

Regularly remove by hand foreign objects, e.g., leaves or snow, from the area below the wind-shield or from the air inlets at the front of the vehicle.

Wash the vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. Intense contamination and road salt can damage the vehicle.

Additional information:

Fold-out position of the wipers, refer to page 159.

Safety information

Warning

When driving, high temperatures can occur underneath the vehicle body, e.g., due to the exhaust system, brakes or radiator. Contact with the hot components can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch hot components. Do not perform work in the vicinity of hot components until after they have

NOTICE

When washing with an open fuel filler flap, damage may occur. There is a risk of property damage. Close the fuel filler flap before washing. Clean dirt behind the fuel filler flap with a cloth.

Steam-jet cleaner and high pressure cleaner

Safety information

NOTICE

When using high-pressure cleaners, components can be damaged due to the pressure or high temperatures or because on insufficient distance was maintained. There is a risk of property damage. Make sure that sufficient distance is maintained. Do not spray continuously on one spot. Follow the operating instructions for the high pressure cleaners.

Distances and temperature

When cleaning with a steam/high-pressure cleaner, make sure to use the specified temperatures and distances.

Maximum temperature: 140°F/60°C.

Minimum distance to glass sunroof:

31.5 in/80 cm.

Minimum distance of 12 in/30 cm to the following components:

▷ Sensors.

Vehicle core

MOBILITY

Cables.
Plug connectors.

Automatic car washes or car washes

Safety Information

NOTICE

Using a car wash with high pressure washers may result in water penetration of window areas. There is a risk of property damage. Do not drive into high-pressure car wash systems.

NOTICE

Improper use of automatic car washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of property damage. Follow the following instructions:

▶ Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage.
▶ Note the permissible vehicle dimensions for the car wash.
Do not drive through a car wash with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to the body.
▶ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to avoid damage to tires and rims.
▶ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to the exterior mirrors.
▶ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain sensor to avoid damage to the window wiper system.

Take off all removable attachments, e.g.,

Driving into a car wash

NOTICE

Selector lever position P is automatically engaged when standby state is switched off. The wheels are blocked. There is a risk of property damage. Do not switch off standby if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g., in a car wash.

In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll freely.

Some car washes do not permit persons in the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever position N. A signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle.

Additional information:

Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 116.

Driving out of a car wash

Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car.

Turn on drive-ready state.

Additional information:

Drive-ready state, refer to page 42.

Lights

Do not rub wet lights dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents or cleaning agents containing alcohol.
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance from insects, with auto shampoo and wash off with water.
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper.

MOBILITY

Vehicle core

while braking dries brake disks and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

Completely remove all residues on the windows to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear.

Vehicle care

Vehicle care products

General information

BMW recommends using vehicle core and cleaning agents from BMW. Suitable vehicle core products are available from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Safety information

Warning

Cleaning agents can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health. There is a risk of injury and risk of property damage. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use cleaning agents that are intended for cleaning the respective component. Follow the instructions on the packaging.

Vehicle paintwork

General information

Regular vehicle care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural contaminants such as tree resin or

mediately to prevent alterations or discolorations of the finish.

Matte paintwork

Only use cleaning and core products suitable for vehicles with matte paintwork.

Plastic wrap

Use only cleaning and care products that are suitable for vehicles with a plastic wrap.

Leather care

Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to heavy abrasion and premature degradation of the leather surface.

To guard against discoloration such as from clothing, clean leather and provide leather core roughly every two months.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently because contamination on such surfaces is substantially more visible.

Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective coating of the leather surface.

Remove aggressive substances, e.g., sunscreen, immediately to prevent alterations or discolorations of the leather.

Synthetic leather core

Clean synthetic leather regularly with a domp microfiber cloth or vacuum cleaner.

Otherwise, dust and road grime particles will rub into pores and foils, causing significant abrasion and premature degradation of the surface.

Vehicle core

MOBILITY

Immediately remove aggressive substances, e.g., sunscreen, to prevent alterations or discolorations of the synthetic leather.

Fabric care

General information

In case of major contaminations such as beverage stains, use a moist soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaners. Immediately remove aggressive substances, e.g., sunscreen, to prevent alterations or discolorations of the fabric.

Safety information

NOTICE

Open hook and loop fasteners, zippers, or applications, e.g., studs on clothing can damage the seat covers and the other fabric and leather covers in the vehicle. There is a risk of property damage. Make sure that the fasteners are closed.

Upholstery material care

Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner.

Clean extensively down to the seams. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously.

Textile care

Use a microfiber cloth for cleaning minor contamination.

Dompen the cloth with water.

Alcantara

Use microfiber cloth soaked with water to clean minor soiling. Avoid rubbing the material

Caring for special components

Displays, operating elements, and protective glass of the Head-up display

NOTICE

Surfaces can be damaged by Improper cleaning, e.g., by using chemical cleaners, or from moisture or liquid of any kind. There is a risk of property damage.

▶ Avoid pressure that is too high and do not use any scratching materials.

▶ Use a dry, clean antistatic microfiber cloth for cleaning displays.

- Clean the operating elements and, depending on vehicle equipment, the protective glass of the Head-up display with a damp microfiber cloth and standard household dish soap.

Light-alloy wheels

When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral rim cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam-jet cleaners above 140°F/60°C. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.

Corrosive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning agents can damage the rim surface and the protective layer on adjacent components, e.g., the brakes.

After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry them. The heat generated while braking dries broke disks and brake pads and protects them against corrosion.

Chrome surfaces

Carefully clean chrome-like surfaces, especially

MOBILITY

Vehicle core

Rubber components

Environmental influences can cause surface contamination of rubber parts and a loss of glass. Use only water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning.

Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber care products at regular intervals. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing vehicle care products in order to avoid damage or noises.

Wiper blades

The wiper blades are cleaned by using the window washer system.

Avoid cleaning the wiper blades manually, as this may reduce wiper performance.

Fine wood parts

Clean the fine wood veneer and fine wood components with a damp cloth. Then dry with a soft cloth.

Plastic components

NOTICE

Solvent cleaners that contain alcohol or solvents such as lacquer thinners, cold cleaning agents, fuel and such, can damage plastic parts. There is a risk of property damage. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Moisten the cloth lightly with water if necessary.

When cleaning plastic parts, make sure that no fabric parts, e.g., the headliner, become wet.

Carbon parts

For easy cleaning of carbon parts, use a micro-fiber cloth, water, and silicone-free cleaner to

If necessary, have carbon parts removed by an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Seat belts

Warning

Chemical solvent cleaners can destroy the fabric of the seat belts and lead to seat belts no longer having their protective effect. There is a risk of injury and danger to life. Use only a mild soap solution for cleaning the seat belts.

Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus should be avoided for safety reasons.

Use only a mild soap solution for cleaning the installed belt stops.

Seat belts should only be allowed to retract if they are dry.

Carpets and floor mats

Warning

Objects in the driver's footwell can limit the pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident, Injury, and property damage. Slow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's footwell. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be softly attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning.

The floor mats ran he removed from the inte-

Vehicle core

pet, rub back and forth in the driving direction only.

Sensors and camera lenses

To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass detergent.

REFERENCE

Technical data

Technical data

Vehicle features and options

This chapter describes model-specific equipment, systems, and functions that are currently available, or may become available in the future, even if they are not present in the vehicle.

Additional Information:

Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.

General information

The technical data and specifications in the Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. Vehicle-specific data may deviate from this,

for instance due to the optional equipment chosen, national-market version, or country-specific measuring process. More specific values can be obtained in approval documents, on the vehicle Info label, or from an authorized service center or another qualified service center or repair shop.

Dimensions

The dimensions can vary depending on the model version, equipment version or country-specific measurement procedure.

The height of the vehicle can also differ, e.g., due to tires and vehicle load.

Detailed technical data

BMW M4 CoupeDimensions
Width with mirrors in 01.9	mm 2,081
Width without mirrors in 75.5	mm 1,918
Height in 55.1	mm 1,399
Length in 189.1	mm 4,804

Wheelbase in 112.5

Technical data

REFERENCE

BMW M4 Coupe

Dimensions

Fuel tank, approx. US gal 15.6

Liters 59

BMW M4 Coupe

Weight

Maximum permissible payload, manual transmission lb 769

kg 349

Maximum permissible total weight, manual transmission lb 4,751

kg 2,155

Maximum permissible front axle load, manual 1b 2,370

transmission

kg 1,075

Maximum permissible rear axle load, manual Ib 2,502

transmission

kg 1,135

BMW M4 CS

Weight

Maximum permissible payload, automatic transmission lb 769

kg 349

Maximum permissible total weight, automatic Ib 4,828

transmission

kg 2,190

Maximum permissible front axle load, automatic Ib 2,469

transmission

kg 1,120

Maximum permissible rear axle load, automatic Ib 2,535

REFERENCE

Technical data

BMW M4 Competition Coupe
Weight

Maximum permissible payload, automatic transmission	lb 769
	kg 349
Maximum permissible total weight, automatic transmission	lb 4,751
	kg 2,155
Maximum permissible front axle load, automatic transmission	lb 2,370
	kg 1,075
Maximum permissible rear axle load, automatic transmission	lb 2,502
	kg 1,135

BMW M4 Competition Coupe M xDrive
Weight

Maximum permissible payload, automatic transmission lb 769
	kg 349
Maximum permissible total weight, automatic transmission	lb 4,861
	kg 2,205
Maximum permissible front axle load, automatic transmission	lb 2,469
	kg 1,120
Maximum permissible rear axle load, automatic transmission	lb 2,535
	kg 1,150

Appendix

REFERENCE

Appendix

General information

Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehicle are listed here.

Updates made after the editorial deadline

The following chapters were updated in the printed version of the Owner's Manual after the editorial deadline for the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle had closed:

Operation: opening and closing: BMW Digital Key.
Operation: Opening and closing: Key Card; Deactivating the Key Card.

Mobility: Operating fluids: Fuel quality: Gasoline: Safety instructions.
▶ Mobility: Operating fluids: Recommended fuel: Gasoline: Minimum quality.

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

Everything from A to Z

Index

0-9

3D view 235

A

ABS, see Antilock Braking System 191

Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 120

Acceleration sensor, see G-Meter 144

Accessories and parts 9

Accident prevention, see Active Protection 187

ACC, see Cruise Control with Distance Control 211

Activated carbon filter, see Interior filter 257

Activation points, panorama view 235

Activation word 53

Active Blind Spot Detection 176

Active Cruise Control 211

Active damping control, see Adaptive M suspension 248

Active Guard, see Collision warning systems 164

Active M differential 203

Active Park Distance Control 241

Active Protection 107

Active seat ventilation 255

Adaptive lighting functions 154

Adaptive M suspension 248

Adding engine oil types 325

Additional camera view displays 231

Additives, engine oil types 325

Advanced Real Time Traffic Information, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

After run of fan, see Exhaust and particulate

Air conditioning system 249

Air distribution, manual 252

Air drying, see air conditioning 253

Air flow, air conditioning system 252

Air outlets, see Ventilation 256

Air pressure, tires 290

Air quality 257

Air vent, see Ventilation 256

Alarm, avoiding 87

Alarm system 86

Alcantara, care, see Fabric care 345

All-season tires, see Winter tires 299

All-season tires, tread 296

All-wheel drive, see M xDrive 199

Ambient light 156

Android Auto, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 327

Antilock Braking System 191

Anti-theft protection, lug bolt lock 315

Anti-trap mechanism, glass sunroof 92

Anti-trap mechanism, windows 89

Apple CarPlay, see Owner's Manual for Novi-

gation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Applications see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Applications, see Owner's Manual for Navigation

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6

Apps, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-

tertainment, Communication 6

Assistance with breakdown 335

Assistance with driving off on inclines, see

Drive-off Assistant 12

Assisted Driving Mode Plus 224

Assisted Driving Mode, see Steering Assis-

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

AUTO H, see Automatic Hold 123

Automatic camera perspective 233

Automatic car wash, see Washing the vehicle 342

Automatic control, headlight 152

Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 102

Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger airbags 162

Automatic dimming, see High Beam Assistant 149

Automatic headlight control 152

Automatic Hold 123

Automatic locking B5

Automatic Parking Assistant 242

Automatic transmission, see M Steptronic Sport transmission 114

Automatic unlocking B5

Automatic wiper system, see Rain sensor 157

Automating routines, BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 57

AUTO program, climate control 250

Auto Start/Stop function 110

Average consumption, see Trip data 142

B

Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 96

Bockrest, seals 94

Backrest tilt 95

Bockrest width 96

Back-up Assistant 245

Bandages, see First-aid kit 335

Bar for tow-starting/towling 340

Battery, disposal 334

Battery, vehicle 332

Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 330

Belts, see Seat belts 98

Belt tension 98

Bluetooth connection, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

BMW app, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

BMW Curved Display 47

BMW Digital Key 72

BMW Drive Recorder 185

BMW ID 64

BMWIDrive 44

BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 53

BMW Live Cockpit Plus, see BMW Curved Display 47

BMW Live Cockpit Professional, see BMW

Curved Display 47

BMW maintenance system, see Maintenance system 329

BMW M technology 278

BMW Operating System, see BMW iDrive 44

BMW SIM Reader, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

BMW Theater Screen, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Bottle holder, front, see Cup holder, front 271

Brake assistant 191

Brake disks, see Brake system 280

Brake pads, see Brake system 280

Brake, sensitivity 196

Brake, settings 196

Brake system 280

Braking, Information 282

Breakdown assistance 335

Break-In 200

Break-in procedures 280

Break recommendation, see Fatigue Alert 100

Brightness, control display 48

Bulbs and lights 33

Button, central locking system 83

Buttons on the steering wheel 30

Button, SOS, see Intelligent emergency

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

C

Cable for tow-starting/towing 340

Calibration of the front seats 97

California Proposition 65 Warning 9

Camera cleaning 347

Camera, instrument cluster, see Driver Alten-

tion Camera 189

Camera lenses, care 347

Camera perspective, automatic 233

Camera, Rear View Camera 233

Comeras, see Vehicle sensors 35

Camera view aid lines 231

CANCEL button, Active Cruise Control 211

CANCEL button, Cruise Control 208

Carbon ceramic broke 278

Core 342

Core, displays, screens 345

Care, Head-up display 345

Core, light-alloy wheels 345

Core, vehicle 344

Cargo 273

Cargo area 273

Cargo area, enlarging 275

Cargo straps, see Lashing eyes in the cargo

area 274

Car key, see Vehicle key 69

Corpet, core 346

Car seats, see Transporting children safely 105

Cor washes, automatic 342

Car wash, see Washing the vehicle 342

Cor wash view 235

Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust sys-

tem 281

CBS, see Condition Based Service 329

Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment and Communication 6

Center armrest, front 271

Center console 32

Central display area, instrument cluster 141

Central Information Display (CID), see Control

Ceramic brake 278

Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 9

Change, wheels and tires 297

Changing parts 331

Changing wheels 314

Charging a smartphone, see Wireless charging

tray 267

Charging cradle 267

Charging tray for smartphones, see Wireless

charging tray 267

Chassis number, see Vehicle Identification

number 13

Check Control 131

Checking the engine oil level, electronic 324

Checking the oil level, electronic 324

Children, seating position 105

Children, transporting safely 105

Child restraint seats 105

Child restraint system LATCH 107

Child restraint systems, mounting 106

Child restraint systems, see Transporting chil-

dren safely 105

Child seat installation 106

Child seat, mounting 106

Child seats, see Transporting children

safely 105

Chrome-plated surfaces, core 345

Chrome surfaces, core 345

Cleaning, see Vehicle care 344

Climate control 249

Closing with the smartphone, see BMW Digital

Key 72

Clothes hooks 272

Coat hooks 272

Collision warning systems 164

Comfort Access, see Comfort Access 77

Communication, see Owner's Manual for Navi-

gation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Compact wheel, see Emergency wheel 313

Comparison of entries, see Entry comparl-

son 46

c 11 1 256

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

Condition Based Service 329

Confirmation signals 85

ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

ConnectedDrive services, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Connected Music, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle 5/

Connection, electrical devices, see Sockets 264

Consumption, see Trip data 14

Contacts, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Continuing driving with flat tire, see Flat Tire Monitor 307

Continuing driving with flat tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor 302

Control display 48

Controller 49

Control systems, driving stability 191

Convoy Assistant, see Assisted Driving Mode Plus 224

Coolant 326

Coolant level 326

Cooling, maximum 253

Cooling system 326

Cornering light 154

Corrosion, brake disks 283

Cosmetic mirror 264

Cross Traffic Warning 182

Cruise Control, see Cruise Control with Distance Control 211

Cruise Control with Distance Control 211

Cruise Control without Distance Control 208

Cruising range 145

Cup holder, front 271

Current driving condition 146

Curved Display 47

Dashboard 30

Dashboard, see Instrument cluster 127

Dashcam, see BMW Drive Recorder 185

Data memory 11

Data protection, settings 63

Data, see Personal data, deleting 63

Data, technical 348

Date 145

Day, see Date 145

Daytime driving lights 154

Daytime running lights 154

DCC, see Cruise Control without Distance Con-

trol 208

Deep sleep mode 41

Defrosting, windshield 254

Deleting, personal data 63

Departure schedule, see Pre-ventilation 257

Departure time, pre-conditioning via Remote

Engine Start 260

Departure time, pre-ventilation 258

Destination input 6

Diagnostic port 330

Diagnostic socket 330

Differential lock 203

Digital Key 72

Digital key, see BMW Digital Key 72

Dimmable interior mirror 102

Dimming exterior mirror 102

Direct dial buttons, see Shortcuts 47

Display and operating concept, see BMW

iDrive 44

Display, IDrive 46

Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 155

Display panel, see Instrument cluster 127

Displays 127

Displays and Icons 7

Displays for the vehicle, see Live Vehicle 128

Disposal, coolant 327

Disposal, vehicle battery 334

Distance Control, see Cruise Control 211

Distance Warning, see Park Distance Con-

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

Drive-off Assistant 121

Driver activity, see Driver Attention Camera 189

Driver Assistance, parking, see Parking assistance systems 228

Driver assistance systems 204

Driver Attention Camera 189

Drive-ready state, see Operating state of vehicle 40

Drive Recorder 185

Driver profiles 64

Driver profiles, welcome screen 64

Drive system 125

Driving 110

Driving Assistant, see Collision warning systems 164

Driving comfort 248

Driving condition, display 146

Driving mode, M MODE 193

Driving notes 280

Driving program, see Drivelogic 11B

Driving stability control systems 191

Driving through flood 282

Driving through water 282

Driving tips, see General driving notes 281

DSC, see Dynamic Stability Control 196

Dynamic Cruise Control, see Cruise Control 208

Dynamic damping, see Adoptive M suspension 248

Dynamic Stability Control 196

E

EDR, see Event data recorder 13

Electromechanical parking broke 121

Electronic oil measurement 324

Electronic stability program, see Dynamic Stability Control 196

Emergency brake, see Emergency Stop Assistant 181

Emergency Stop Assistant 181

Emergency unlocking, trunk lid B3

Emergency wheel 313

Emissions, see Pollutant emissions 330

Energy savings, see Gear shift Indicator 139

Engine, Auto Start/Stop function 110

Engine compartment 319

Engine coolant 326

Engine Dynamics Control 125

Engine oil filler neck 324

Engine oil, refilling 324

Engine oil temperature 140

Engine oil types to add 325

Engine starting, see Vehicle operating state 40

Engine start, see Jump-starting 337

Entering a destination, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's

Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and

Communication 5

Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Novi-

gation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Entertainment, selection list in the instrument

cluster 138

Entry comparison 46

Error indicators, see Check Control 131

eSIM telephony, see Owner's Manual for Novi-

gation, Entertainment, Communication 6

ESP, see Dynamic Stability Control 196

Evasion Assistant, see Forward Collision Miti-

gation 165

Event data recorder 13

Exchange, wheels and tires 297

Exhaust emissions, see Pollutant emis-

sions 330

Exhaust gas particulate filter 281

Exhaust gas system sound 126

Exhaust, see Exhaust system 201

Exhaust system 281

Exterior lighting, locked vehicle 153

Exterior mirror 101

F. 1 1 2 . . . . . . . . . .

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

Eyes, see Lashing eyes in the cargo area 274

F

Factory settings, see Vehicle data, resetting 63

Failure message, see Check Control 13

Fan after run, see Exhaust gas particulate fil-

ter 201

Fastening seat belts, see Seat belts 98

Fatigue Alert 188

Fatigue Alert, see Driver Attention Camera 189

Fatigue warner, see Fatigue Alert 188

Fault indicators, see Check Control 131

Filler neck for engine oil 324

Filter, see Interior filter 257

Fine wood parts, care 346

First-aid kit 335

Flat tire, changing wheels 314

Flat tire, continuing driving, see Flat Tire Monitor 307

Flat tire, continuing driving, see Tire Pressure

Monitor 302

Flat Tire Monitor 307

Flat tire notification, see Flat Tire Monitor 307

Flat tire notification, see Tire Pressure Moni

tor 302

Flat tire, repairing 309

Flat tire, see Flat Tire Monitor 307

Flat tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor 302

Flat tire warning light, see Flat Tire Moni-

tor 307

Flat tire warning light, see Tire Pressure Moni-

tor 302

Floor carpet, core 346

Floor mats, core 346

Fold-away position, wiper 159

Fold-out position 159

Foot broke 282

Forward Collision Mitigation 165

Forward Collision Warning, see Forward Colli-

slon Mitigation 165

Front passenger's side exterior mirror, tilting

down, see Automatic Curb Monitor 102

Front passenger airbags, automatic deactiva-

tion 162

Front radar sensor, see Vehicle sensors 35

Front-seat passenger airbag, indicator

light 163

Front seats 94

Fuel 322

Fuel filler cap 288

Fuel filler flap 288

Fuel gauge 145

Fuel quality 322

Fuel recommendation 322

Fuses 334

G

Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal

Remote Control 262

Gasoline 322

Gasoline particulate filter, see Exhaust gas

particulate filter 281

Gasoline particulate filter, see Exhaust particu-

late filter 281

Gasoline quality 323

Gear change 117

Gear Shift Assistant, manual transmission 113

Gearshift Indicator 139

Gearshift, manual transmission 113

General driving notes 201

Glare shield, see Sun visor 264

Glass sunroof 90

Glass sunroof, initializing the glass sunroof

and sun protection 92

Glove compartment 270

G-Meter 144

GPS navigation, navigation, see Owner's

Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-

munication 6

Everything from A to Z

Hands-free device, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Hands-free system 6
Hazard warning system 335
Head airbag 161
Headlight control, automatic 152
Headlight flasher 149
Headlight glass 332
Headlights, core 343
Headlights, replacing, see Bulbs and lights 331
Headlights, turning up, dimming, see High
Beam Assistant 149
Headliner 34
Head restraints and seats 94
Head restraints, front 100
Head-up display 129
Head-up display, core 345
Head-up display, store position, see Memory
function 103
Heavy cargo, stowing 274
High Beam Assistant 149
High-beam headlights 149
Higher speed range 281
High-performance engine 278
Hill Ascent Control, see Drive-off Assistant 121
Hills 283
HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote
Control 262
Homepage, see Internet 7
Hood 319
Horn 30
Hotel function, see Valet parking mode B4
Hot exhaust system 281

Indicator lights 131
Individual air distribution 252
Individual settings, see BMW ID 64
Individual settings, see M Setup 191
Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wireless
charging tray 267
Information 6
Information on Driver Assistance, displaying,
see Assisted View 143
Information window, control display 47
Input, IDrive 46
Inserts, see Supplementary documentation 7
Installation of child restraint systems 106
Instrument cluster 127
Instrument lighting 155
Instrument panel, see Instrument cluster 127
Integrated key 70
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 6
Integrated Universal Remote Control 262
Intelligent emergency call 335
Intelligent Personal Assistant 53
Intelligent Safety, see Collision warning sys
tems 164
Intended use 9
Interior equipment 262
Interior filter 257
Interior lights 155
Interior lights, locked vehicle 153
Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 102
Interior motion sensor 87
Internet page
Intersection Collision Warning, see Forward
Collision Mitigation 165
Interval Indicator, see Service notifications 147

|

J

IBroke PostCrash 188

Ice warning, see Outside temperature 140

Icons and displays 7

Identification marks, tires 295

Identification number, see Vehicle Identification

Jacking points 316

Jacking points for the vehicle Jack 316

Journey data 142

Joystick, M Steptronic Sport transmission 114

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

K

Key Card 76

Key, mechanical 70

Key, see Vehicle key 69

Kickdown, M Steptronic Sport transmission 114

Knee airbag 161

L

Labeling 295

Lane boundary 172

Lane Change Assistant 226

Lane control assistant with active side collision

mitigation, see Side Collision Protection 178

Lane Departure Warning 172

Lane Keeping Assistant, see Steering Assistant 220

Lone lines, additional camera view dis-

plays 231

Lane threshold, warning 172

Laser headlights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 331

Lashing eyes in the cargo area 274

LATCH child restraint system 107

Lateral Parking Aid 233

Launch Control 120

Leather care 344

LED headlights, changing, see Bulbs and lights 331

Letters and numbers, entering 46

Light-alloy wheels, care 345

Light in exterior mirror, see Active Blind Spot

Detection 176

Light in exterior mirror, see Cross Traffic Warning 182

Lighting 151

Light replacement, see Bulbs and lights 331

Lights 149

Lights, care 343

Light switch 151

Live Vehicle 128

Load 274

Loading 273

Loading the cargo area, see Loading 273

Local time, see Time 145

Locking, see Opening and Closing 69

Locking, settings 85

Locking the cargo area, see Valet parking

mode 84

Lock, lug bolts 315

Long stationary periods, see Deep sleep

mode 41

Loop, see Towling eye 340

Low-beam headlights 153

Lower back support, see Lumbar support 96

Low Speed Assistant 118

Lug bolt lock 315

Luggage rack, refer to Roof bars 284

Luggage straps 274

Lumbar support 96

M

Maintenance 329

Maintenance recommendation, see Condition

Bosed Service 329

Maintenance system 329

Make-up mirror 264

Malfunction, vehicle key 72

Manually unlocking doors, see Integrated

key 70

Manual mode, M Steplronic Sport transmis-

sion 114

Manual Speed Limiter 206

Manual transmission 113

Map, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-

tertainment, Communication 6

Map update, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6

Matte paintwork 344

Matt point, core 344

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

M differential, active 203

MDM, see M Dynamic Mode 198

M Drift Analyzer 201

M Dynamic Mode 198

Medical supplies, see First-aid klt 335

Memory function 103

M Engine Dynamics Control 125

Messages, see Check Control 131

Messages, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6

Meters, see Instrument cluster 127

Microfilter, see Interior filter 257

Minimum tread depth, tires 296

M MODE 193

Mobile devices, connecting 57

Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Navi-

gation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Mobility system, see Tire repair set 309

MODE button, see Active Cruise Control 211

Modifications, technical, see For Your Own

Safety 9

Moisture in headlight, see Headlight glass 332

Monitor, see Control display 48

Motorsport, see Driving on a race track 284

Mounting of child restraint systems 106

MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6

M Setup 191

M Steptronic Sport transmission 114

M suspension, adaptive, see Adaptive M sus-

pension 248

M technology 278

M Traction Control 200

Mug holder, front, see Cup holder, front 271

Multifunction hook 274

Multi-function steering wheel 30

Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 30

MxDrive 199

My BMW app, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6

Neutral cleaner, light-alloy wheels, see

Core 345

Notifications, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-

tion, Entertainment, Communication 6

Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 340

0

OBD, see Diagnostic socket 330

Obstacle marking, additional camera view dis-

plays 231

Octane number, see Gasoline quality 323

Odometer, see Trip data 142

OFF Indicator, see Standby and drive-ready

state 139

Oil filler neck 324

Oil, refilling 324

Oil service Interval, see Service notifico-

tions 147

Oil types to add, engine 325

Old battery 334

On-board computer, see Trip data 142

On-board diagnosis, see Diagnostic

socket 330

Onboard toolkit 331

One-touch signaling 149

Opening and closing 69

Opening and closing the cargo area 81

Opening and closing the trunk lid 81

Opening with the smartphone, see BMW Digi-

tal Key 72

Operating fluids 322

Operating principle, see BMW iDrive 44

Operating state of vehicle 40

Operating system, see BMW IDrive 44

Operation via voice 53

Optimize acceleration values, see Shift

lights 140

Optional equipment, see Vehicle equipment B

Outside temperature 140

Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle stor-

P

Paint, vehicle core 344

Paintwork 344

Panic alarm, see Panic mode 87

Panic mode 87

Panorama View 235

Panorama View, see Panorama View 235

Panoramic display, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Panoramic glass sunroof, see Glass sun-

roof 90

Park Distance Control 238

Parking 228

Parking aid lines, additional camera view displays 231

Parking assistance systems 228

Parking assistant 242

Parking Assistant Plus, see Parking assistance systems 22B

Parking Assistant, see Park Distance Control 238

Parking Assistant, see Parking assistance systems 22B

Parking brake 121

Parking broke function, see Active Park Distance Control 241

Parking lights 152

Parking lock, see Engaging selector lever position 114

Parking lock, see Selector lever positions 114

Parking with Automatic Hold 123

Particulate filter, see Exhaust gas particulate filter 281

Parts and accessories 9

Pathway lighting 154

Pathway lighting, turning on 154

Payload 274

PDC, see Park Distance Control 238

Pedestrian Warning, see Forward Collision Mitigation 165

Personal eSIM, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Personal hotspot, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Personal profile, see BMW ID 64

Personal settings 63

Physical units, see Setting units of measure-

ment 146

Plastic parts, core 346

Pollutant emissions 330

Pop-up 47

PostCrash iBrake 188

Power failure 334

Power interruption 334

Power windows 8B

Pre-conditioning through Remote Engine

Start 259

PreCrash functions, see Active Protection 187

Pressure monitor, tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor 302

Pressure, tires 290

Pressure warning, see Flat Tire Monitor 307

Pressure warning, see Tire Pressure Moni-

tor 302

Pretensioning, seat belt 9B

Pre-ventilation 257

Prevention of rear-end collision, see Rear-End

Collision Preparation 180

Primary user, see BMW ID 66

Protective function, glass sunroof, see Anti-

trap mechanism 92

Protective function, windows, see Anti-trap

mechanism 89

Push-and-tum reel, see Controller 49

R

Race track 284

Radar sensors, see Vehicle sensors 35

Radiator fan, see Exhaust gas particulate filter 201

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

Radio stations, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Rain sensor 157
Rain sensor mode 157
READY Indicator, see Standby and drive-ready state 139
Rear air conditioning 249
Rear-End Collision Preparation 180
Rear light, replacing, see Bulbs and lights 331
Rear seat backrests, folding down 275
Rear View Camera 233
Rear View Camera, see Vehicle sensors 35
Rear-view mirror, exterior 101
Rear window defroster 255
Recirculated-air mode 253
Recirculating air filter, see Interior filter 257
Recommended gear for best possible acceleration, see Shift lights 140
Recommended gear, see Gearshift Indicator 139
Recommended tire brands 298
Refueling 288
Release fuel filler flap, manual 289
Remote 3D View 237
Remote control, see Vehicle key 69
Remote control, universal 262
Remote Engine Start, see Pre-conditioning 259
Remote services, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Remote Software Upgrade 59
Renewal, wheels and tires 297
Replacement, wheels and tires 297
Replacing bulbs, see Bulbs and lights 331
Replacing light-emitting diodes, see Bulbs and lights 331
Replacing parts 331
Replacing the battery, vehicle key 70
Reporting safety malfunctions 14
RES CNCL button, Active Cruise Control 211
RES CNCL button, Cruise Control 208

Restricted Driving, see BMW Digital Key 72

RESUME button, Active Cruise Control 211

RESUME button, Cruise Control 208

Retreaded tires 298

Reversing Assistant 245

Roadside parking lights 153

Rollback Prevention, see Drive-off Assls-

tant 121

Rolling code hand-held transmitter 263

RON, see gasoline quality 323

Roof bars 204

Roofliner 34

Roof luggage rock, refer to Roof bars 204

Rope for tow-starting/towing 340

Route, navigation, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

RPM change, see Gear Shift Assistant 113

Rubber components, care 346

S

Safe braking 2B2

Safe Share function, see BMW Digital Key 72

Safety 160

Safety and warning, see Collision warning sys

tems 164

Safety package, see Active Protection 187

Safety systems, see Airbags 160

Safety systems, see Collision warning sys-

tems 164

Satellite radio, see Owner's Manual for Novi-

gation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Saved stations, see Owner's Manual for Navi-

gation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Screen, see BMW Curved Display 47

Screen, see Control display 48

Sealant, see Tire repair set 309

Seat belt reminder, see Seat belt warning 99

Seat belts 98

Seat belts, core 346

Seat belt warning 99

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

Seats and head restraints 94

Seats, front 94

Seat ventilation, active 255

Securing, cargo 274

Securing vehicle to prevent rolling away, see Parking brake 121

Selection list on the instrument cluster 138

Selector lever 114

Selector lever, M Steptronic Sport transmission 114

Semi-slick, see Track tires 299

Sensors, core 347

Sequential mode 116

Service and warranty 10

Service notifications 147

Service notifications, see Condition Based

Service 329

Servotronic 195

SET button, Active Cruise Control 211

SET button, Cruise Control 208

Setting the language, see Setting the system language 55

Setting the system language 55

Setting the time 145

Setting units of measurement 146

Shift lights 140

Shift paddles on the steering wheel 114

Shortcuts, iDrive 47

Side airbag 160

Side Collision Protection 170

Side protection, see Automatic camera perspective 233

Side view 234

Signalling, horn 30

SIM Reader, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Sitting safely 94

Slipperiness, see Outside temperature 140

Slippery road, see Outside temperature 140

Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6

Software Update, see Remote Software Upgrade 59

Software Upgrade, see Remote Software Upgrade 59

Soot particulate filter, see Exhaust gas particulate filter 281

SOS button, see Intelligent emergency cell 335

Sound control 126

Sound, exhaust gas system 126

Sound settings, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Sound system, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 313

Speed control, see Cruise Control 208

Speed indicator, see Speedometer 127

Speed Limit Assist 218

Speed Limit Assistant 218

Speed Limit Device, Speed Limiter 206

Speed limit, display, see Speed Limit Info with

no-passing indicator 204

Speed Limit Info with no-passing indicator 204

Speedometer, see Instrument cluster 127

Speed warning 204

Sport displays 147

Sport program, M Steptronic Sport transmission 114

Sports automatic transmission, M Steptronic

Sport transmission 114

Sport suspension, see Adaptive M suspen-

sion 248

Stability control systems 191

Standard equipment, see Vehicle equipment 8

Standby state, see Operating state of vehicle 40

Start/Stop, automatic, see Auto Start/Stop function 110

Start/Stop button 110

Starting aid terminals 337

Starting, see Vehicle operating state 40

Starting the engine, see Vehicle operating

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

Status control display, tires 303

Status information, iDrive 45

Status of Owner's Manual 8

Status, vehicle 146

Steering Assistant 220

Steering column adjustment 103

Steering support, see Servotronic 195

Steering wheel, adjusting 103

Steering wheel, buttons 30

Storage compartment, cargo area 275

Storage compartment, center console 271

Storage compartments 270

Storage, tires 299

Store Mirror position, see Memory function 103

Store seat position, see Memory function 103

Store steering wheel position, see Memory

function 103

Storing the vehicle 330

Stowage, cargo 274

Straps for cargo, see Lashing eyes in the cargo area 274

Summer tires, tread 296

Sun visar 264

Supplementary documentation 7

Supplementary Owner's Manuals, see Supple-

mentary documentation 7

Switches, see Dashboard 30

Switching off the engine, see Vehicle operating

stole 40

SYNC program, Climate control 254

T

Tachometer 139

Tachometer, see Shift lights 140

Taillights, replacing, see Bulbs and lights 331

Taking the vehicle out of service 330

Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 9

Technical data 348

Technology, BMW M 278

Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigo-

Temperature, air conditioning system 251

Temperature display, see outside tempera-

ture 140

Temperature, engine oil 140

Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 86

Thigh support 96

Tilt alarm sensor 87

Tilt, backrest 95

Tilting down, front passenger's side exterior

mirror, see Automatic Curb Monitor 102

Time settings, see Date and time 145

Time zone 145

Tire brands, recommendation 298

Tire change 297

Tire damage 297

Tire identification marks 295

Tire inflation pressure 290

Tire marking 295

Tire pressure 290

Tire Pressure Monitor 302

Tire pressure monitoring, see Tire Pressure

Monitor 302

Tire Pressure Monitor, reset 303

Tire Pressure Monitor, see Flat Tire Moni-

tar 307

Tire pressure, tires 290

Tire pressure warning, see Flot Tire Moni-

tor 307

Tire repair set 309

Tires and wheels 290

Tire sealant, see Tire repair set 309

Tire settings 302

Tire tread 296

Tools 331

Torque display, see Sport displays 147

Touchpad, Controller 51

Tow bar 340

Towling 338

Towing eye 340

Tow rope 340

Tow-starting 338

Everything from A to Z

REFERENCE

Traffic Jam Assistant, see Assisted Driving Mode Plus 224

Traffic jam assistant, see Steering Assistant 220

Transmission, manual transmission 113

Transmission, see M Steptronic Sport transmission 114

Transporting children safely 105

Tread, tires 296

Trip data 142

Trip odometer, see Trip data 142

Trunk lid, emergency unlocking 83

Trunk, see Cargo area 273

Tunnel car wash 342

Turn Indicators, see Tum signals 149

Turning circle lines, additional camera view displays 231

Turn signal, indicator light 135

Turn signal, replacing bulbs, see Bulbs and lights 331

Turn signals 149

U

Ultrasonic sensors, see Vehicle sensors 35 Unintended alarm, see Unintentional alarm avoiding 87

Unintentional alarm, avoiding 87

Units, see Setting units of measurement 146

Universal remote control 262

Unlock button, M Steptronic Sport transmission 114

Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 69

Unlocking, settings 85

Unlocking the transmission lock, electronic 119

Updates made after the editorial deadline 8

Upgrade, see Remote Software Upgrade 59

Upholstery material care 345

Upper retaining strap, top tether 100

USB audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Using menus, see BMW iDrive 44

V

Valet parking mode 84

Vanity mirror 264

Vehicle battery 332

Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assistance 335

Vehicle care 344

Vehicle care products 344

Vehicle data, resetting 63

Vehicle equipment 8

Vehicle Identification number 13

Vehicle issues 335

Vehicle key 69

Vehicle key, additional 69

Vehicle key, loss 69

Vehicle paint, care 344

Vehicle paintwork 344

Vehicle rolling away, see Parking broke 121

Vehicle sensors 35

Vehicle starting, see Start/Stop button 110

Vehicle status 146

Vehicle storage 330

Ventilation 256

Ventilation, see Pre-ventilation 257

Venting, see Ventilation 256

Version Software, see Remote Software Upgrade 59

Video recording, see BMW Drive Recorder 185

Video, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En-

tertainment and Communication 6

VIN, see Vehicle identification number 13

Voice activation system 53

Voice control 53

Voice control, see BMW Intelligent Personal

Assistant 53

Voice recognition 53

Volume, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,

Entertainment, Communication 6

REFERENCE

Everything from A to Z

Warning function, rear-end collision 180

Warning light in exterior mirror, see Active

Blind Spot Detection 176

Warning light in exterior mirror, see Cross Traf-

fic Warning 182

Warning lights 131

Warning messages, see Check Control 131

Warning systems for collision hazards 164

Warning triangle 335

Warranty 9

Warranty Booklet, see Warranty 9

Washer fluid 327

Washing the vehicle 342

Washing, vehicle 342

Water on road 282

Water, see Condensation water under the

parked vehicle 284

Website, see Internet 7

Welcome lights 153

Welcome screen, driver profiles 64

Wheel change 314

Wheels and tires 290

Wheels and tires, exchange 297

Widgets, iDrive 45

Widgets, instrument cluster, see Central dis-

play area 141

Wi-Fi connection, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6

Wind deflector, defrosting 254

Wind deflector, removing condensation 254

Window, defrosting 254

Windows, powered 88

Windshield cleaning system, see Wiper system 157

Windshield, defrosting 254

Windshield, removing condensation 254

Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 327

Windshield wlpers, see Wlper system 157

Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle stor-

age 330

Winter tires 299

1.50 1 1 1

Wiper system 157

Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wireless

charging tray 267

Wireless charging tray for smartphones 267

Wood parts, core 346

Wordmatch principle, see Entry comparison 46

California Proposition 65

Warning

For vehicles sold in California:

California Proposition 65 Warning

WARNING

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP.

YOUR DIGITAL VEHICLE INFORMATION.

The BMW Driver's Guide app explains the equipment of your vehicle and offers further scopes and functions:

All information surrounding navigation, entertainment and communication

Photorealistic animations for various vehicle functions

Keyword search

360° view: Explore your vehicle interactively inside and out

Smart Scan for Apple iPhone: Icon and optical character recognition on the buttons in the vehicle

Available in more than 30 languages

Can be used offline after download